ALCATEL 9400 UX Manual PDF

ALCATEL
9400 UX
LUX50
User Manual
3CC14295AGAA TQBJA 01
Status Released
Change Note
Short Title Alcatel 9400UX LUX50 2.1

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
2/374 Issue 01 -- December 2005 3CC14295AGAA TQ BJA 01

13, 15, 18, 23, 25 or 38 GHz
Small and Medium Capacity
Digital Microwave Link
with supervision
946LUX50
3CC14295AGAA TQ BJA 01 Issue 01 -- December 2005 3/374

PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Customer Service Support:
a Team tuned to your needs for your entire satisfaction
Congratulations on having bought your equipment from Alcatel.

We hope that it will give you full satisfaction.
For any additional information, about your Alcatel Welcome Center (for Technical Support or for repair process),
please contact your Alcatel Contract Manager.


Table of contents
1 -- Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.1 -- Structure of the manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.2 -- Using the manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.3 -- Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1.3.1 -- General rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1.3.2 -- Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1.3.3 -- Symbols used in the document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.3.4 -- Certificates of compliance with European safety standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.3.5 -- Eco--Declaration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
1.3.6 -- Public exposition to electromagnetic fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2 -- Description of the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

2.1 -- Alcatel 9400 Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.1.1 -- Simplified description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.1.2 -- Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.1.3 -- ALCATEL 9400 UX features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2.1.4 -- Capacity configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2.1.5 -- Typical hardware configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2.2 -- Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2.2.1 -- 1+0 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2.2.2 -- Basic 1+1 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2.2.3 -- 1+1 configuration with multiplexer/demultiplexer protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
2.3 -- Engineering service channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
2.3.1 -- ESC number 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
2.3.2 -- ESC number 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
2.3.3 -- ESC numbers 3 and 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
2.3.4 -- ESC number 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
2.4 -- Alarms, telesignalling and remote controls (TS/TC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
2.5 -- Loopback options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
2.6 -- Equipment management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
2.7 -- IDU controls, indications and connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2.7.1 -- Classic main IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2.7.2 -- Light IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
2.7.3 -- Extension IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
2.7.4 -- Access IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
2.8 -- Technical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
2.9 -- Frequency agility bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
3 -- Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
3.1 -- Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
3.1.1 -- Checking the configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
3.2 -- Labels on the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
3.2.1 -- Typical installation dimensions (1+0 configuration with integrated 1 ft) . . . . . . . . . 68
3.3 -- Installing the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

3.3.1 -- Information required for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
3.3.2 -- Precautions concerning electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) and safety . . . . . . . 70
3.3.3 -- Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
3.3.4 -- Torques for the screws and connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
3.4 -- Installing 19 IDUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
3.4.1 -- Installation on feet or on a wall mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
3.4.2 -- Laborack or 9U subrack installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
3.5 -- Outdoor part installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
3.5.1 -- General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
3.5.2 -- Choosing antenna polarization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
3.5.3 -- Installing the configuration with pole mounting 1 + 0 (9400UXI102) . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
3.5.4 -- Installing a configuration 1+0 with pole mounting 1 + 1 (9400UXI101) and integrated
antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
3.5.5 -- Installing the (1+1) HSB configuration with integrated antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
3.5.6 -- Installation with non-integrated antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
3.6 -- Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
3.6.1 -- Wiring the power supply to the 19 indoor units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
3.6.2 -- Equipment grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
3.6.3 -- IDU/ODU wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
3.6.4 -- Wiring the 34 Mbit/s tributary and auxiliary 2 Mbit/s stream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
3.6.5 -- Wiring n x 2 Mbit/s tributaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
3.6.6 -- Engineering service channel wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
3.6.7 -- Alarm and remote control wiring (TS/TC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
3.6.8 -- Engineering service channel ESC2 telephone handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
3.7 -- Wiring between a terminals units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
3.7.1 -- Main IDU - extension IDU wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
3.7.2 -- Wiring the access IDU to a main and extension IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
3.8 -- Wiring between terminals of a station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
3.8.1 -- Tributary wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
3.8.2 -- ESC wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
4 -- Configuration and operation software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

4.1 -- Installing the software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
4.1.1 -- Warning note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
4.2 -- Summary of SW installation steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
4.2.1 -- Software loading in PC WINDOWS--NT/XP/2000 environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
4.2.2 -- Installation of CT + NE software from CD--ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
4.2.3 -- End of SW installation from SWP CD--ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
4.3 -- CT initial configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
4.3.1 -- Preliminary Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
4.3.2 -- Craft Terminal configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
4.3.3 -- NE Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
4.3.4 -- NE software downloading preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
4.4 -- Software download toward NE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
4.4.1 -- Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
4.4.2 -- Summary of the SW installation phases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
4.4.3 -- SW download to the NE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
4.5 -- NE Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
4.6 -- General Introduction to views and menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
4.6.1 -- 946LUX50 view organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
4.7 -- Introduction to the menu options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

4.8 -- CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
4.8.1 -- NE Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
4.8.2 -- Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
4.8.3 -- Alarm Severities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
4.8.4 -- System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
4.8.5 -- Quick Configuration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
4.8.6 -- Profiles Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
4.9 -- EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
4.10 -- LINE INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
4.10.1 -- Tributaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
4.10.2 -- NMS Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
4.11 -- RADIO ...................................................................... 205
4.11.1 -- Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
4.11.2 -- Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
4.11.3 -- Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
4.11.4 -- RTPC & ATPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
4.11.5 -- Power Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
4.11.6 -- BER Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
4.12 -- EXTERNAL POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
4.12.1 -- Input External Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
4.12.2 -- Output External Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
4.13 -- SUPERVISION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
4.13.1 -- Access state (allow or inhibit NE Craft access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
4.13.2 -- Restart NE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
4.13.3 -- Software Feature key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
4.14 -- PROTECTION SCHEMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
4.14.1 -- Mux/Demux Protection Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
4.14.2 -- Radio Protection Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
4.14.3 -- HSB Transmission Protection Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
4.15 -- LOOPBACKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
4.15.1 -- Available Loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
4.15.2 -- How to activate a loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
4.15.3 -- How to remove a loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
4.16 -- DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
4.16.1 -- Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
4.16.2 -- Log Browsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
4.16.3 -- Remote Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
4.16.4 -- Abnormal Condition List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
4.16.5 -- Summary Block Diagram View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
4.16.6 -- Current Configuration View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
4.17 -- PERFORMANCE MONITORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
4.17.1 -- General information on the performance monitoring process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
4.17.2 -- Performance menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
4.17.3 -- CD (Current Data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
4.17.4 -- HD (History Data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
4.17.5 -- Threshold Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
4.18 -- Software Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
4.18.1 -- Server Access Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
4.18.2 -- Init SW Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
4.18.3 -- SW Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

5 -- Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
5.1 -- Order of commissioning for a link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
5.2 -- Installing and commissioning station A (phase 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
5.2.1 -- Preliminary operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
5.2.2 -- Powering up the IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
5.2.3 -- Configuring the IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
5.2.4 -- Checking out operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
5.3 -- Installing and commissioning station B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
5.3.1 -- Preliminary operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
5.3.2 -- Pointing the antenna with pole mounting 1+1 (9400UXI101) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
5.3.3 -- Pointing the antenna with pole mounting 1+0 (9400UXI102) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
5.3.4 -- Checking out operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
5.4 -- Commissioning the link from station A (phase 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
5.4.1 -- Pointing the antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
5.4.2 -- Checking the radio transmission parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
5.4.3 -- Remote tributary loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
5.4.4 -- Checking the transmit/receive switching function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
5.4.5 -- Checking quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
5.4.6 -- End of commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
6 -- Operation, servicing and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

6.1 -- Preventive maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
6.2 -- Corrective maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
6.2.1 -- Methodology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
6.2.2 -- Analyzing IDU alarm indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
6.2.3 -- Corrective Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
6.3 -- Changing IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
6.3.1 -- Replacing like for like a Light or classic IDU (1+0 or basic 1+1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
6.3.2 -- Replacing a Light IDU with a classic IDU (1+0 only) and vice versa . . . . . . . . . . . 273
6.3.3 -- Replacing like for like a main IDU with MUX protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
6.3.4 -- Replacing like for like an extension IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
6.3.5 -- Note on IDU compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
6.4 -- Changing ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
7 -- Changing configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

7.1 -- Changing frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
7.1.1 -- Changing frequency within the same sub-band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
7.1.2 -- Changing frequency within another sub-band or a different band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
7.2 -- Changing tributaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
7.2.1 -- Enabling inactive tributaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
7.2.2 -- Changing the tributary impedance (classic IDU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
7.2.3 -- Changing the tributary impedance (Light IDU versions only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
7.2.4 -- Changing bit rate by software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
7.2.5 -- Changing bit rate by changing an LAU and LIU tributary boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
7.3 -- Changing software feature key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
7.4 -- Changing a NEs IP Address and/or OSPF Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
7.4.1 -- From the station configured as a network element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
7.5 -- Upgrading software (from 946LUXn to 946LUXn+1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
7.5.1 -- Installing 946LUX50 1320CT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

7.5.2 -- Upgrading from 946LUX12 to 946LUX50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
7.6 -- Opening an IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
7.6.1 -- Indoor unit configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
7.7 -- Telephone service channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
7.7.1 -- Deleting, inserting or changing telephone numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
7.7.2 -- Configuring the ESC 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
7.8 -- Hardware configuration of service channels 3, 4 and 5 (classic and extension IDU) . . . . . 301
7.8.1 -- Configuring ESC 3, 4 and 5 in the main IDU without ESC extension . . . . . . . . . . . 301
7.8.2 -- Configuring ESC 3, 4 and 5 in the ESC extension unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
7.8.3 -- Adding an ESC extension IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
7.9 -- Configuring ESC3 and the NMS ports (Light IDU versions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
7.9.1 -- Switch positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
7.9.2 -- Methodology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
7.10 -- Configuring remote indication loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
7.10.1 -- Classic (main) IDU remote indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
7.10.2 -- Light IDU versions remote indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
7.11 -- Changing redundancy configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
7.11.1 -- Changing from 1+0 to 1+1 without ESC extension or MUX protection . . . . . . . . . 318
7.11.2 -- Upgrading from 1+0 to 1+1 without multiplexer protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
7.11.3 -- Upgrading from 1+0 to 1+1 with multiplexer protection and access IDU . . . . . . . 319
7.11.4 -- Adding MUX protection with access IDU to a 1+1 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
7.11.5 -- Upgrading from 1+0 to 1+1 with multiplexer protection without access IDU . . . . 321
7.11.6 -- Adding MUX protection without access IDU to a 1+1 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . 322
7.12 -- Changing power level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
7.12.1 -- All frequency bands except 9418UXR201 and A9418UXR202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
7.12.2 -- Frequency bands without RTPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
7.13 -- Changing 1+1 HSB coupler polarization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
7.13.1 -- Polarization changing for former 1+1 coupler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
7.13.2 -- Polarization changing for new 1+1 coupler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
7.14 -- Changing SIMM memory boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
7.15 -- Replacing consumable items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
7.15.1 -- MCU board battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
7.15.2 -- Changing fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
7.15.3 -- Changing a fuse of an IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Appendix 1 -- Human exposure to electromagnetic fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

A.1.1 -- Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
A.1.2 -- Standards and regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
A.1.2.1 -- ICNIRP guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
A.1.2.2 -- European regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
A.1.3 -- Evaluation of safety perimeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
A.1.4 -- Safety perimeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
A.1.5 -- Implementation of protection rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
A.1.6 -- Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Appendix 2 -- Installation information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Appendix 3 -- Set of consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

Appendix 4 -- Service kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
A.4.1 -- Service kit 9400UXT102 for ODU 94xxUXR201 to 94xxUXR203 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
A.4.2 -- Short service kit 3EJ04113AAAA for A9400UX flat ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Appendix 5 -- Assembling N type coaxial connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

A.5.1 -- Type 1 fitting on cable 1AC001100022 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
A.5.2 -- Type 2 mounting on cable 1AC001100022 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Appendix 6 -- Pin out of user ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

A.6.1 -- Tributaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
A.6.1.1 -- 2 Mbit/s tributaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
A.6.1.2 -- 34 Mbit/s tributaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
A.6.2 -- Engineering service channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
A.6.2.1 -- Supervision bus interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
A.6.2.2 -- Telephone ESC with selective calling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
A.6.2.3 -- Engineering service channels ESC 3, ESC 4 and ESC 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
A.6.3 -- Alarms and TS/TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
A.6.3.1 -- ESC3 / ALARM I/O connector on the Light IDU versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
A.6.3.2 -- ALARMS I/O connector on the main IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
A.6.4 -- IDU F connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
A.6.4.1 -- 9--Pin sub--D connector wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
A.6.4.2 -- F Interface adapter cable wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Appendix 7 -- Alarm synthesis indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Appendix 8 -- Alarm Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Appendix 9 -- List of models and commercial items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

A.9.1 -- Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
A.9.2 -- Indoor equipment and software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
A.9.3 -- Commercial items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Appendix 10 -- Software and documentation list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

A.10.1 -- Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
A.10.2 -- Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Appendix 11 -- List of abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

1 -- Foreword
1.1 -- Structure of the manual
This manual is for users with a solid knowledge of how to operate and install microwave links and how to use
a PC-based craft terminal running the Windowst operating system. With this manual, you should quickly be
able to operate the equipment. This manual is not intended to replace the training services that we can provide
for your particular needs.
The manual is divided into seven chapters followed by appendixes and an Index.
-- Foreword
-- Description of the equipment
-- Installation
-- Configuration and operation software
-- Commissioning
-- Operation, servicing and maintenance
-- Changing configurations
-- Appendixes
-- Index
1.2 -- Using the manual
With this manual, you should be able to commission and operate the described equipment at a basic level.
You should always read this manual in conjunction with the attached Update document (if provided) so that
you are aware of the latest equipment upgrades.
Manual updates
This edition of the manual describes hardware and software releases of the revision indexes (and above),
detailed in Appendix 9.
In cases where an equipment upgrade affects the content of the manual, the relevant modification should be
inserted in the Update document, with the same reference number, but with code type VE (instead of TQ).
When the number or extent of the changes justifies it, they should be incorporated in the body of the manual
and the manuals revision index should be incremented.
Previous versions of this documentation release
Previous versions of this documentation are available on request
Note: MS-DOS, MICROSOFT and WINDOWS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

1.3 -- Safety instructions
1.3.1 -- General rules
The following general safety precautions must be observed by the installer and the operator. ALCATEL
assumes no liability for the customers failure to comply with these requirements.
Ground the equipment: For Safety Class 1 equipment, always connect the power cable ground to an
appropriate grounding device.
DO NOT operate the product in an explosive atmosphere or in presence of flammable gases or fumes.
For protection against fire: only replace the line fuse(s) with fuse(s) of the same voltage, current rating and
type.
Dangerous voltages: Users must not remove equipment covers or shields. The installation and maintenance
procedures described in this manual are for use by service-trained personnel only.
DO NOT operate equipment which may be damaged: Whenever it is possible that the safety protection
features built into this equipment have been impaired, ISOLATE FROM THE POWER SUPPLY and do not use
the equipment until safe operation can be verified by service--trained personnel. If necessary, return the
equipment to Alcatel After Sales for service and repair.
DO NOT substitute parts or modify equipment: Return the product to Alcatel Customer Service for servicing
and repair.
Each main IDU contains a lithium battery to back up data. This battery should be changed every 7 to 10 years,
when inventory memory becomes empty following a power outage (see 7.15.1).
CAUTION
There is a risk of explosion if the incorrect battery is used.
Only replace with a battery of the same type:
M4T28--BR12SH1, Supplier: STMicrolectronics
Observe all applicable national standards regarding the disposal of used batteries.
Do not burn and do not recharge.
1.3.2 -- Symbols
1.3.2.1 -- Danger symbols
When subsystems and modules have warning labels, it is extremely important to follow their instructions.
These labels are designed to indicate dangerous situations; they may contain any standard symbol or any text
considered necessary to protect users and employees.
The most frequent danger situations and symbols are:
Danger or general warning
! Prompts the user to refer to the manual.
Dangerous electrical voltages
Close to dangerous voltages (>42.4 V AC peak, 60 V DC; power level >240 VA) you will find
this warning label
Presence of heat-radiating mechanical parts

1.3.2.2 -- Grounding symbols
Terminal for connecting the protective ground in power supply wiring
Other ground terminal
1.3.2.3 -- Other symbols
Indicates compliance with European standards
Emissions frequency: check that this complies with the standards in use in the country.
Radiation alert
1.3.3 - Symbols used in the document

These symbols alert the reader the possible risks. They indicate:
-- the cause and type of danger,
-- the possible consequences,
-- the preventive action.
1.3.3.1 -- Warning
-- protection of personnel,
-- warning of a possibly dangerous situation,
!
-- danger of fatal or serious injury.
1.3.3.2 -- Precautions
-- protection of equipment,
-- warning of a procedure, practice or condition that could be dangerous to
equipment or its environment,
-- danger of damage to the equipment or its environment; permanent loss of data
possible.
-- This symbol, introducing the description of a procedure, indicates that it will

cause the link to be temporarily disconnected.
-- This symbol, introducing the description of a procedure, indicates that it cannot

STOP be continued without a full knowledge of the data contained in the procedure
sheet concerning the stations concerned.

1.3.4 -- Certificates of compliance with European safety standards

1.3.5 - Eco-- Declaration

1.3.6 -- Public exposition to electromagnetic fields
The public protection from electromagnetic fields emitted by the antenna of the 9400UX is one of the main
requirements of the R&TTE Directive. An evaluation of the security measures to be implemented is presented
in Appendix 1.


2 -- Description of the equipment
2.1 -- ALCATEL 9400 Family
The Alcatel 9400 is a family of digital point--to--point microwave radio systems, designed to satisfy the various
digital transmission needs of public and private networks for a large range of applications.
The Alcatel 9400 UX family covers the frequency range from 11 to 38 GHz necessary to satisfy the largest range
of propagation conditions as well as network configurations that also provide a high spectrum efficiency from
11 up to 38 GHz band with a 16QAM version.
It provides the following capacities:
-- 2x2, 4x2, 8x2, 16x2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s with the 4QAM modulation and 8x2, 16x2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s with
16QAM modulation.
The Alcatel 9400 UX family is used worldwide in:
-- cellular networks,
-- fixed access networks for Public Telecom or CLECs (Competitive Local Exchange Carrier), including:
S infrastructure of Wireless IP networks,
S direct complementary point--to--point access in LMDS (Local Multipoint Distribution Services)
networks,
-- private networks,
-- and Utility networks, Security/Defense networks, etc.
Typically, the distances achieved are:
-- from 5 to 30 km for the microwave frequencies (13 to 18 GHz),
-- from a few hundred meters up to 10 km for the millimeter wave frequencies (23 to 38 GHz).
2.1.1 -- Simplified description

The A9400 UX is fully compliant with the international requirements in the 13, 15, 18, 23, 25 and 38 GHz bands
with the main Tx/Rx separations available depending on the national regulations.
Alcatel 9400 UX -- 2x2 to 16x2 Mbit/s or 34 Mbit/s + 2Mbit/s
Designation Band Frequency Duplex difference

ETSI Standard Frequency plans
(GHz) (GHz) (MHz) *
9413 UX 13 12.75--13.25 EN 301 128 ERC 12--02 266
4QAM ITU--R Rec F497--7
9413 UX 13 12.75--13.25 EN 301 128 ERC 12--02 266
9415 UX 15 14.4--15.35 EN 301 128 ERC 12--07 728, 315, 420, 490
9415 UX 15 14,4--15,35 EN 301 128 ERC 12--07 728, 315, 420, 490
9418 UX 18 17.7--19.7 EN 301 128 ERC 12--03 1010, 1008, 340,
4QAM ITU--R Rec F595--8 1560
9418 UX 18 17,7--19,7 EN 301 128 ERC 12--03 1010, 1008, 340,

16QAM ITU--R Rec F595--8 1560, 1092.5
9423 UX 23 21.2--23.6 EN 300 198 ERC 13--0 2 annex 1008, 1197, 1200,
4QAM A ITU--R Rec 1232
F637--3

Designation Band Frequency Duplex difference
ETSI Standard Frequency plans
(GHz) (GHz) (MHz) *
9423 UX 23 21.2--23.6 EN 300 198 ERC 13--0 2 annex 1008, 1197, 1200,
16QAM A ITU--R Rec 1232
F637--3
9425 UX 25 24.5--26.52 EN 300 431 ERC 13--02 annex B 1008
4QAM Class 1 ITU--R Rec F748--4
9425 UX 25 24.5--26.52 EN 300 431 ERC 13--02 annex B 1008

16QAM Class 4 ITU--R Rec F748--4
9438 UX 38 37--39.5 EN 300 197 ERC 12--01 1260

9438 UX 38 37--39.5 EN 300 197 ERC 12--01 1260
(*) Please consult factory if other Tx/Rx separations are requested.

The Alcatel 9400 UX system features high spectrum efficiency (minimum use of RF bandwidth for a given
capacity). The spectrum efficiency is optimized with the use of a 4 QAM or 16 QAM modulation (4 or 16 states
Quadrature Amplitude Modulation) with digital filtering, providing compliance with the relevant ETSI spectrum
masks and spurious emissions requirements (ERC Rec 74--01).
16x2
Capacity (Mbit/s) 2x2 4x2 8x2
34+2
RF channeling (MHz) 3.5 7 14 28
(4QAM modulation)
RF channeling (MHz) -- -- 7 14
(16QAM modulation)
2.1.2 - Configuration
2.1.2.1 -- Unprotected configuration
An Alcatel 9400 UX unprotected (1+0) radio terminal is made up of the following elements:
-- an Outdoor Unit (ODU): incorporating the complete RF transceiver (modem, RF units, branching filter)
and an integrated or separated antenna.The ODU is capacity independent,
-- an Indoor Unit (IDU): incorporating the baseband processing and offering tributary interfaces as well
as service channels and supervision.
The IDU is frequency independent (same unit from 13 up to 38 GHz).
Different IDU configurations are available depending on system configuration:
-- a light version available in 1+0 configuration and up to 4x2 Mbit/s,
-- a classic version allowing all possible configurations (1+0, 1+1, capacity up to 16x2 or 34 +2 Mbit/s).

These two IDU versions are compatible with a same ODU and can be mixed in the same network.
-- a single coaxial cable of a length which can be up to 300 m.
Main IDU and Equipment Craft Terminal 1+0 9400 UX Outdoor Unit on its pole mounting, with 30 New generation unit 9400UX flat ODU
cm integrated antenna
Figure 1 - Alcatel 9400 UX 1+0 configuration
2.1.2.2 -- Protected configuration

Two types of problem can impact the availability of a radio link: equipment failures and propagation problems.
1+1 protected configurations are used to increase the availability of the link compared to 1+0 unprotected
configuration, by adding redundant functions to the equipment on the Outdoor and Indoor parts:
-- to secure the link in case of temporary (transient alarm) or definitive (equipment failure) malfunction,
-- to improve the performances of the equipment towards propagation problem (in some outdoor unit
configurations only).
The (1+1) configurations include automatic errorless Rx switching.

If the link is protected, wayside traffic and auxiliary channels are automatically protected.
Various protected configurations are available with the following applications:
ODU CONFIGURATION APPLICATIONS
9400 UX
1+0 1x ODU Non--protected
1x antenna single
polarization
1+1 HSB 2x ODU at same Protection against failures
frequency
1x coupler
1x antenna single
polarization
1+1 HSB SD 2x ODU at same Protection against failures Improvement of
frequency performance versus
2x antenna single multipath propagation
polarization
1+1 FD 2x ODU at different Protection against failures Improvement of
frequencies performance versus
2x antenna single multipath propagation
polarization (or 1 antenna
dual polarization)
SD : Space Diversity, FD: frequency diversity

The above mentioned outdoor unit configurations must be associated with one of the following indoor unit
configurations:
IDU CONFIGURATION APPLICATIONS

1+0 classic IDU Non--protected
Light IDU
1+0 EXT classic IDU Non--protected Possible to insert
Light IDU dedicated service channel
extension cards.
1+1 BASIC MAIN IDU (classic) Automatic switching:
PROTECTION EXTENSION IDU (without selection of the best
MUX option) receive path and
operational transmitter (in
case of HSB)
1+1 WITH MUX MAIN IDU Automatic switching: Protection of the tributary
PROTECTION EXTENSION IDU (with selection of the best access including
MUX option) receive path and redundant mux--demux
operational transmitter (in
ACCESS IDU (34 Mbit/s case of HSB)
only
2.1.3 -- ALCATEL 9400 UX features
2.1.3.1 -- Equipment flexibility
Software controlled frequency:

The in--field agility of the 9400 UX is provided on a quarter frequency plan (synthesizer step 250 kHz). Only four
different ODUs maximum are needed to cover the full frequency band.
Figure 2 - Sub- band breakdown
The synthesized, software controlled, RF local oscillator allows easy frequency setting.
Software controlled capacity:

The Alcatel 9400 UX system provides unique capacity agility features, controlled by software up to a maximum
bit rate. This maximum can be adjusted from 2x2 Mbit/s to 16x2 Mbit/s using the appropriate software features
key.
The system capacity can be configured by software to between 2x2 Mbit/s and the maximum authorized by the
software features key.
Moreover, capacity upgrade can be made easily by changing only the software features key.
Transmission power control:
In certain cases, the output power of the equipment has to be decreased, to reduce interference between other
links in case of very short hops. This feature improves the flexibility of the network design and also increases
frequency reutilisation
Different implementations of transmission power control are available depending on the frequency bands:

-- At 13 GHz (3CC09297Axxx),15 GHz (3CC08880Axxx and 3CC08978Axxx) and 18 GHz, insertion of
fixed attenuators (of 3, 6 or 10 dB) on transmission side in the ODU.
-- for the 13 GHz 4QAM (3CC11737Axxx) and the 16QAM (3CC 11736Axxx), a software transmission
power control of 20 dB in 1 dB step can be provided (as a software features key option with classic IDU,
embedded within the Light IDU)
-- for the 15 GHz 4QAM (3CC12979Axxx), a software transmission power control of 30 dB in 1 dB step
can be provided (as a software features key option with classic IDU, embedded within the Light IDU)
-- in the millimetric frequency bands (23 to 38 GHz), a software transmission power control of 30 dB in
1 dB step for the 4QAM and of 20 dB in a 1 dB step for the 16 QAM, can be provided (as a software
features key option with classic IDU; embedded within the Light IDU).
-- for all new generation ODU (ref. A9400 UX flat ODU) frequency bands for the 4 or 16QAM, the software
power transmission control of 30 dB in 1db step can be provided with the software features key.
software features key parameters:
Figure 3 - Software features key

The software features key, used with the classic IDU, provides flexibility for the configuration parameters of the
equipment, as well as its options:
-- maximum configuration definition: 1+0 or 1+1,
-- maximum capacity definition: 2x2 Mbit/s up to 16x2 Mbit/s or 34 Mbits/s,
-- authorisation for 16QAM modulation,
-- set--up of transmission frequency range (7 to 40 GHz by default but configurable upon customer specific
request),
-- authorization for Transmit Power Control option (all bands except 18 GHz),
-- authorization for Embedded Mediation option (master terminal or slave terminal),
The Light IDU features a fixed embedded configuration (no removable software features key):
-- maximum configuration: 1+0,
-- capacity: 2x2 Mbit/s up to 4x2 Mbit/s,
-- Transmit Power Control option enabled (all bands except 18 GHz),
Link Identity Coding:
The amount of microwave links, especially in urban areas puts the problem of possible interference during
installation and turn--on phase.
The digital frame incorporates Link Identity coding capabilities to prevent the capture of an unwanted signal.
2.1.3.2 -- Ease of installation
The Alcatel 9400 UX systems have been designed to allow quick installation and turn--on.
Compact Outdoor Unit:
The Outdoor unit (ODU) is housed in a very compact and robust weatherproof (IP 55) container; it is delivered
with a solar shield which provides protection to the outdoor electronics in hot and very sunny climatic zones.

The Outdoor Unit (1 or 2 depending on the configuration 1+0 or 1+1) can be rapidly installed on suitable poles
with their own fastening system.
The specific pole mounting is equipped with an accurate alignment system -- presetting and fine elevation and
bearing tuning -- to permit easy pointing with the integrated antenna. A very compact pole mounting has been
optimized for 1+0 configuration, it is common to 9400UX from 13 to 38 GHz.
The 9400 UX outdoor unit can be used with an integrated antenna 300 or 600 mm diameter or separate
antennas if a larger diameter is needed.
The ODU is fixed by means of quick latches. This system allows you to change the ODU without altering the
antenna alignment.
Two ODU generations are available. The new generation ODU, A9400 UX flat ODU, is lighter than the previous
range from 94xxUXR201 to 94xxUXR203*. It is 4 and 16QAM compatible and software configurable only.
* xx is for the band frequency of the Outdoor unit. For example, a unit referenced 9413UXR204 depends on the
13GHz frequency band
ODU 94xxUXR201, 94xxUXR202 ODU A9400 UX flat ODU

or 94xxUXR203
Figure 4 - Installation of the ODU
The alignment of the antenna can be easily performed with the use of a dedicated service kit. This kit , when
connected to the ODU, is able to show the reception signal level and provide the connection to the other end
of the link through a telephone service channel (when applicable).
Different IDU mechanical versions:
The small size of the 19 IDU (classic or light) -- 1U high for all capacities, depth 235mm allows for easy
installation in standard 19 racks and saves a lot of space where space is limited like in shelters or base stations
in cellular or LMDS networks.
The 19 IDU can also be installed as a desktop unit.
Figure 5 - Light 19 IDU
Single coaxial cable:

A single coaxial cable of up to 300 m connects the ODU and the IDU, so that a high flexibility is left for locating
the radio and antenna.

Simple commissioning:
All the standard Site Acceptance Tests can be done with a single PC to commission the link, making extensive
use of built--in supervision features:
-- continuous performance check and alarm status overview,
-- numerous baseband loopback facilities,
-- built--in PRBS generator and error counters.
The transmission side incorporates a built--in PRBS (Pseudo Random Bit Sequence) generator able to insert
a standard test signal for the link Bit Error Rate measurements, in order to facilitate initial turn--on. The PRBS
can be switched on remotely.
2.1.3.3 -- Equipment software features

The Alcatel 9400 UX terminal provides a F interface to a Craft Terminal (PC), which enables alarm monitoring,
quality measurement, and configuration of the equipment.
The Alcatel 9400 UX Network Element (NE) supports a basic group of applications, listed hereafter, which
provide simplified testing, operation and maintenance of the equipment:
-- Installation and Operation parameters:
S Configuration of: capacity, Link Identity Code, Tx & Rx frequencies, output power (if available
through software),
-- Alarm, Status and Control:
S Possibility to activate or inhibit alarm indications,
S Possibility to configure alarms with different severity levels,
S The software displays a synthesis of the monitored alarms (which are also available via dry loops).
S Possibility to set threshold values at which the alarms are triggered.
-- Performance Monitoring G784:
S Link quality monitoring : Background Block Errors, Errored Seconds, Severely Errored Seconds,
Unavailable Seconds.
-- Remote inventory:
S The remote inventory is used to read the information allowing a complete identification of the
selected Network Element (Indoor Unit and Outdoor Unit): serial number, date of manufacture,
reference and revision index of the hardware and software releases.
-- Maintenance Memory:
S The maintenance memory application allows the display of the last dated alarms stored in the
equipment when the Craft Terminal is not connected.
-- Power measurements:
S This application is used to take measurements on various measurement points and displays them
on the screen: min Rx power, current Rx power, etc..
2.1.3.4 -- Network Management

The network management solutions proposed are based on an advanced concept offering the following
advantages :
Network Element Synthesis view:
The management system offers a Network Element Synthesis view, displaying in real time the synthesis of the
alarms of each supervised network element. This feature allows very quick and efficient troubleshooting.
Network Element view:
Each superevised NE can be managed in a dedicated Network Element view allowing easy configuration and
supervision of the NE.

2.1.4 - Capacity configurations
2.1.4.1 -- Classic IDU version
The capacity configurations depend:

-- on the type of line interface units (LAU and LIU) installed in the IDU(s),
-- the software features key used.
The table below summarizes the capabilities according to the bit rates supported by the IDU of the equipment
and the type of software features key used.
BIT RATES SUPPORTED BY SOFTWARE FEATURES KEY

IDU TYPE
2x2 4x2 8x2 16x2
2x2 Mbit/s 2x2 Mbit/s 2x2 Mbit/s 2x2 Mbit/s
4x2
4x2 Mbit/s 4x2 Mbit/s 4x2 Mbit/s
8x2 4x2 Mbit/s 4x2 Mbit/s 4x2 Mbit/s
8x2 Mbit/s 8x2 Mbit/s

4x2 Mbit/s 4x2 Mbit/s 4x2 Mbit/s
16 x 2
8x2 Mbit/s 8x2 Mbit/s
16x2 Mbit/s
34 Mbit/s + 2
34 -- -- --
Mbit/s auxiliary
2.1.4.2 -- Light IDU versions
The Light IDU versions cover the following bit rates (software configured):
-- 2x2 Mbit/s,
-- 4x2 Mbit/s.
2.1.5 -- Typical hardware configurations
1+0 configuration
integrated antenna
1+0 configuration with sepa-

rate antenna
1+1 HSB or frequency diver-

sity configuration with two an-
tennas

1+1 HSB configuration
using an HSB coupler and in-
tegrated antenna
1+1 HSB configurations with

multiplexer protection or
The block diagrams representing the main configurations appear in Figures 6 to 10 on the following pages.

2.2 -- Operation
2.2.1 -- 1+0 configuration

A block diagram of this configuration is given:
-- in figure 6 for the classic IDU version,
-- in figure 7 for the Light IDU versions.
MAIN INDOOR UNIT OUTDOOR UNIT
DC Power supply Multiplexing and control Modem IF RF Antenna

unit block equip.
(MCU)
Local loop Attenuator
Tributaries
Tributary ports Tributary interface Cable Cable
1 to 16 Power supply
(LAU) (LIU) interface
One 2 Mbit/s aux. unit
bit stream
(only at 34 Mbit/s)
EXT
Feature
key F Tel. Back to TS/TC Service
back alarms kit
NMS ESC
(Supervision 3/4/5
bus) Equipment not included in
the standard configuration
Alcatel or but sold as options
Customer
OS
(SNMP)
Figure 6 - Block diagram of a 1+ 0 station (classic IDU version)
INDOOR UNIT OUTDOOR UNIT
DC Power supply Multiplexing and control Modem & IF RF

Antenna
unit Monitoring block equip.
(MCU Light)
Local loop Attenuator
Cable
Cable interface Power supply
Tributaries Tributary ports Tributary interface
1 to 4 unit
F NMS TS/TC Light

(Supervision alarms Service kit
bus) ESC3 Functions set up in the
MCU Light board
Alcatel or
Customer
OS Equipment not included in
the standard configuration
(SNMP) but sold as options
Figure 7 - Block diagram of a 1+ 0 station (Light IDU versions)

2.2.1.1 -- Operation of the main IDU (InDoor Unit) (classic IDU version)
The Line Access Units (LAU) offer all the passive functions required to provide transmission and reception
G.703 interfaces for the tributaries and 2 Mbit/s auxiliary bit stream (when there is one). This mainly entails
impedance matching. Two types of board can be used:
-- LAU 3CC06059Axxx: eight ports for 2 Mbit/s tributaries (two boards of this type are used for the
16 x 2 Mbit/s configuration),
-- LAU 3CC06061Axxx: one port for 34 Mbit/s + one 2 Mbit/s auxiliary bit stream port.
The LIU (Line Interface Unit) boards provide all the active functions required for transmission and reception
mode G.703 interfacing of tributaries and the 2 Mbit/s auxiliary bit stream (mainly HDB3 { HCMOS code
conversion). The LIU boards are daughter boards that plug into the MCU board. Three types of board can be
used:
-- LIU 3CC05818Axxx: four ports for 2 Mbit/s tributaries,
-- LIU 3CC06026Axxx: eight ports for 2 Mbit/s tributaries,
-- LIU 3CC06119Axxx: eight port extension unit, used in conjunction with the eight port LIU board,
3CC06026Axxx, for the 16 x 2 Mbit/s configuration,
-- LIU 3CC06118AAxx: one port for 34 Mbit/s + one 2 Mbit/s auxiliary bit stream port.
The Multiplexing and Control Unit (MCU) handles:
-- multiplexing/demultiplexing functions, to assemble the aggregate for transmission and restore the
tributaries from the received aggregate,
-- dropping/insertion of engineering service channels (up to 5) and the 2 Mbit/s auxiliary bit stream (when
there is one):
S ESC N_1: reserved for the supervision channel,
S ESC N_2: telephone channel with selective calling,
S ESC N_3: V.11 or V.28 64 kbit/s interface,
S ESC N_4 and N_5: V.11 64 kbit/s interfaces (not available for the 2 x 2 Mbit/s rate),
-- connection of local supervision system, for connecting a supervision PC.
-- processing of external commands: telesignalling and remote controls (TS/TC),
-- control of the outdoor unit,
-- interfacing with the outdoor unit, for:
S power feed to the ODU,
S transmitting and receiving the aggregate,
S transmitting and receiving ODU supervision function transmission and reception,
S telephone ESC transmission and reception between the IDU and the ODU,
-- storage of events in battery--assured maintenance memory.
The Power Supply Unit (PSU) is available in two versions, 24 V or 48 V DC floating, for primary power supplies.
It provides DC/DC conversion to generate the necessary voltages required to operate the indoor unit and the
primary power supply voltage of the outdoor unit.

2.2.1.2 -- Operation of the Light IDU versions
The Light MCU (Light Multiplexing and Control Unit) handles:
-- all passive functions (mainly impedance matching) and active functions (mainly HDB3 { CMOS code
conversion) needed for transmission and reception mode G.703 interfacing of the four tributaries,
-- multiplexing/demultiplexing functions, to create the aggregate to be transmitted and recreate the
tributaries from the received aggregate,
-- engineering service channel drop and insert functions:
S ESC N_1: reserved for the supervision channel,
S ESC N_3: V.11 or V.28 64 kbit/s interface,
-- connection of local supervision system, for connecting a supervision PC. To operate the LUX50
software, additional SIMM memory must be added (option sold by reference 9400UXB267).
-- processing of external controls: telesignalling and remote controls (TS/TC),
-- control of the Outdoor unit,
-- interfacing with the Outdoor unit for:
S transmission and reception of the aggregate,
S transmission and reception of ODU supervision channels,
S ODU power feed.
For the Light IDU, the types of power supply available are:
S 19 Light IDU: 24 V DC or 48 V DC floating (This version is a low power consumption version,
allowing the operation of the Light IDU without fans).
2.2.1.3 -- IDU/ODU cable

A coaxial cable, only available in 50 ohm impedance version, with a maximum length of 300 meters (when of
standard type), connects the IDU to the ODU. This carries:
-- the digital data streams between the IDU and the ODU, comprising:
S the aggregate obtained from tributary multiplexing,
S the ODU control signals,
S in the case of a classic IDU, the IDU/ODU telephone channel (connected to ESC N_2).
-- the ODUs primary DC power supply voltage.

2.2.1.4 -- OutDoor Unit (ODU) operation
The reference of the outdoor unit depends on the frequency band.
The cable interface handles:
-- reception and transmission of the data streams,
-- separation of the signals and the power supply voltage to feed the units subsystems,
-- the interface for the aggregate for transmission or reception with the modem.
The Modem (modulator/demodulator) function receives the aggregate from the cable interface and processes
the baseband signal for microwave transmission by 4QAM or 16QAM modulation, as follows:
-- in transmission:
S digital filtering and error correction coding (FEC),
S digital/analogue conversion of bit streams I and Q from the encoding function;
-- in reception:
S a part of the automatic gain control (AGC) function,
S analogue/digital conversion of the I and Q bit streams from the demodulation function.
It interfaces with the IF unit for the transmission and reception of the I and Q bit streams.
The IF block handles modulation and demodulation of the aggregate, using the following functions:
-- in transmission:
S analogue filtering of the I and Q bit streams (two filters that can be switched according to capacity),
S 4QAM or 16QAM modulation of an IF carrier, according to the frequency plan adopted, generated
by a local internal oscillator,
S level amplification and tuning (AGC), based on measurement of the rms power output from the
block;
-- in reception:
S amplification, with AGC, of the received signal, transposed via the reception system according to
the frequency plan adopted,
S demodulation of the signal, so that the I and Q bit streams can be recovered,
S amplification and analogue filtering of the bit streams (two filters that can be switched according
to capacity),
S amplification, with AGC, before transmission of the I and Q bit streams to the Modem board.
The transmission mixer transposes the intermediate frequency to a microwave frequency. Frequency agility
is obtained by a synthesized local oscillator (LO).
The transmission RF signal is then transmitted to the power amplifier, monitored by an output power slaving
device and a circuit for cutting off carrier transmission if a fault is detected in the transmission circuits.

For the 13 GHz and the 23 to 38 GHz frequency bands, the transmitted power can be adjusted in 1 dB steps
by software configuration (software key option needed), within a range of:
-- --20 dB from nominal output power for 13 GHz (94xxUXR202 and 94xxUXR203),
-- --30 dB from nominal output power for 15, 23, 25, 38 GHz (4QAM RTPC),
-- --20 dB from nominal output power for 23, 25, 38 GHz (94xxUXR203 16QAM).
-- --30 dB from nominal output power for all frequency bands of the ODU 9400UX flat ODU.
For the 11, 13, 15 and 18 GHz frequency bands (without RTPC option), attenuators can be inserted on the
transmission output (optional).
The reception RF signal from the branching filter is applied to the RF reception circuit, comprising a cascaded
RF low noise amplifier (except at 38 GHz), a mixer and an IF amplifier. The mixer, which receives the amplified
RF frequency, transposes the RF signal to a reception IF signal using the same LO as the transmission mixer.
When amplified, the signal is sent to the IF blocks reception circuits for demodulation.
The branching filter comprises a duplexed filter for separating the transmission and reception RF signals
present at the antenna port. It can accommodate the RF loopback (94xxUXR201, 94xxUXR202 and
94xxUXR203, and included into A9400UX flat ODU), which uses a conversion stage for converting transmission
and reception frequencies for test purposes.
The PSU receives the primary voltage from the IDU via the link cable and, from it, generates the voltages
required to operate the subsystems of the Outdoor unit.
2.2.1.5 -- ESC extension configuration
This extension, available only in the classic IDU version, can be used to customize ESC N_3 and N_4 and
5 as detailed in 2.3. It requires the presence of an extension IDU with a dedicated SCU (Service Channel Unit)
board.
2.2.2 -- Basic 1+1 configuration

This configuration is available only in the classic IDU version.
It comprises (Figure 8) a main IDU (identical to the one in the 1+0 configuration), an extension IDU and two
ODUs.
The extension unit contains a Service Channel Unit (SCU) which handles the following functions:
-- user interfaces for ESCs 3 to 5,
-- control of the second ODU,
-- interface with the second ODUs link cable.
The MCU of the main unit sends the aggregate to be transmitted to the SCU and receives the reception
aggregate from it. The MCU is responsible, in reception, for switching between the normal and standby
channels.
There are three configurations:
-- Hot Standby (HSB), one antenna port
-- Hot Standby, two antenna ports
-- Frequency diversity.

DC
Tributaries MAIN INDOOR UNIT Cable OUTDOOR

1 to 16 UNIT
To
One 2 Mbit/s aux. bit coupler
stream (only at 34 or
Mbit/s) Antenna
Feature
key F Tel. Back TS/TC ESC EXT Service
to alarms 3/4/5 kit
NMS
back
(Supervision
bus)
Alcatel or
Customer
OS
(SNMP)
Cable OUTDOOR
DC EXTENSION INDOOR UNIT UNIT
To
coupler
or
Antenna
EOW3 EOW4 EOW5 Service

kit
Equipment not included in the standard configuration but sold as options
Figure 8 - Block diagram of 1+1 station
2.2.2.1 -- HSB configuration with one antenna port

The two ODUs are connected by an HSB coupler which provides a 10 dB attenuation on the standby channel.
In addition, by design, the standby amplifiers power is:
-- reduced by 15 dB for the ODU which does not permit an output power control,
-- cut off for the ODU which permits the output power control.
The HSB switching of a transmitter is based on detection of a fault which can originate from a failure:
-- of the cable interface,
-- of the ODU power supply,
-- of the transmission IF synthesizer,
-- of the RF synthesizer,
-- of the amplifier.
The system switches back to the normal channel automatically as soon as it is disconnected and reconnected
again without alarm (because of imbalance in the system), in transmission and in reception.
Switching can also be remotely controlled, by manually switching to the standby channel. The remote control
for cutting off transmission power does not cause a switchover.
2.2.2.2 -- HSB configuration with two antenna ports
This configuration uses either a double polarization antenna or two antennas (in this case, it also adds space
diversity). One system sends (the standby transmitter is cut off). Operation is the same as in the previous
configuration, apart from the switching, in which reversibility is not required because the link budgets are
identical for both channels.
2.2.2.3 -- Frequency diversity configuration
The two ODUs send the aggregate simultaneously at two different frequencies. The MCU chooses the best of
the two signals on reception. This configuration also uses two antenna ports.

2.2.3 - 1+1 configuration with multiplexer/demultiplexer protection
This configuration is available only in the classic IDU version.
It can be used (see Figure 10) to protect the link from failures of the MCU board in the main IDU. It comprises:
-- a main IDU, as in the 1+0 configuration but whose tributaries are configured in high impedance.
-- an extension IDU.
-- an access IDU (delivered with all configurations).
-- two ODUs.
DC
To
Tributaries MAIN INDOOR UNIT Cable OUTDOOR coupler
1 to 16 UNIT or
Antenna
2 Mbit/s aux.
(only at 34
Mbit/s)
Feature
Tributaries 1 to 16 key F Tel. Back to TS/TC VDS EXT Service
back alarms 3/4/5 kit
NMS
(Supervision
bus)
Alcatel or
Customer
OS
(SNMP)
DC
To
Cable OUTDOOR coupler
Tributaries EXTENSION INDOOR UNIT UNIT or
1 16 Antenna
2 Mbit/s aux.
(only at 34
Mbit/s)

kit
Figure 9 - Block diagram of a 1+1 station with multiplexer protection without access unit

DC
To
Tributaries MAIN INDOOR UNIT Cable OUTDOOR coupler
1 to 16 UNIT or
Antenna
ACCESS 2 Mbit/s
INDOOR auxiliary (only at
UNIT 34 Mbit/s)
Feature
key F Tel. Back to TS/TC ESC EXT Service
Tributaries
NMS back alarms 3/4/5 kit
1 to 16
(Supervision
bus)
2 Mbit/s Alcatel or
auxiliary bit Customer
stream OS
(only at 34 (SNMP)
Mbit/s)
DC
To
Cable OUTDOOR coupler
Tributaries EXTENSION INDOOR UNIT UNIT or
1 to 16
Antenna
2 Mbit/s auxiliary
(only at 34 Mbit/s

kit
Figure 10 - Block diagram of a 1+1 station with multiplexer protection

The extension IDU contains the same LAU and LIU boards as the main IDU, configured in high impedance,
plus an SCU board to handle the following functions:
-- hitless switching on reception,
-- user interfaces for ESCs 3 to 5,
-- customization of ESCs 3 and 4 by the addition of daughter boards (see 2.3),
-- control of the second ODU,
-- interfacing for the second ODUs link cable.
The MCU boards of the main IDU and the SCU board of the extension IDU exchange the aggregates sent and
received.
The access IDU contains a dedicated LAU combination board which handles:
-- in transmission, distribution of the tributary signals to the main and extension IDUs,
-- in reception, transmission of the tributary signals from the active IDU.
All the basic 1+1 configurations are also available in 1+1 configurations with multiplexer protection (refer to
2.2.2.1 to 2.2.2.3).

2.3 -- Engineering service channels
The equipment comprises:
-- in the classic IDU configuration: five engineering service channels (ESC N_1 to ESC N_5), except
in the 2 x 2 Mbit/s configuration (only three ESC).
-- in the Light IDU configuration: two engineering service channels (ESC N_1 and ESC N_3).
In the main classic IDU and in the Light IDU, the characteristics of these engineering service channels are
predefined.
The extension IDU (classic IDU version) can be used to customize ESC N_3, N_4 and N_5. This unit has a SCU
board installed with daughter boards to customize ESC N_3 and N_4.
The table below summarizes the ESC options available according to whether the configuration includes a main
IDU (classic, Light) or a classic main IDU with an extension IDU.
1+0 BASIC CONFIGU-

1+0 CONFIGURATION OTHER CLASSIC IDU
ESC RATION
WITH Light IDU CONFIGURATIONS
WITH classic IDU
ESC N_1 Supervision Supervision Supervision (1)

Telephone with selective
ESC N_2 Telephone with selective calling (1)
calling
Depending on daughter board used: (3)
S 64 kbit/s point-to-point, codirectional G.703
interface, ref.: 3CC05710AAxx
S Four-wire analogue, 600 ohms,
ref.: 3CC05711AAxx
S 64 kbit/s point-to-point, V11 or V28
ref.: 3CC05712AAxx
ESC N_3 V11 or V28 64 kbit/s V11 or V28 64 kbit/s (2)
S Digital asynchronous (1 x 9600 bit/s or
2 x 4800 bit/s), V11 point-to-point or point-
to-multipoint (three-way coupler),
ref.: 3CC05713AAxx
S Digital asynchronous (1 x 9600 bit/s max.
or 2 x 4800 bit/s max.), V28 point-to-point
or point-to-multipoint (three-way coupler),
ref.: 3CC06482AAxx
ESC N_4
(Bit rate 64 kbit/s V11 (2) As ESC N_ 3 (3)
> 2x2 Mbit/s)
ESC N_5
(Bit rate 64 kbit/s V11 (2) 64 kbit/s V11 or V28 (3)
> 2x2 Mbit/s)
(1) Access on main IDU.

(2) Access on main IDU if there is no extension IDU.
(3) Access on extension IDU.

2.3.1 -- ESC number 1
ESC N_1 supports the bus reserved for supervision. The bus is implemented between the stations by a radio
link (channel 1 and channel X in a 1+1 configuration) and is available in the stations, at connectors NMS1 and
NMS2, for setting up point-to-multipoint links (Figure 11).
STATION A STATION B STATION C
TERMINAL A1 TERMINAL B1 TERMINAL B2 TERMINAL C1
NMS1 NMS2 NMS1 NMS2 NMS1 NMS2 NMS1 NMS2

cable
3CC07711AAxx
9400UXC332 STATION D
3CC07711AAxx
9400UXC332
TERMINAL B3 TERMINAL D1
cable
NMS1 NMS2 NMS1 NMS2
Figure 11 - Supervision links
With the 946LUX50 software, 254 up to 65534 addresses are available when the sub--network is chosen in
class B. Two terminals in the same network should not have the same IP address.
Since many configurations are possible, it is recommended that you contact Alcatel for the network
configuration.
Each port is enabled or disabled in the system software (IP Configuration(see 4.8.2.3): MSU1 radio
inputs/outputs, NMS1 and NMS2 cables.
Radio
MSU1
Routing Supervision
With
946LUX50
NMS1
NMS2
software
NMS1 NMS2
Figure 12 - Supervision bus continuity

Engineering service channel N_2 is a telephone channel with selective calling available only in the classic
IDU version. The handset is connected to the connector on the main IDU. Each terminal is
assigned a call number between 011 and 999 (not including X00) on installation. The number 00 is for general
calling. Two terminals in the network should not have the same telephone number. ESC N_2 is available
(Figure 13):
-- in digital form, at the BACK TO BACK connector of the main IDU, for digital transfers in stations with
two terminals back-to-back.
-- in analogue form, at the AUDIO 1 and AUDIO 2 connectors of the main IDU, for setting up a
point-to-multipoint link,

STATION A STATION B
TERMINAL A1 TERMINAL A2 TERMINAL B1 TERMINAL B2
BACK TO BACK BACK TO BACK BACK TO BACK BACK TO BACK
Digital link AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 Digital link STATION C

cable 3CC08729AAxx cable 3CC08729AAxx
9400UXC333 9400UXC333
cable 3CC07711AAxx
9400UXC332
Analogue link
TERMINAL B3 TERMINAL C1
AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2
Figure 13 - Telephone ESC
2.3.3 -- ESC numbers 3 and 4

2.3.3.1 -- Without extension IDU
If there is no extension IDU:
-- ESC N_3 is a V11 or V28 point-to-point 64 kbit/s channel,
-- ESC N_4 is a V11 point-to-point 64 kbit/s channel (not applicable to the Light IDU versions).
The V11 or V28 equipment connects to the ESC. EXT. connector of the main IDU.
2.3.3.2 -- With extension IDU (not applicable to the Light IDU versions)
With an extension IDU, the ESCs can be digital (G.703 or V11/V28 64 kbit/s, V11 or V28 9.6 or 4.8 kbit/s) or
analogue (four-wire telephone channel + TTL interface of RON/TRON type), point-to-point or
point-to-multipoint. The ESCs are customized by daughter boards described in 7.9.
POINT-TO-POINT ESC
Connection for the ESC equipment:
-- ESC N_3: to the ESC 3-1 connector of the extension IDU.
-- ESC N_4: to the ESC 4-1 connector of the extension IDU.
Connection of two terminals back-to-back: each of the terminals must have an extension IDU with an ESC board
of the same type. The link is set up by a cable linking ports ESC 3-1 (ESC N_3) and ESC4-1 (ESC N_4) on
the extension IDUs of the two terminals.

POINT-TO-MULTIPOINT ESC
This type of ESC can be used only for asynchronous digital links.
Connection for the ESC equipment:
-- ESC N_3: to connectors ESC 3-1 and ESC3-2 of the extension IDU,
-- ESC N_4: to connectors ESC 4-1 and ESC4-2 of the extension IDU.
The connection of the terminals for ESC N_3 is illustrated in Figure 14. The connection principles are the same
for ESC N_4, replacing ESC 3-1 with ESC 4-1 and ESC 3-2 with ESC 4-2.
STATION A STATION B STATION C
TERMINAL A1 TERMINAL C1
TERMINAL B1 TERMINAL B2
MAIN MAIN MAIN MAIN

IDU IDU IDU IDU
ESC. EXT. ESC. EXT. ESC. EXT. ESC. EXT.

3CC07157AAxx 3CC07157AAxx 3CC07157AAxx 3CC07157AAxx
9400UCX130 9400UCX130 9400UCX130 9400UCX130
ESC. MAIN ESC. MAIN ESC. MAIN ESC. MAIN
ESC EXT. ESC EXT. ESC EXT. ESC EXT.
ESC 3-1 ESC 3-1 ESC 3-2 ESC 3-1 ESC 3-2 ESC 3-1
ASYNC. Baseband link ASYNC.

V.28 EQUIP. cable 3CC07711AAxx V.28 EQUIP.
9400UXC332
STATION D
TERMINAL B3 TERMINAL D1
Cable 3CC07711AAxx
MAIN MAIN
IDU IDU
Baseband link
9400UXC332
ESC. EXT. ESC. EXT.

3CC07157AAxx 3CC07157AAxx
9400UCX130 9400UCX130
ESC. MAIN ESC. MAIN
ESC EXT. ESC EXT.
ESC 3-1 ESC 3-2 ESC 3-1
ASYNC.
V.28 EQUIP.
Figure 14 - Point-to-multipoint engineering service channel ESC3

Channel not available in the Light IDU versions.
2.3.4.1 -- Without extension IDU
As ESC N_4.
2.3.4.2 -- With extension IDU
ESC N_5 can only be a V11 or V28 point-to-point link.
Connection of the ESC equipment: to connector ESC 5 of the extension IDU.
Connection of two terminals back-to-back to form a repeater station: each of the terminals must have an
extension IDU with an ESC board of the same type. The link is implemented by a cable connecting the ESC 5
ports of the extension IDUs of the two terminals.

2.4 -- Alarms, telesignalling and remote controls (TS/TC)
The equipment has:
-- Two loops preassigned for Service affecting alarm (SA), and Non-service affecting alarm (NSA)
states. Each alarm generated by the equipment can be classified as Critical, Major, Minor, Warning,
Indeterminate, or Cleared by the supervisory software.
-- A remote control loop, available to the user.
The three contacts of this loop (common, N/C and N/O) are accessible:
S on the ALARM. I/O connector of the main classic IDU,
S on the ESC 3/ALARM I/O connector of the Light IDU,
The loop formed by the common and normally closed contacts is normally closed (in the
absence of an alarm condition or remote control).
-- eight housekeeping alarms (remote indications via dry loops), available to the user. The remote
indication loops are configured as normally open and can be configured as normally closed, depending
on the setting of the swaps on the MCU board, as described in 7.10.1. A name can be assigned to
each loop, in the software, on installation. These loops are available:
S on the ALARM. I/O connector of the main classic IDU,
S on the ESC 3/ALARM I/O connector of the Light IDU unit,
EQUIPMENT Housekeeping loop, EQUIPMENT

normally open (in the
absence of an alarm condition)
Relay position in the
absence of an alarm
Normally open CHOICE
condition or remote
control Common Housekeeping loop
Normally closed normally closed (in the
absence of an alarm)
0.5 A / 100 V
dry loops
REMOTE CONTROL REMOTE INDICATIONS

AND ALARMS
Figure 15 - Remote control, alarms and remote indications
2.5 -- Loopback options

The loopback options are provided on the active channel to facilitate commissioning and maintenance
operations. Figure 16 shows the positioning of the loops according to the configuration.
Each local loop loops the aggregate:
-- at the output of the main IDU {, and the extension IDU ,
-- at the input of the main ODU | and the extension ODU ~, to check the cable link between the IDU
and the ODU (this command cuts off output power),
-- at the output of the main ODU } and the extension ODU if the RF loopback option has been
selected (the RF loop cuts transmission).
CAUTION:
! S A local loop disconnects the link and isolates it from the network.
S The RF loopback configuration requires the remote transmitter to be cut off.

2 3 To antenna
Aggregate
ODU
IDU PRINCIPAL
Tributaries MUX 1
1+0 CONFIGURATION (classic IDU, Light IDU)
2 3 To antenna
Aggregate
ODU 1
IDU PRINCIPAL
Tributaries MUX 1
4 5 To antenna
Aggregate
ODU X
EXTENSION IDU 1+1 HSB CONFIGURATION (classic IDU)

2 3 To antenna
Aggregate
ODU 1
MAIN IDU
MUX 1
Active MUX 4 5 To antenna
Tributaries Aggregate
ODU X
EXTENSION IDU
MUX 6
Inactive MUX
BASIC HSB 1+1 CONFIGURATION WITH MULTIPLEXER PROTECTION (classic IDU) without access unit
2 3 To antenna
Aggregate
ODU 1
MAIN IDU
MUX 1
ACCESS IDU Active MUX 4 5 To antenna
Tributaries Aggregate
ODU X
EXTENSION IDU
MUX 6
Inactive MUX
BASIC 1+1 HSB CONFIGURATION WITH MULTIPLEXER PROTECTION (classic IDU)
Figure 16 - Locations of local loops

ODU ODU
MAIN IDU MAIN IDU
BER analyzer Remote

loopback
Local station Remote station
Figure 17 - Checking a hop using the remote loop option
! The remote loop remote control function must be executed on the remote station.
Remote loopback can be used in a stations IDU to loop the receive output of a tributary to its transmit input.
This way, you can use a BER analyzer connected to the local station to check out a hop (Figure 17).
S Before setting up a loop, you must assign identical link identity codes for both
! transmit and receive directions to avoid generating an alarm condition.
2.6 -- Equipment management

After installing and commissioning the equipment, the configuration parameters (bit rate, frequency, power, etc.)
are saved in the equipment.
The configuration is saved in two memories, one located in the IDU, the other in the ODU.
On power up, the microprocessor responsible for administering the equipment compares the content of the two
memories:
-- if the contents are identical, it loads their content into the various modules of the IDU and the ODU, and
switches the equipment to operational mode,
-- if the contents are different:
On the IDU, the three URG, NURG and ATT LEDs (see 2.7) on the front panel of the main
IDU flash simultaneously. The equipment waits for the IDU-ACO ODU button on the main IDU to
be pressed to select a configuration to download.
Note : A configuration is valid if one of the two IDU or ODU leds is lighted.
The default configuration is obtained by attempting to load the configuration of equipment that is not included
(for example, disconnect the ODU, power up the IDU and choose to download the ODU configuration when the
LEDs are flashing at the same time). You must then reload the entire equipment configuration from the CT.
Note : When the IDU and ODU leds are off, then the equipment starts automatically in default
configuration.

2.7 -- IDU controls, indications and connectors
The indoor units have a Connector panel and an Operation panel (Figure 18). The operation panel carries
controls and indicators which duplicate those on the Connector side. The tables in the sections that follow
describe these components.
In some configurations, some of the items described below may be omitted.
2.7.1 -- Classic main IDU
Ground terminal
Connector panel of the main IDU
Front panel of the main IDU
Figure 18 - Controls, indicators and connectors on the main IDU
The connector panel of the main IDU is fitted with:

-- indicators showing the operational status of the equipment at a glance,
-- connectors.
The components are listed in the table below.
ITEM TYPE FUNCTION

Items shown on a shaded background appear on both panels.
Red LED URG: Service Affecting alarm present.
Red LED NURG: Non- service affecting alarm present.
Yellow LED ATT: Alarm attended, not used with LUX50.
Yellow LED BZ: Busy (telephone ESC busy).
Green LED IDU: No IDU alarm or IDU configuration is valid.
Green LED ODU: No ODU alarm or ODU configuration is valid.
For powering the unit up/down.
Two-position
ON/OFF The green LED beneath this switch indicates when the unit is pow-
switch
ered up.
RST Pushbutton Resets the units software.
S On startup: selects the IDU or ODU configuration if the
Momentary ac- configuration data is lost
IDU-ACO/ODU tion two-position
switch S In operation: ACknOwledge (acknowledgement of an urgent
alarm)/test the LEDs.

ITEM TYPE FUNCTION
Female 2 Mbit/s port version:
37-pin sub-D Tributaries 1 to 16.
I/O (1/8)*
connectors 34 Mbit/s port version:
I/O (9-16)*
34 Mbit/s ports on 1.6/5.6 coaxial sockets mounted on a plate
installed in place of the top I/O (9/16) connector.
Male
DC 24V-48V * 3-pin sub-D Primary power supply input (24 V or 48 V DC).
connector
RJ11 ESC telephone handset port.
connector
AUDIO 1 * Female Interface for ESC N2 (4-wire telephone channel + E/M signalling).
9-pin sub-D A buzzer alerts the operator if a call is received over the telephone
AUDIO 2 * connector channel.
Female S Link with ESC MAIN connector on the extension IDU for
ESC. EXT. * 37-pin sub-D customizing ESCs 3, 4 and 5.
connector S Interface for ESCs 3, 4 and 5 if there is no extension unit.
Female Remote controls and telesignalling (TS/TC).
ALARM. I/O * 25-pin sub-D
connector
NMS 1 * Female Local supervision network interfaces.

9-pin sub-D
NMS 2 * connector
Female Supervisory PC interface for use with F interface adapter cable.
F* 9-pin sub-D
connector
Female S Connector for the software feature key according to the configura-
SKU/MTN tion, enabling the equipment to operate (must be fitted).
9-pin sub-D
connector S Also used for maintenance (factory tests).
Female Link with the extension units MAIN connector.
EXT 68-pin mini-D
connector
Female Link with the corresponding connector on the other directions main
BACK TO BACK 50-pin mini-D IDU.
connector
Female N
ODU Link with the ODU. This connector includes a protective spark gap.
connector
* Connectors with pin--out details in section 3 and in Appendix 6.

2.7.2 - Light IDU
The Light IDU version has only a Connector panel (Figure 19) with:
-- switches and a software reset button,
-- display components for ascertaining the operational state of the equipment at a glance,
-- connector ports.
It is equipped with the items listed in the table below.
Figure 19 - Controls, indicators and connectors on the Light IDU
ITEM TYPE FUNCTION

Female N
ODU Link with the ODU. This connector includes a protective surge arrestor.
connector
Red LED URG: Service Affecting alarm present
Red LED NURG: Non--Service Affecting alarm present
Yellow LED ATT: Alarm attended, not used with LUX50.
Yellow LED MAN: Remote control indicator
Green LED IDU: No IDU alarm or IDU configuration is valid
Green LED ODU: No ODU alarm or ODU configuration is valid
Female 9--pin
F* Interface with supervisory PC for use with F interface adapter cable
Sub--D connector
NMS 1 * Female 9--pin
Supervision network bus interfaces.
NMS 2 * Sub--D connectors
Female 37--pin
I/O 1-4 * Tributaries 1 to 4
Sub--D connector
ESC 3 / Female 37--pin S ESC N 3 interface

ALARM I/O * Sub--D connector S Remote controls and telesignalling (TS/TC)
S On startup: select the IDU or ODU configuration if the configuration is
Momentary action lost
IDU-ACO/ODU
two--position switch S In operation: ACknOwledge (Acknowledgement of urgent alarms/LED
test).
RST Pushbutton Software reset.
Male 3--pin Sub--D
DC 48V or 24V * Primary power supply input (24 V or 48 V DC).
connector
Stable two--position For powering the unit up/down
ON/OFF
switch The green LED to the left of this switch indicates that the unit is powered up.
* Connectors with pin--out details in section 3 and in Appendix 6.

2.7.3 -- Extension IDU
Extension IDU connector panel
Extension IDU operation panel
Figure 20 - Extension IDU controls, indicators and connectors
The connector panel of the extension IDU is fitted with:

-- indicators showing the operational status of the equipment at a glance,
-- connectors.
In the first three columns of the table below, a cross indicates the presence of the components according to the
type of extension unit:
-- Type A : ESC extension unit.
-- Type B : 1+1 extension unit with no multiplexer protection.
-- Type C : 1+1 extension unit with multiplexer protection.
A B C ITEM TYPE FUNCTION
Items shown on a shaded background appear on both panels.

MAN: Indicates that a remote control has been sent to the
Yellow LED equipment from a supervisory PC. The LED remains on
until the remote control disappears.
Green LED TX-ODU: transmission traffic on standby ODU.
X X Green LED IDU: No alarms on extension IDU.
Green LED T-IDU: Traffic on extension multiplexer/demultiplexer.
Green LED RX-ODU: reception traffic on standby ODU.
Green LED ODU: No alarms on standby ODU.
For powering the unit up/down.
Two-position
X X X ON/OFF The green LED beneath this switch indicates when the
switch
unit is powered up.
X X RST Pushbutton Resets the units software.
ACCESS (1-8) Female

Link with access units EXT. (1/8) and EXT. (9/16) con-
X 37-pin sub-D
ACCESS (9-16) nectors.
connector
Male
X X X DC 24V-48V * 3-pin sub-D Primary power supply input (24 V or 48 V).
connector
Female
Link with the main IDUs ESC EXT connector for ESC
X X X ESC. MAIN 37-pin sub-D
extension.
connector

A B C ITEM TYPE FUNCTION
Female
X X X MAIN 68-pin mini-D Link with the main IDUs EXT connector.
connector
Female
X X X ESC. 5 25-pin sub-D Port for ESC N5.
connector
Female
X X X BACK TO BACK 50-pin mini-D Not used.
connector
ESC. 4-1 * Female

X X X 9-pin sub-D Ports 1 and 2, ESC N4.
ESC. 4-2 * connectors
ESC. 3-1 * Female

X X X 9-pin sub-D Ports 1 and 2, ESC N3.
ESC. 3-2 * connector
Female Link with the ODU.
X X ODU
N connector This connector includes a protective spark-gap.
Female
C-NMS1 9-pin and 15-pin
Options Not used.
C-NMS2 sub-D connec-
tors
* Connectors with pin--out details in Appendix 6.
2.7.4 -- Access IDU
Access IDU connector panel
Access IDU front panel
Figure 21 - Access IDU connectors

The connector panel of the access indoor unit is fitted with the components described in the table below:
ITEM TYPE FUNCTION
I/O (1/8)* Female 2 Mbit/s access version (use of IDU type 1, see 7.2.2.2):
I/O (9/16)* 37-pin sub-D Tributaries 1 to 16.
connector 34 Mbit/s access version:
2 Mbit/s auxiliary bit stream port.
34 Mbit/s ports on 1.6/5.6 coaxial sockets on a panel mounted in
place of the top I/O (9/16) connector.
2 Mbit/s access version (use of IDU type 1, see 7.2.2.2):
Tributary links 1 to 16 to I/O (1/8) and I/O (9/16) connectors on
MAIN (1/8) Female
the main IDU.
37-pin sub-D
MAIN (9/16) connectors 34 Mbit/s access version:
Tributary 34 Mbit/s and 2 Mbit/s to I/O (1/8) connector on the
main IDU.
2 Mbit/s access version (use of IDU type 1, see 7.2.2.2):
Female Tributary links 1 to 16 to I/O (1/8) and I/O (9/16) connectors on
EXT. (1/8)
37-pin sub-D the main IDU.
EXT. (9/16) connectors 34 Mbit/s access version:
Tributary link 34 Mbit/s and 2 Mbit/s to ACCESS (1/8) connector.
* Customer connectors, with pinout detailed in section 3.

2.8 -- Technical characteristics
The values indicated hereafter are typical values.
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND FREQUENCY PLANS

Standard *
Reference Band Frequency
Equipment Channeling Tx/Rx
Standard (GHz) (GHz)
separation (MHz)
9413 UX EN 301 128 13 GHz 12.75--13.25 ERC 12--02 266
9413 UX EN 301 128 13 GHz 12.75--13.25 ERC 12--02 266

9415 UX EN 301 128 15 GHz 14.4--15.35 ERC 12--07 728,
4QAM/16QAM ITU--R Rec F636--3 315, 420, 490
9418 UX EN 301 128 18 GHz 17.7--19.7 ERC 12--03 1008, 1010,

4QAM/16QAM ITU--R Rec F595--3 340, 1560, 1092.5
9423 UX EN 300 198 23 GHz 21.2--23.6 ERC 13--02 annex A 1008, 1197,
4QAM ITU--R Rec F637--3 1200, 1232
9423 UX EN 300 198 23 GHz 21.2--23.6 ERC 13--02 annex A 1008, 1197,
16QAM ITU--R Rec F637--3 1200, 1232
9425 UX EN 300 431 25 GHz 24.5--26.5 ERC 13--02 annex B 1008

ITU--R Rec F748--3
4QAM
9425 UX EN 300 431 25 GHz 24.5--26.5 ERC 13--02 annex B 1008
9438 UX EN 300 197 38 GHz 37--39.5 ERC 12--01 1260

9438 UX EN 300 197 38 GHz 37--39.5 ERC 12--01 1260
(*) Consult Alcatel if non--standard Tx/Rx separations are requested.
(*) Consult Alcatel for availability of these options.
RF CHANNELING
Capacity (Mbit/s) 2x2 4x2 8x2 16x2 / 34 + 2

RF Channeling (MHz) 3.5 7 14 28
(4QAM modulation)
RF Channeling (MHz) -- -- 7 14
(16QAM modulation)

IN--FIELD TUNABILITY RANGE FOR 94XXUXR201, 94XXUXR202 OR 94XXUXR203
Max frequency
agility band
depending on Output Power Output Power Setting
Equipment duplex (dBm) option (dB)
difference
(MHz)
9413 UX 116 25 Fixed attenuator: 3, 6, or

4QAM 10 dB for 3CC08879AAxx
9413 UX 116 25 +25 dBm to 5 dBm with 1 dB
step for 3CC12690AAxx
4QAM RTPC
9413 UX 116 21 +21 dBm to 1 dBm with1 dB
16QAM
4QAM 10 dB for 3CC08880AAxx
9415 UX 220 24 +24 dBm to --6 dBm with 1 dB

4QAM RTPC

4QAM 24* 10 dB
9423 UX 500 19 +19 to 11 dBm with 1 dB

step
4QAM RTPC
9423 UX 500 17 +17 to 3 dBm with 1 dB step
16QAM
9425 UX 450 18 +18 to 12 dBm with 1 dB
step
4QAM RTPC
9425 UX 450 16 +16 to 14 dBm with 1 dB
16QAM step
9438 UX 560 16 +16 to 14 dBm with 1 dB
step
4QAM RTPC
9438 UX 560 14 +14 to 6 dBm with 1 dB step

16QAM
(*) Consult Alcatel for availability of this option.

TUNABILITY RANGE FOR NEW GENERATION A9400UX flat ODU
Duplex Frequency Output power

Equipment spacing agility band setting (dB) ATPC range
(MHZ) (MHz) (RTPC)
4 QAM +24 to 6 dBm with 24 to 4 dBm

1 dB step
9413 UX 266 116
16 QAM +20 to 10 dBm 20 to 0 dBm
with 1 dB step
315, 420, 490, 1 dB step
9415 UX 220
16 QAM 728 +20 to 10 dBm 20 to 0 dBm
with 1 dB step
340, 1 dB step
9418 UX 1008 1010
1008,1010, 480
16 QAM 1560, 1092.5 +19 to 11 dBm with 19 to --1 dBm
1 dB step
4 QAM +19 to 11 dBm with 19 to --1 dBm
1008, 1200, 1 dB step
9423 UX 500
16 QAM 1232 +16 to 14 dBm 16 to --4 dBm
with 1 dB step
4 QAM +17 to 13 dBm 17 to --3 dBm
with 1 dB step
9425 UX 1008 450
16 QAM +14 to 16 dBm 14 to --6 dBm
with 1 dB step
4 QAM +16 to 14 dBm 16 to --4 dBm
with 1 dB step
9438 UX 1260 560
16 QAM +13 to 17 dBm 13 to --7 dBm
with 1 dB step
TYPICAL BER THRESHOLDS AT ANTENNA PORT FOR 94xxUXR201, 94xxUXR202 OR

94xxUXR203 in dBm
Equipment 2x2 4x2 8x2 16x2 / 34 + 2
10 - 3 10 - 6 10 - 3 10 - 6 10 - 3 10 - 6 10 - 3 10 - 6
9413 UX 4QAM --95 --92 --92 --89 --89 --86 --86 --83
9413 UX 16QAM -- -- -- -- --83 --80 --80 --77
9415 UX 4QAM --94 --91 --91 --88 --88 --85 --85 --82
9418 UX 4QAM --94 --91 --91 --88 --88 --85 --85 --82
9423 UX 4QAM --92 --89 --89 --86 --86 --83 --83 --80
9423 UX 16QAM -- -- -- -- --82 --79 --79 --76
9425 UX 4QAM --91 --88 --88 --85 --85 --82 --82 --79
9425 UX 16QAM -- -- -- -- --81 --78 --78 --75

Equipment 2x2 4x2 8x2 16x2 / 34 + 2
9438 UX 4QAM --87 --84 --84 --81 --81 --78 --78 --75
9438 UX 16QAM -- -- -- -- --77 --74 --74 --71
BER THRESHOLDS AT ANTENNA PORT FOR NEW GENERATION A9400UX flat ODU
Equipment 2x2 4x2 8x2 16x2 / 34 + 2

10 - 3 10 - 6 10 - 3 10 - 6 10 - 3 10 - 6 10 - 3 10 - 6
4 QAM --95 --92 --92 --89 --89 --86 --86 --83
9413 UX
16 QAM -- -- -- -- --84 --81 --81 --78
4 QAM --95 --92 --92 --89 --89 --86 --86 --83
9415 UX
16 QAM -- -- -- -- --84 --81 --81 --78
4 QAM --93 --90 --90 --87 --87 --84 --84 --81
9418 UX
16 QAM -- -- -- -- --82 --79 --79 --76
4 QAM --93 --90 --90 --87 --87 --84 --84 --81
9423 UX
16 QAM -- -- -- -- --82 --79 --79 --76
4 QAM --92 --89 --89 --86 --86 --83 --83 --80
9425 UX
16 QAM -- -- -- -- --81 --78 --78 --75
4 QAM --91 --88 --88 --85 --85 --82 --82 --79
9438 UX
16 QAM -- -- -- -- --79 --76 --77 --74
CONFIGURATION
Additional branching losses per terminal * Tx Rx

1+0 or1+1 FD 0 0
(Main & Stand--By channels)
1+1 HSB 1 antenna
S Main Channel 1 1
S Stand--By channel 11 11
* Typical values ODU unit inputs, antenna access
1+0/1+1 FD SYSTEM GAIN AT ANTENNA PORT (INCLUDING DUPLEXER LOSS) FOR ODU
94XXUXR201, 94XXUXR202 OR 94XXUXR203
Equipment 2x2 4x2 8x2 16x2 / 34 + 2

10 - 3 10 - 6 10 - 3 10 - 6 10 - 3 10 - 6 10 - 3 10 - 6
9413 UX 4QAM 120 117 117 114 114 111 111 108
9413 UX 16QAM -- -- -- -- 104 101 101 98
9415 UX 4QAM 115 112 112 109 109 106 106 103

Equipment 2x2 4x2 8x2 16x2 / 34 + 2
9415 UX 4 QAM 118 115 115 112 112 109 109 106
RTPC
9418 UX 4QAM 111 108 108 105 105 102 102 99
9423 UX 4QAM 111 108 108 105 105 102 102 99
1+0/1+1 FD SYSTEM GAIN AT ANTENNA PORT (INCLUDING DUPLEXER LOSS) FOR ODU
94XXUXR201, 94XXUXR202 OR 94XXUXR203
Equipment 2x2 4x2 8x2 16x2 / 34 + 2

9423 UX 16QAM -- -- -- -- 99 96 96 93
9425 UX 4QAM 109 106 106 103 103 100 100 97
9425 UX 16QAM -- -- -- -- 97 94 94 91
9438 UX 4QAM 103 100 100 97 97 94 94 91
9438 UX 16QAM -- -- -- -- 91 88 88 85
1+0/1+1 System gain At antenna port (including duplexer loss) for A9400UX flat ODU
Equipment 2x2 4x2 8x2 16x2 / 34 +2

10 - 3 10 - 6 10 - 3 10 - 6 10 - 3 10 - 6 10 - 3 10 - 6
4 QAM 119 116 116 113 113 110 110 107
9413 UX
16 QAM 104 101 101 98
4 QAM 119 116 116 113 113 110 110 107
9415 UX
16 QAM 104 101 101 98
4 QAM 115 112 112 109 109 106 106 103
9418 UX
16 QAM 101 98 98 95
4 QAM 112 109 109 106 106 103 103 100
9423 UX
16 QAM 98 95 95 92
4 QAM 109 106 106 103 103 100 100 97
9425 UX
16 QAM 95 92 92 89
4 QAM 107 104 104 101 101 98 98 95
9438 UX
16 QAM 92 89 90 87
ANTENNA GAIN ( IN dB , typ GAIN )
Integrated Non--integrated
30 cm 60 cm Flextwist loss 60 cm 90 cm 120 cm 180 cm
*
13 GHz >35 0.35 >38.3 >41 >44.6

15 GHz >30.5 >36 0.5 >39.5 >42 >45.5
18 GHz >32.7 >38 0.7 >41.6 >44 >47.3

Integrated Non--integrated
23 GHz >34.4 >39.6 0.7 >43.1 >45.6 >48.9
25 GHz >35.6 >40.7 0.7 >44.2 >46.8
38 GHz >39.3 >44.2
* For those referenced in Appendix 9 Commercial items
ALCATEL 9400 UX ALL FREQUENCY BANDS

Synthesizer step 250 kHz
RF stability +/-- 10 ppm
Spectrum masks Compliant with the relevant ETSI standard
Spurious Compliant with the ETSI standard
emissions Compliant with ERC Rec 74--01
Equalizer Type 7 coefficients (and 19 coefficients for ODU flat)
Link Identity 32 codes
Code
TRIBUTARY INTERFACES*
Type 2 Mbit/s ITU--T G.703 120 ohms or 75 Ohms
34 Mbit/s ITU--T G.703 75 Ohms
Jitter ITU--T G. 823/ G. 921
Man--Machine Interface
Visual 7 LEDs
other F interface and adapter cable for Personal Computer (WindowsTM)
Interface for Telephone Service Channel (ESC n2 on classic IDU only)
Alarms
Equipment alarms 2 outputs
Environmental 8 inputs / 1output
events
* In the case of a 75 Ohms connection, the respect of the G703 norms and EMC norms is only guaranteed by
ALCATEL if spider adapters made for this purpose are used (3CC07885Axxx or 3CC07759Axxx) with the IDU
configuration.
POWER SUPPLY
DC 24 VDC +/-- 20 to +/-- 40 VDC
nominal
(primary) 48 VDC +/-- 39 to +/-- 60 VDC
Polarity + or or floating (isolated ground)

POWER SUPPLY
Max Power 1+0 : 63W with classic IDU
consumption for 1+0 : 50 W with Light IDU
ODU 94XXUXR201, 1+1 : 120W
94XXUXR202 OR
94XXUXR203
Max Power 1 + 0 : 60 W
consumption for 1 + 1 : 112 W
A9400UX flat ODU
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY / SAFETY
EMC EN 301 489 1 & 4 (version 1.2.1)

Safety EN 60 950
Power supply EN 300 132
Lightning protection Symmetric protection implemented in ODU & IDU
+/-- 1kV on cable ground according to IEC 61000--4--5 with 2 wave types: 1.2/50
s and 10/700 s
IDU--ODU CABLE
Type 1AC001100022
Fire resistance IEC 332--1
Max length 300 m
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
Storage EN 300 019 class 1.3
Transport EN 300 019 class 2.3
IDU EN 300 019 class 3.2
Temperature range : --10 to +55C
Operation ODU EN 300 019 class 4.1,
Protection factor IP 55 (IEC529 standard)
Temperature range : --33 to +55C

MECHANICAL
Classic Main IDU, 44x450x235 mm / 3 kg (19 / 1U)
Extension IDU, Access IDU
Light IDU 44x450x235 mm / 3 kg (19 / 1U)
ODU 13 to 18 250x250x250 mm / 10kg
94XXUXR201 GHz
94XXUXR202 23 to 38 220x220x250 mm / 8 kg
94XXUXR203 GHz
ODU 13 to 38 235x235x72 mm / 4 kg
A9400UX flat GHz
For the typical installation dimensions, see Chapter 3

2.9 -- Frequency agility bands
Equipment Duplex spacing Tx Band (MHz)

(MHz) F min F max
9413 UX 266 1 12751.75 12864.25
2 12861.75 12978.25
1P 13017.75 13130.25
2P 13127.75 13244.25
9415 UX 315 1 14635.75 14765.25
2 14761.75 14898.25
1P 14950.75 15080.25
2P 15076.75 15213.25
420 1 14502.75 14723.50
2 14719.75 14940.25
1P 14922.75 15143.25
2P 15139.75 15360.25
490 1 14404.75 14632.25
2 14628.75 14856.25
1P 14894.75 15122.25
2P 15118.75 15346.25
644 1 14500 14700
1P 15144 15344
728 1 14502.75 14618.25
1P 15230.75 15346.25

(MHz) F min F max
9418 UX 340 1 18581.75 18698.25
2 18701.75 18818.25
1P 18921.75 19038.25
2P 19041.75 19158.25
1560 1 17701.75 18138.25
1P 19261.75 19698.25
1010 1 17701.75 18199.25
2 18180.75 18688.25
1P 18711.75 19210.25
2P 19190.75 19698.25
1008 1 17703.75 18199.25
2 18182.75 18678.25
1P 18711.75 19207.25
2P 19190.75 19686.25
1092.5 1 17702 18090
2 18205 18597.5
1P 18794.5 19182.5
2P 19297.5 19690

(MHz) F min F max
9423 UX 1008 1 22001.75 22490.25
(9423UX R201,
R201
9423UX R202) 2 22101.75 22590.25
1P 23009.75 23498.25
2P 23109.75 23598.25
1008 1 22001.75 22302,00
(9400UX flat
ODU) 2 22300.00 22600.00
1P 23008.00 23310,00
2P 23308.00 23598.25
1232 1 21201.75 21786.25
2 21781.75 22366.25
1P 22433.75 23018.25
2P 23013.75 23598.25
1200 1 21201.75 21818.25
2 21781.75 22398.25
1P 22401.75 23018.25
2P 22981.75 23598.25
9425 UX 1008 1 24549.75 24996.25
2 24997.75 25444.25
1P 25557.75 26004.25
2P 26005.75 26452.25
9438 UX 1260 1 37059.75 37616.25
2 37619.75 38176.25
1P 38319.75 38876.25
2P 38879.75 39436.25


3 -- Installation
3.1 -- Delivery
When you receive the equipment in its packaging:
-- Check the condition of the packaging.
-- If damaged, make your reservations known to the carrier as quickly as possible.
3.1.1 - Checking the configuration

The configuration is normally supplied in:
-- Two packages containing the IDUs and ODUs according to the configuration, with connector manual
and test results book,
-- one or more packages containing the antennas, HSB coupler and installation accessories, service
telephone, cables, etc.
3.1.1.1 -- Content of the ODU/IDU boxes
Light IDU Nr. of

CONTENT
CONFIG. boxes
1+0 1 or 2 1 Light IDU (19 ) + 1 ODU + 1 connector kit + documentation
Classic IDU Nr. of

CONTENT
CONFIG. boxes
1 main IDU + 1 ODU + 1 software feature key + 1 connector kit + documentation
1+0 1 or 2
+ eventually 1 extension IDU.
1 main IDU + 1 ODU + 1 software feature key + 1 connector kit + documentation.
1+1 1 or 2
1 extension IDU + 1 ODU + 1 connector kit.
1+1 with 1 main IDU and if necessary 1 access IDU + 1 ODU + 1 software feature key + 1
MUX 1 or 2 connector kit + documentation.
protection 1 extension IDU + 1 ODU + 1 connector kit.
3.1.1.2 -- Unpacking
-- Unpack the equipment according to the instructions on the packaging.
-- Take an inventory and identity any missing items. If the delivery does not match the delivery advice
note, notify ALCATEL within 48 hours of receipt of the equipment.
-- Leave the equipment readily accessible during the work.
IMPORTANT NOTE: NEVER REMOVE THE ROUND YELLOW PADS USED TO SEAL
THE OUTDOOR SYSTEM.
3.1.1.3 -- Storage
If installation is to be deferred, the type of packaging will define the equipment storage conditions:
-- cardboard boxes should be warehoused indoors, in a dry, well aired room.
-- wooden or plywood boxes may be stored outdoors, provided that they are protected from rain and the
suns rays.

3.2 -- Labels on the equipment
The labels below are also affixed to the boxes to indicate their contents.
TYPICAL LABEL ON THE LIGHT IDU
Power supply voltage 20 to 40 V=

value 39 to 60 V =
Maximum IDU capacity 4x2 Mbit/s
Floating power supply YES
2 Mbit/s tributary port
75 ohms or 120 ohms
impedance
Integrated mediation function Slave
Cable interface type DIG: Digital version
Transmitted power control YES
Remote craft terminal YES
Address of unit for Not completed in the factory.
supervision bus
Management interface type V.11 or V.28
Service channel 3 interface
V.11 or V.28
* IDU model/revision index of equipment type
see list in Appendix 9 Edition date DD / MM / YYYY
* Serial number Memory extension YES (required for LUX50)
Commercial code: see list in or NO
Appendix 9 UX basic software 9400UXN001
* bar coded and in plain language Light UX software 9400UXN002
The configuration depends on the factory delivery.
TYPICAL LABEL ON THE CLASSIC MAIN IDU
Power supply 20 to 40 V =
voltage value 39 to 60 V =
Maximum IDU capacity 4x2 Mbit/s ; 8x2 Mbit/s
(according to equipment ) 16x2 Mbit/s ; 34+2 Mbit/s
2 Mbit/s tributary port 75, 120 ohms, high impedance
impedance (mux protection) or automatic
2 Mbit/s aux bitstream if any, 75 ohms or 120 ohms
port impedance or high impedance
1 or 2
Memory extension (2 required for LUX50)
Cable interface ANA : Analog version
type DIG : Digital version
Service channel 3 V.11 (Meaningless if an extension
port type or IDU for dedicated SCs is
V.28 used)
IDU address for not entered in the factory
* bar coded or in plain language supervision bus
Audio service channel not entered in the factory.
* IDU model/revision index of equipment phone number
: see list in Appendix 9
* Serial number
Commercial code
: see list in Appendix 9

TYPICAL LABEL ON THE EXTENSION IDU
* Reserved for Alcatel
Power supply 20 to 40 V =
voltage value 39 to 60 V =
Maximum IDU 4x2 Mbit/s ; 8x2 Mbit/s
capacity (according to 16x2 Mbit/s ; 34+2 Mbit/s
equipment)
2 Mbit/s tributary port 75, 120 ohms, high impedance
impedance (mux protection) or automatic
Cable interface ANA : Analog version

type DIG : Digital version
Service channel 3 port 64 kbit/s G.703 codirectional

type + corresponding 64 kbit/s V.11 or V.28
commercial code 300-3400 Hz 4 wire
9600 / 2 X 4800 bauds, V.11
9600 / 2 X 4800 bauds, V.28
SC4 port type + Options as for SC3

corresponding
* IDU model/revision index of equipment commercial code
* Serial number
V.11
SC5 board type
Commercial code V.28
* bar coded or in plain language
TYPICAL LABEL ON THE ACCESS IDU
* Reserved for Alcatel
Tributary type 4x2 Mbit/s ; 8x2 Mbit/s

16x2 Mbit/s ; 34+2 Mbit/s
Tributary port impedance 75 ohms

120 ohms
2 Mbit/s auxiliary stream 75 ohms or 120 ohms
port impedance or not applicable (if not
provided )
* IDU model
* Serial number
Commercial code

TYPICAL LABEL ON THE ODU 94XXUXR201 94XXUXR202 94XXUXR203
Power supply voltage value
Edition date
Std = Standard
Transmit power for 15 and 18 GHz
High= High power
RF local loopback YES + commerc. code; NO
Duplex difference
Min and maxi operating frequencies for transmission
Canal
Commercial code
} *Industrial code / revision index
} * ODU model/revision index
} * Serial number
TYPICAL LABEL ON THE ODU A9400UX FLAT ODU
Power supply voltage value
Initial software SW/ICS ODU Software (when learning factory)

Commercial code
Min and max operation frequencies for transmission
Duplex difference
Edition date
P/N
} *Industrial code / revision index
} * Serial number
TYPICAL LABEL ON THE HSB (HOT STANDBY) COUPLER
Coupling value 10 dB
Operating frequency 13; 15; 18; 23; 25;

10dB
band 38 GHz
* Unit mode
* Serial number
Commercial code

TYPICAL SOFTWARE LABEL KEY ON THE BOX
Integrated mediation function:
Master or Slave
+ commercial code
ALCATEL 9400 UX RCT (remote craft terminal) Y (yes) + commercial

code or N (no)
U Max. configuration 1+0 max. or
1+1 max
U
Max bit rate + commercial
2 x2 ; 4 x2 ; 8 x2 ;
code of each software
16 x 2 ; 34 Mbit/s
module
TPC: only for 13, 23 to Y (yes) + commercial
7 40 GHz 38 GHz bands code or N (no)
Transmit frequency
range
* Model of key /
Revision index
* Serial number of key
Commercial code
TYPICAL SOFTWARE KEY LABELS
Configuration :
Not meaningful 1 + 0 MAX Not meaningful
or 1 + 1 MAX
N
Maximum bit rate (Mbit/s) : N Option not available
2x2
4x2 7125.00 -- 8500.00
8x2
16 x 2 *
TX : Transmit frequency range enabled
(*) also for 34 + 2 Mbit/s
Typical label affixed to the software key

Item label
(on other side)
3CC07619AAAA 01
C98085113 (05)

3.2.1 -- Typical installation dimensions (1+0 configuration with integrated 1 ft)
3.2.1.1 -- ODU 94xxUXR201 A 94xxUXR203
Pole mounting 1+1
13 38
38
38
Pole mounting 1+0
365 244
545 469

3.2.1.2 -- ODU A9400 UX flat ODU
Pole mounting 1+1
556
522
174
160
625
Pole mounting 1+0

244
318
389
365
545

3.3 -- Installing the equipment
It is assumed that the installer has already installed the other peripheral equipment (cable trays, multiplexes,
etc).
3.3.1 - Information required for installation

Appendix 2 contains a sheet for you to complete to collate all the general information needed for the installation
procedure.
3.3.2 -- Precautions concerning electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) and safety

1) Installation is designed to meet all new requirements concerning electromagnetic compatibility and safety.
2) The EMC performance of the equipment depends largely on installation practices (cable installation, earthing
connections, etc) which should be based on best trade practices.
3.3.3 -- Tools required

The list of the tools required to install the microwave links of the 9400 UX family is given below (applies to all
frequency bands).
Tool Usage examples

2.5 mm Allen key (for M3 screw) x For adjusting the polarization of the antenna and the HSB coupler
3 mm Allen key (for M4 screw) x For adjusting the polarization of the antenna and the HSB coupler
5 mm Allen key (for M6 screw) x For mounting the antenna, the hot standby coupler
6 mm Allen key (for M8 screw) x For pointing the antenna
8 mm Allen key (for M10 screw) x For adjusting the polarization of the HSB coupler
Pipe wrench and 13 mm flat For mounting the pole mounting for a separate antenna
wrench
16/17 mm box wrench and flat x For fixing the pole mounting and fine tuning the antenna and vari-
wrench ous fastenings
16/17 mm torque wrench For fixing the pole mounting and various fastening with the correct
torque
5 mm flat wrench For dismantling/reassembling the cover on classic main, extension
and access IDUs
8 mm flat torque wrench, Radiall, For fitting integrated attenuators in the ODU
code: R282320
20 mm flat torque wrench x For fitting the N coaxial plugs
3.5 x 100 mm screwdriver x Indoor installations: connectors, software key, handles, or for
(for slotted head screws) changing the polarization of the antenna and for non integrated
assembly
10 x 100 mm screwdriver For mounting the pole mounting in the case of a separate
(for slotted head screws) antenna.
Manually or with a screwdriver For mounting the solar shield of ODU A9400 flat ODU
(for slotted head screws)
The above tools marked with an x are included in a station toolkit, ref: 9400UXT103.
Depending on installation, additional equipment may be useful:
-- Mars Actel OSA3 Compax insertion and extraction tool, for wiring compax terminal blocks (mars actel
IDC) COMPAX; and Sub-D plug crimping tool, ref: 608868-1 (AMP).
Of course, normal installers tools are essential: drill, drill bits, soldering iron, cable tie pliers, terminal pliers, etc.

A set of consumables, ref: 9400UXT002 for one link is available as an option.
For commissioning, an optional service kit (commercial code 9400UXT102) can be used: this can be used to
measure the AGC voltage (relative to the received field) using a DC voltmeter, and includes a
headset/microphone assembly for connecting to the telephone service channel*.
* It is also possible to order just the service kit cable, under reference 9400UXT112.
A compass and a pair of binoculars (not supplied) are useful for roughly pointing the antenna.
3.3.4 -- Torques for the screws and connectors
The table below shows the maximum tightening torques requested.
Screw caliber Maximum tightening torques

Ncm
Screw M3 61
Screw M4 150
Screw M6 490
Screw M8 1190
Screw M10 2380
Connector N (nut fastened onto the cable) 200
3.4 -- Installing 19 IDUs

IDUs can be installed:
-- front connector (Light IDU has only one connector panel),
-- with the operation panel to the front.
They can be installed:

-- on a desktop or on a wall mounting,
-- in a laborack or 9U subrack.
Main IDU
Access IDU
Caution: when several Extension IDU

IDUs are used, they must
be stacked in the order
shown opposite
Main IDU
Extension IDU
Before installation, check the labels for IDU configuration information (bit rates and port impedances), type of
remote indication loops, EOW configuration.
CAUTION: do not place anything on the indoor units

3.4.1 - Installation on feet or on a wall mounting
For desktop installation, fit each unit with its four feet (kit ref: 9400UXI303), the feet clip onto the bottom of
the unit.
To install units on a wall mounting, use kit ref.: 9400UXI301 which can support a maximum of three units.
For this wall mounting, the feet of the units must not be fitted. Kit 9400UXI301 includes: two brackets, four fixings
for the brackets (M6 x 50 socket cap screws, onduflex washers and 4620 expansion bolts), and fixings by the
front handles for three units (washers 19621 and screws EX 10804).
456
kit : 9400UXI301
70
3.4.2 - Laborack or 9U subrack installation
3.4.2.1 -- Installing the 9U unit (Ref. 9400UXI302)
Useful cable
way 27x210
H = 451,15
P = 360
3.4.2.2 -- Alcatel recommendations for IDU installation in 9U rack
The recommendations depend on IDU configurations (1+ 0, 1+1 basic or 1+1 mux protected )
-- 1+1 mux protected configuration : each group of 2 or 3 IDU shall be separated by 1U.
-- 1+0 or 1+1 basic configuration : each IDU shall be separated by 1U.
This configuration supposes that room temperature should not exceed +45C (and that the temperature at the
IDU level never exceeds 55C) .
These recommendations allow good installation conditions (place for cable interconnections) and good
operation conditions (cooling of the IDU).

1U
1+1 Mux protected

9 U rack
1U
1+1 Mux protected
1U
1U
1+0 or 1+1 basic configuration
1U
1U
9 U rack 1+0 or 1+1 basic configuration
1U
1U
Figure 22 - Example of installation in 9U Rack
3.4.2.3 -- Laborack installation

Laborack
dimensions :
.Height = 2050 mm
.Width = 540 mm
.Depth = 600 mm
Ref. : 9400XXI300 Drilling template
UX 1U UNIT 85 370 S As standard, the laborack will be se-

cured to the floor by four M6 socket cap
85
screws supplied with the equipment.
S In the planned position, drill the floor

in accordance with the template:
430
drill holes: 12 mm
depth: 60 mm
S Fit the plugs and position the laborack
S Fix the laborack using the screws

Front
When you have correctly positioned the fixing brackets on the 19 unit, the equipment will be
held by the front panel by four screws fitted into the laboracks cage nuts.

3.4.2.4 -- Alcatel recommendations for IDU installation in rack
The recommendations depend on IDU configurations (1+ 0, 1+1 basic or 1+1 mux protected )
-- 1+1 mux protected configuration : each group of 2 or 3 IDU shall be separated by 1U.
If a group of two IDU is used, aeration can be improved leaving 1U between the two IDU.
-- 1+0 or 1+1 basic configuration : each IDU shall be separated by 1U.
This configuration supposes that room temperature at IDU level should not exceed +55C
Note: Be sure the cable path lets dismantling IDUs in 1+1

3.5 -- Outdoor part installation
3.5.1 - General information
3.5.1.1 -- Pole mounting
The mechanical assembly is supplied complete, mechanically assembled, with screw fastenings kit and ground
terminals included in a plastic bag inside the casting.
The standard mechanical system is mounted on a pipe with a diameter of:
-- 90 to 114 mm for 300 mm diameter antennas,
-- 114 mm for 600 mm diameter integrated antennas.
CAUTION:
If the pipe diameter is smaller than the one mentioned above, the fixing brackets of
the pole mounting must be replaced by the kit 9400UXI103 that improves the wind
resistance of the whole equipment. This kit is especially recommended for the
600 mm antennas on 76 to 90 mm tubes.
There are also supports for fixing the pole to the wall: please consult us.
Various antenna types and sizes can be used, together with radio systems operating at different frequencies
and in a variety of configurations.
CAUTION:
Take care not to damage the O--Ring on the nose of the antenna connection.
If the ODU is not to be mounted immediately after the pole mounting of the antenna,
protect the connection nose (from water, dirt and impact).
For installation with non--integrated antenna, please refer to the antenna manufacturer recommendations.

3.5.1.2 -- ODU
9400 UX Outdoor units are designed for assembly:
-- either with an integrated antenna connected directly to the Outdoor equipment, see 3.5.4.1 and 3.5.5,
-- or with one or more non--integrated antennas, see 3.5.6., mounted with flextwist guides.
221 (257) Service kit cable socket 273 (273)

(9400UXT102) 231 (231)
Pointing antenna
information
NOTE : figures between

221 (257)
brackets represent
the 13, 15 and 18 Ghz
frequency range
189 (189) 42 (42)

Coaxial to IDU Ground socket
47 (47)
Figure 23 - ODU 94XXUXR201 94XXUXR202 94XXUXR203
248,5
235
248
235
115,8
Coaxial to IDU
Ground socket Service kit cable socket
(3DB00511AAAA)
Pointing antenna information
Figure 24 - ODU A9400UX FLAT ODU
CAUTION:
Never remote the round yellow pads that are used to seal the system on the ODU.
Do not stand on the ODUs, as they are not designed to support the weight of a man.

3.5.2 -- Choosing antenna polarization
The antennas are normally supplied with vertical polarization.
TOP TOP
Vertical polarization Horizontal polarization
ANTENNA - NOSE END VIEW

vertical polarization Socket cap screw
Nose
O-ring seal
TOP marker
Socket cap screw
Antenna nose slots

Socket cap screw
Drain orifice
To change the polarization: undo the three socket cap screws and turn the nose through 90 degrees then
tighten the screws again.
CAUTION: The O--ring must be coated with silicone grease before fitting (the grease is
provided with the antenna).
3.5.3 - Installing the configuration with pole mounting 1 + 0 (9400UXI102)

The antenna is screwed on the pole mounting 9400UXI102. The ODU is mounted with quick latches.
Overall antenna steer (with turnbuckles set to the maximum) is:
S Azimuth: 360 degrees for a 300 mm and 600 mm diameter antenna, around the pipe.
The steer obtained by the turnbuckles is:
S Elevation: 25 degrees,
S Azimuth: 10 degrees.
To avoid obstacles (wall too close, etc), you can fix the pole mounting on any side of the pipe. The dimensions
of the outdoor equipment are given in 3.2.1.
NOTE: The pole mounting 9400UXI102 is not designed to be fixed directly to the wall
Procedure :
-- 1) Position the antenna vertically (nose horizontal), with the drain hole in the bottom part and free of
obstacles.

-- 2) Insert the 7 M6 screws 1 with their onduflex springy crinkle washers 2 , tighten and secure the
screws (these screws can be found in a plastic bag located inside the casting.
Top marker
Flat washer Grower washer

Nut
Centering pin
or screw
1 2
M6 x 7 screws and
Ondulex washer x 7
Casting
OR ODU 94XXUXR201,94XXUXR202,
94XXUXR203
Optional kit:
A9400UX FLAT ODU
9400UXI103
Figure 25 - Pole mounting 1+0 configuration ( 9400UXI102)
CAUTION: For the torques of the screws, refer to chapter 3.3.4.

3.5.3.1 -- Installing the ODU 94xxUXR201, 94xxUXR202, 94xxUXR203
-- Remove the solar shield by undoing the M6 fixing screw with a 16 mm flat wrench.
-- Take the ODU by the handle, offer up the two protrusion bosses inside the nose of the unit to the two
grooves in the nose of the antenna (the ODU-IDU connecting cable entry should be located in the
bottom part of the ODU). Still holding the ODU, engage without fastening the top catch on the support,
begin by fastening the two side catches on the support, then fasten the bottom catch, and finish with
the top catch.
Catch bead
Support plate A
Position of catch for F > 20
GHz for ODU from Position of catch for F < 20 GHz for
94xxUXR201 to 94xxUXR203 ODU from 94xxUXR201 to 94xxUXR203
-- Reposition the solar shield via the back of the ODU from 94xxUXR201 to 94xxUXR203, centre the
bottom ribs of the solar shield in the grooves of the ODU. Slide fully home, and moderately tighten
by hand the screw (M6) in the recess on the underside of the ODU. Check the assembly by trying to
extract the solar shield from its recess.
Note: The locking screw is not a fixing, it is simply intended to safeguard against inadvertent dismantling; do
not overtighten.
CAUTION: If the screw cannot be reached by hand, use a 16 mm flat wrench (as an
indication, fasten to a torque of 1mN, that is 0.1mdaN).
REMINDER:
S The ODU/antenna assembly requires no additional seal on the flanges; the two ends are
smooth. Sealing is provided by the O--ring seal around the male noses.
S When the ODU is fitted, the polarization of the antenna can be ascertained from the position of the
ODU handle:
handle arranged vertically = horizontal polarization, and vice versa.

Two choices per polarization are possible:
OR
Vertical polarization
N N
OR
Horizontal polarization
N N
Figure 26 - Installing the ODU 94xxUXR201 to 94xxUXR203

3.5.3.2 -- Installing the flat ODU
-- Take the ODU by the handle, offer up the two protrusion bosses inside the nose of the unit to the two
grooves in the nose of the antenna (the ODU-IDU connecting cable entry should be located in the
bottom part of the ODU). Still holding the ODU, engage without fastening the top catch on the support,
begin by fastening the two side catches on the support, then fasten the bottom catch, and finish with
the top catch.
Catch bead
Position of catch for

A9400UX flat ODU Flat ODU
-- Flange the ODU handle.

-- Reposition the solar shield via the back of the flat ODU. Slide fully home, and moderately tighten by
hand the screw (M4) on the ODU.
CAUTION : When demounting, if the screws cannot be reached by hand, use a screw-
driver.
S When the ODU is mounted, the 50 coaxial jack is always facing down, the natural reading of the
POL H or POL V etching shows the antenna polarization (see Figure 27).
Here, the normal reading of the POL V indicates

the vertical polarization of the antenna
Figure 27 - Installing the ODU A9400UX flat ODU

S In vertical or horizontal polarization, the solar shield remains fixed in the same position and the
ODU is the only part which can rotate 90 degrees when changing the polarization. (See Figure 28).
Solar shield
The Arrow determines

the polarization.
Vertical polarization Horizontal polarization
Figure 28 - Solar shield installation
3.5.3.3 -- Installing on the pipe.
CAUTION: Do not pick up the ODU/antenna assembly by the ODU handle.
Note: Be aware that azimutal coarse pointing of antenna is done at this phase.
3.5.3.4 -- Coarse pointing the antenna
Coarse pointing of the antenna is carried out as follows:
S Roughly adjust the elevation orientation of the pole mounting in the direction of the remote
station. Use the antenna top marker (see figures in 3.5.2), a compass and binoculars, then
secure the brackets.
S Azimutal coarse pointing has to be carried out when installing the pole mounting.

OR
A9400UX FLAT ODU
ODU 94XXUXR201,94XXUXR202,
94XXUXR203
Figure 29 - Azimutal pointing of antenna

S Elevation alignment is performed only with the elevation turnbuckles. If the elevation angle is
higher that (+ 5) or lower than (-- 5), it is necessary to:
-- remove completely one of the 2 screws fixing the antenna support on the azimutal support and,
-- insert it in the third hole accessible.

si --5_<<5_
Put the screws in the

= 25 _ two external holes
= 25 _
si: >5 _
ou <- 5_
or
Put the screws in the
2 holes visible through
the window, i.e. the
middle and the
external hole.
A9400UX FLAT ODU
Figure 30 - Elevation coarse pointing of antenna
CAUTION:
In either case, the support must be fixed with 3 screws, 2 put in the window and 1
corresponding to its axis of rotation.
All screws must be tightened and secured only after fine pointing of the antenna
CAUTION:
Take care to put the 2 screws in the window with the flat washers positioned as
shown is the figure below.

3.5.4 - Installing a configuration 1+0 with pole mounting 1 + 1 (9400UXI101) and
integrated antenna
This assembly is valid only for antenna diameters of up to 600 mm (two feet). The antenna is screwed to the
pole mounting 9400UXI101. The ODU is mounted with quick latches.
Overall antenna steer (with turnbuckles set to the maximum) is:
-- azimutal: 360 degrees for a 300 mm diameter antenna and 180 degrees for a 600 mm diameter
antenna,
-- elevation: 25 degrees.
The steer obtained by the turnbuckles is:
-- azimutal: 9 degrees,
-- elevation: 9 degrees.
If you have physical difficulties assembling the mounting (wall too close, obstacle, etc), the azimutal turnbuckle
can be moved and mounted on the other side of the pole mounting arm.
Procedure :
-- 1) Position the antenna vertically (nose horizontal), with the drain hole in the bottom part and free of
obstacles.
-- 2) Insert the 7 M6 screws 1 with their onduflex springy crinkle washers 2 , tighten and secure the
screws (these screws can be found in a plastic bag located inside the casting).

Top marker
Centering pin
or screw 7 x M6 screw and
Onduflex washer
1 2
or
A9400UX FLAT ODU
ODU
94XXUXR201,
Casting 94XXUXR202,
94XXUXR203
Nut
Grower washer
flat washer
Optional kit
9400UXI103
Figure 31 - 9400UXI101 configuration
CAUTION: For the torque of the screws, refer to chapter 3.3.4.
CAUTION: The O--ring must be coated with silicone grease before fitting.

3.5.4.1 -- Installing the ODU 94XXUXR201, 94XXUXR202, 94XXUXR203
-- Take the ODU by the handle, offer up the two protrusion bosses located inside the nose of the unit
and facing the two grooves in the nose of the antenna (the ODU-IDU connecting cable entry should
be located in the bottom part of the ODU). Still holding the ODU, engage without fastening the top
catch on the support, begin by fastening the two side catches on the support, then fasten the bottom
catch, to complete with the top catch.
Catch bead
Support plate A

-- Swivel the antenna support through 90 on its azimuthal axis to release it from the pole. Immobilize
the vertical axis by the five screws (see Figure 32, item 3 ).
-- Reposition the solar shield via the back of the ODU, centre the bottom ribs of the solar shield in the
grooves of the ODU. Slide fully home, and moderately tighten by hand the screw (M6) in the recess
on the underside of the ODU. Check the assembly by trying to extract the solar shield from its recess.
Note: The locking screw is not a fixing, it is simply intended to safeguard against inadvertent dismantling; do
not overtighten.
CAUTION: If the screw cannot be reached by hand, use a 16 mm flat wrench (as an
indication, fasten to a torque of 1mN, that is 0.1mdaN).
REMINDER:
S For a 1+0 configuration, when the ODU is fitted, the polarization of the antenna can be ascertained
from the position of the ODU handle:
handle arranged vertically = horizontal polarization, and vice versa.
3.5.4.2 -- Installing the ODU 9400UX flat ODU
-- Remove the solar shield by undoing the M4 fixing screw manually or with a screw driver.
-- Take the ODU by the handle, offer up the two bosses located inside the nose of the unit and facing
the two grooves in the nose of the antenna (the ODU-IDU connecting cable entry should be located
in the bottom part of the ODU). Still holding the ODU, engage without fastening the top catch on the
support, begin by fastening the two side catches on the support, then fasten the bottom catch, to
complete with the top catch.
Catch bead

Flat ODU
A9400UX flat ODU
-- Swivel the antenna support through 90 on its azimutal axis to release it from the pole. Immobilize the
vertical axis by the five screws (see Figure 32, item 3 ).

CAUTION : When unscrewing, if the screws cannot be reached by hand, use a screw-
driver.
S When the ODU is mounted, the 50--ohm coaxial jack is always facing down, the natural reading
of the POL H or POL V etching shows the antenna polarization (see Figure 27).
3.5.4.3 -- Installing on the pipe.
CAUTION: Do not pick up the ODU/antenna assembly by the ODU handle.
3.5.4.4 -- Pointing the antenna

-- 1) Roughly adjust the elevation orientation of the pole mounting in the direction of the remote
station. The elevation turnbuckle should remain in its middle position. Use the antenna top marker (see
figures in 3.5.2), a compass and binoculars, then secure the brackets 2 in optional Kit 9400UXI103.
CAUTION: The bracket nuts should be fastened to a torque of 3 m.daN +/-- 20%.
The brackets must be clean and without grease except on the threads.
-- 2) Roughly point the antenna support towards the required azimuthal by undoing the azimuthal
locking screw. The azimuthal turnbuckle should remain in its middle position (approximately 85 mm
centres); swivel the antenna support vertically for adjustment purposes, then retighten the azimuthal
locking screw.
CAUTION: The azimuthal turnbuckle should not exceed 94 mm centre distance when
fine tuning the adjustment.
CAUTION:
Never mount integrated antennas and ODUs under the pole mounting support.
Never mount the elevation axis horizontally:
ODUs must be above the pole mounting and not laterally offset.
-- 3) On the pole mounting, undo the 4 + 1 M8 screws (item 3 - see figure below) so that you will be
able to fit the ODU later.

Position of pack of screw
Pole mounting fasteners and terminals
1
3
Azimuthal locking
Kit 9400UXI103
screw
(optional)
Figure 32 - Pointing the antenna
-- 4) Position the U bolts 2 on the pole, fit the flat washers, grower washers and nuts.
CAUTION: For the fasten torques of the screws, refer to chapter 3.3.4.

3.5.5 - Installing the (1+1) HSB configuration with integrated antenna
3.5.5.1 -- Typical 1 + 1 HSB configuration with coupler 94xxUXR111
-- ODU 94xxUXR201 to ODU 94xxUXR203

750 ( 13 38 GHz )
Coupler box
Antenna Solar shield
Main ODU
Coupler
Standby ODU
Support (Pole mounting)
-- ODU 9400UX flat ODU
Solar shield
Main ODU
Antenna
Coupler
Standby ODU
Support (Pole mounting)

INSTALLING THE HSB COUPLER
IMPORTANT NOTE: NEVER REMOVE THE ROUND YELLOW PADS THAT ARE USED
TO SEAL THE OUTDOOR SYSTEM.
The coupler is supplied with vertical polarization (see 3.5.2). The procedure for changing the polarization of
the HSB coupler is described in that section (see 7.13). This must be done before installation.
To install the HSB coupler assembly:
-- take it by the handle, offer up the two bosses located in the nose of the coupler on the side of the
antenna port, to the grooves in the nose of the antenna,
-- Do not remove the sealing window located on the antenna port. The ODU/coupler/antenna
assembly requires no additional seal on the flanges; the flanges are smooth and sealing is provided
by the O--ring seal located around the male noses.
-- fix the coupler using three M6 x 35 mm screws and nuts in the holes in the top lugs of the pole
mounting.
-- secure the coupler by the two side screws (M6 x 30) on the pole mounting.
Fixing holes on radio support ring of pole O-ring seal

mounting CAUTION: The seal should be
coated with silicon grease before
assembly
Standby ODU
Antenna
port
Side fixing holes on
pole mounting arm
CAUTION: The O--ring must be coated with silicon grease before assembly (the grease
is provided with the HSB).
INSTALLING ODU
The positions of the main and standby ODUs are shown in the previous figures; for installing the ODUs, see
3.5.4.1.
3.5.5.2 -- Typical 1+1 HSB CONFIGURATION WITH THE NEW HSB COUPLER
This type of coupler must only be used with the A9400UX flat ODUs.

1) U bolts
2) Pole mounting
3) Radio mounting
4) Fastening points for COUPLER
5) Screws fastening the antenna to the support
6) Antenna screw--fastening slots
7) RF Coupler Fastening brackets for ODU
8) Grounding points
INSTALLING THE HSB COUPLER

For the frequencies above 20 GHz, the ODU is fitted with a nose adapter to remain mechanically compatible
with the HSB coupler 94xxUXR111. Unscrew the 2 Torx screws to remove the adapters on both ODUs. Fix one
of the two adapters to the antenna access of the HSB coupler. Fasten the coupler to the support through the
four locking hooks (1) that will be tightened onto the relative fastening brackets on the radio support (2).

INSTALLING THE ODU 1+1
Grasp two modules ODU by the handle. Fasten the ODU module to the support through the locking hooks
(3) that will be tightened onto the relative fastening bracket on the coupler (4).
CAUTION: The O--rings must be coated with silicon grease before assembly
(otherwise, the waterproofness cannot be guaranteed).

3.5.6 -- Installation with non-integrated antenna
3.5.6.1 -- Method
-- Install the antenna on the pipe, according to the instructions given by the manufacturer and supplied
with the antenna, and prepoint the antenna towards the remote station using a compass and a pair of
binoculars,
-- Install the pole mounting on the pipe, see 3.5.4.3,
-- Install the HSB coupler on the pole mounting (only for 1+1 configuration), see 3.5.5,
-- Install the ODU, see 3.5.6.4
-- Install the flextwist (suited to the frequency) between the pole mounting and the antenna, see 3.5.6.6.

3.5.6.2 -- Typical installation
a) with ODU 94xxUXR201 or 94xxUXR202 or 94xxUXR203
Smooth square flange
Flextwist
Square flange
with groove
ODU 94xxUXR201 or
94xxUXR202 or 94xxUXR203
Antenna 0.90 m or greater

Adpater nose
Support radio
94XXUXI102
b) with ODU 94xxUXR204
Flextwist
ODU 9400UX flat ODU

with solar shield
Antenna 0.90 m or greater
Support radio
94XXUXI102

3.5.6.3 -- Assembling and installing radio support
For installation, you will need the following:
-- The ODU support, ref: 1AB128510002 is regardless of frequency band.
-- a microwave nose,
-- a 600 mm long flextwist waveguide.
Note : As our ODU supports are chromate plated or tinned on the flextwist, be careful with
the materials used facing the unit to prevent any galvanic couple.
Frequency Radio side Flextwist

Antenna side flange Flextwist flanges
range flange reference
13 GHz PBR 120 UBR 120/PBR 120 UBR 120 9413UXI103
15 GHz PBR 140 UBR 140/PBR 140 UBR 140 9415UXI103
18 GHz
PBR 220 UBR 220/PBR 220 UBR 220 94XXUXI103
23/25 GHz
38 GHz Only integrated antennas
The pole mounting kit comprises the parts detailed below.
Vertical Horizontal
polarization polarization
-- Choose the horizontal or vertical polarization to match that of the ODU before fixing nose C (type
dependent on the frequency) on plate A with the three M4 x 16 socket cap screws (3 mm Allen key).
-- Choose the direction of assembly of plate B (on the right or on the left of the pipe); this should match
that of the antenna, then bolt the plate A onto plate B with four M10 x 35 hex nuts and four washers.
-- Offer up the assembly to the antenna support pipe, then secure it with the M10 U bolts, nuts, lock nuts
and washers.
-- Check that all the screw fastenings are correctly tightened. For the fasten torques of the screws, refer
to 3.3.4.
CAUTION: The O--ring must be coated with silicone grease before fitting (the grease is
provided with the microwave nose).

3.5.6.4 -- Installing the ODU 94xxUXR201, 94xxUXR202, 94xxUXR203
-- 1) Remove the solar shield by undoing the M6 fixing screw with a 16 mm flat wrench.
-- 2) Take the ODU by the handle, offer up the two bosses inside the nose of the unit to the two grooves
in the adapter nose (the ODU-IDU connecting cable entry should be located in the bottom part of the
ODU). Still holding the ODU, engage without fastening the top catch on the support, begin by fastening
the two side catches on the support, then fasten the bottom catch and finish with the top catch.
Catch bead
Support plate A

-- 3) Reposition the solar shield via the back of the ODU, centre the bottom ribs of the solar shield
in the grooves of the ODU. Slide fully home and, by hand, tighten the screw (M6) in the recess on
the underside of the ODU. Check the assembly by trying to extract the solar shield from its recess
*(torque, by way of indication: 1 mN = 0.1 mdaN)
3.5.6.5 -- Installing the flat ODU

-- Take the ODU by the handle, offer up the two bosses located inside the nose of the unit and facing
the two grooves in the nose of the antenna (the ODU-IDU connecting cable entry should be located
in the bottom part of the ODU). Still holding the ODU, engage without fastening the top catch on the
support, begin by fastening the two side catches on the support, then fasten the bottom catch, to
complete with the top catch.
Catch bead
A9400UX flat ODU Flat ODU

CAUTION : When unscrewing, if the screws cannot be reached by hand, use a screw-
driver.
S When the ODU is mounted, the 50--ohm coaxial jack is always facing down, the natural reading
of the POL H or POL V etching shows the antenna polarization (see Figure 27).

3.5.6.6 -- Installing the Flextwist waveguide
Refer to the example given in 3.5.6.2 and the table in 3.5.6.3.
This 600 mm long twistable flexible waveguide is supplied complete with gaskets and fasteners. At one end,
it has a smooth square flange (to be mounted on the antenna) and at the other end, a grooved square flange
designed to accommodate an O-ring seal (mounted at the ODU end). The kit comprises:
-- one 600 mm flextwist waveguide,
-- one O-ring seal for square flange,
-- six M4 x 20 or M3 x 16 stainless steel socket cap screws (13/15 GHz or 18/23/25 GHz versions
respectively),
-- six M4 x 12 (13/15 GHz) or M3 x 12 (18/23/25 GHz) stainless steel socket cap screws,
-- 12 18/10 stainless Z4 (13/15 GHz) or Z3 (18/23/25 GHz) flat washers,
-- 12 18/10 stainless B4 (13/15 GHz) or B3 (18/23/25 GHz) Onduflex springy crinkle washers ,
-- six 18/10 stainless HM4 (13/15 GHz) or HM3 (18/23/25 GHz) hex nuts,
-- one record of measurements taken on the waveguide.
REMEMBER TO FIT THE GASKETS AND TIGHTEN THE SCREWS.

3.6 -- Wiring
3.6.1 -- Wiring the power supply to the 19 indoor units
3.6.1.1 -- Direct connection with the power supply
The 48 V DC or 24 V DC connection kit is for setting up the power connection between the main or extension
IDU and the distribution panel (one for each terminal). On the user side, the plus or minus pole can be
grounded in the current version of the equipment.
Plug + shell reference: 3CC08048AAxx or ABxx

(supplied with the connector kit)
Shell
For 48 V supply, 3 x 1.5 mm2 connecting cable
(minimum), flexible, unshielded
For 24 V supply, 3 x 2.5 mm2 connecting cable

(minimum) flexible, unshielded
- V female contact Ground +V female contact Preparing the connecting cable
3.6.1.2 -- Power panel and IDU

19, 3U internal power panel (ref: 9400XXC511)
This provides six ways protected by 6A fuses, providing remote connection to the operators power input.
Wall mounted power unit (ref: 9400XXC512)
This provides six ways protected by 6A fuses, for

remote connection to the operators power input.

For both these products, the fuses used are 8.5 x 31.5 6A 400V gG domestic type cartridges.
The cables supplied to connect the IDUs are:
-- 48 V: 3CC08165AAxx(3 x 1.5 mm2),
-- 24 V: 3CC08209AAxx (3 x 2.5 mm2).
To connect the operators input, the recommended cable is:

-- 48 V : 3CC08211AAxx (3 x 4 mm2),
-- 24 V : 3CC08212AAxx (3 x 10 mm2).
3.6.2 -- Equipment grounding

Grounding connections are made on three separate parts:
-- the indoor units,
-- the outdoor units,
-- the pole mounting mechanical assembly.
Earthing is bonded using green/yellow insulated cable with a minimum cross sectional area of 1x16 mm2
towards the grounding vertical run. Wiring should be kept as short as possible. The overall length for all of the
connections must not exceed 20 metres.
In addition, the IDU/ODU cable may be grounded using kit: 9400UXI204
The ground connection for the ODU part should not be done through the lightning
conductor.
3.6.2.1 -- On 19 indoor units (IDU)

The ground terminal comprises a tapped terminal (connector side of the unit, alongside the IDU/ODU coaxial
socket), to which is fastened (by its M6 screw) a crimp terminal.
Tapped ground terminal
3.6.2.2 -- On outdoor units (ODU)

The mechanical ground terminal comprises a tapped terminal located on the front of the ODU (see 3.5).
GroundingEarthing connections are by crimp terminal (this is supplied with the pole mountings kit of screw
fasteners).

3.6.2.3 -- On the pole mounting assembly
The ground terminal comprises a tapped hole located at the back of the cast part which supports the radio unit
in the 1+0 configuration and the HSB coupler in a 1+1 configuration. The ground terminal is based on a crimp
terminal (this terminal is supplied with the pole mountings kit of screw fasteners).
tapped hole
for ground
terminal
grounding
The installation
kit 9400UXI204
of the grounding
kit is necessary
only if D > 80 m
D
tapped hole for

ground terminal
Indoor
Figure 33 - Grounding the pole mounting and the cable

Lightning finial
bonded to tower
I.F. cable outer conductor bonded to

tower at top and bottom of vertical
run via feeder grounding kit
Zone of protection provided by tower
I.F. cable
I.F. cable outer conductor

Boundary fence ground bonded to ground via feeder
via building ground ring grounding kit
Ground bar below the hopper

Each tower leg bonded Independent grounding functions, e.g.
via sacrificial ground lug DC power, AC power, etc.
to tower ground ring
Tower and building ground rings interconnected (driven electrode systems shown)
Figure 34 - Typical example of good grounding practice [ETSI document Draft EG 200 053 V1.4.3
(2002- 02) (Page 91/145), informative]
3.6.3 - IDU/ODU wiring

The link is provided by a single 50 ohm coaxial cable (for each IDU/ODU link). For protection against
interference and to ensure that it does not radiate interference (EMC requirements), the cable used is
double-shielded, 11 mm in diameter, with an outer PU sheathing (for UV protection) with a maximum length of
300 meters approved today under the reference 1AC001100022.
The outer sheathing of the cable is marked at approximately 60 cm intervals with the cable reference
1AC001100022. The cable is terminated by male, elbow N type connectors, ref: 9400UXI203. The connectors
are watertight, but, for added protection, when connected, preferably wind self--amalgamating tape supplied
with the consumables kit (optional) around the connector.
Instructions for fitting these connectors are given in Appendix 5.
The greatest possible attention should be paid to the wiring of the coaxial plugs and to compliance with the cable
installation rules, such as: minimum bending radius of 80 mm, watertightness, etc. If ordered by the customer,
a cable grounding kit may be supplied; this is for sites where radio frequency interference is high, for example:
radio stations, TV transmitters, etc. Kit ref: 9400UXI204 (see figure 33).
Instructions for the use of the cable earthing kit are supplied with the kit.
In a 1 + 1 configuration, the difference in length between IDU / ODU cables must not exceed 20 metres.

3.6.3.1 -- Fixing the IDU/ODU cable
The coaxial cable is fixed to the pole mounting as rigidly as possible to avoid repetitive movement caused by
mechanical or atmospheric vibrations that might in turn damage the cable or connector.
CABLE FIXING
9400UX flat ODU

IDU/ODU cable
correct positioning
Cable ties OR
Service kit spring hook
ODU
ODU / IDU CABLE
Cable ties
ODU / IDU cable
ODU 9400UX flat ODU
The cable is fixed along the supporting pipe or pole by the normal methods (Colson cable ties are supplied in
the optional consumables kit)

3.6.4 - Wiring the 34 Mbit/s tributary and auxiliary 2 Mbit/s stream
The 34 Mbit/s port is implemented by 1.6/5.6 connectors located on a plate installed at:
-- I/O (9/16) on the main IDU for 1+0 and 1+1 configurations,
-- I/O (9/16) on the access IDU for 1+1 configurations with MUX protection.
If a BNC connector is required for the 34 Mbit/s stream, use a BNC/1.6/5.6 adapter kit, ref: 9400XXI405.
1.6/ 5.6 connector

1.6/ 5.6 connector
E R
34 Mbit/s port
+ 2 Mbit/s auxilliary
The auxiliary 2 Mbit/s port uses female 37-pin Sub-D connectors:

-- I/O (1/8) on the main IDU,
-- I/O (1/8) on the access IDU.
PIN
LAU : 3CC06061AAxx
SIGNAL
LIU : 3CC06118AAxx
In+ In-- Out+ Out--
Auxiliary 2 Mbit/s 9 28 19 37 X
In the 75 version, In+ and Out+ are the live input and output points and In- and Out- are the ground
connectors for the signals.
3.6.5 -- Wiring n x 2 Mbit/s tributaries
3.6.5.1 -- Connections
The user ports will be via one of the following ports described in Appendix 6.1.1:
-- 37-way I/O (1/8) and I/O (9/16) connectors on the main IDU,
-- 37--way I/O (1 -- 4) connectors on the Light IDU version,
-- 37-way I/O (1/8) and I/O (9/16) connectors on the access IDU (1+1 version with MUX protection),
when the access IDU exists.
-- on 3CC13659AAxx cables (1+1 with MUX protection without access IDU)
In 120 ohms, if the non-distributor option is selected, wire the braces supplied with the IDU-ODU connector
kit (ref: 3CC07899AAxx) using a crimping tool (608868-1, from AMP).
3.6.5.2 -- Wall mounting (9400UXI301) indoor units
S 3U 19 mounting
S The distributors described below can be fixed to a wall using this kit
comprising two brackets + fixing screws (Ref. 3CC07957AAAA).
60 mm
398 mm

3.6.5.3 -- 4 x 2 Mbit/s wiring with distributor
COMMERCIAL CODE
OUTPUT
OF DISTRIBUTOR CABLE DISTRIBUTOR
TYPE
ASSEMBLY
37-pin 1 Unit
connector
75 2m
9400XXI404
1.6/5.6 3CC08061AAxx
3CC07885Axxx 1 Unit = 44.45 mm
37-pin
connector 1U
9400XXI404 75 2m
1x 9400XX405 BNC
3CC08061ABxx
3CC07759Axxx
For 120 wiring, use the cables provided for the 8 x 2 Mbit/s version.
COMMERCIAL CODE
OUTPUT
TYPE
ASSEMBLY
37-pin
1U
connector
75 2m
9400XXI408
1.6/5.6
3CC08061AAxx
3CC07885Axxx
37-pin
connector 1U
9400XXI408 75 2m
2x 9400XXI405 BNC
3CC08061ABxx
3CC07759Axxx
3U EMC
2m
120
3CC07658Axxx
3CC07810AAxx
9400XXI408
1U
2m
120
3CC08062AAxx non EMC
3CC07658Axxx

COMMERCIAL CODE
OUTPUT
TYPE
ASSEMBLY
37-pin
1U
connector
75 2m
9400XXI416
1.6/5.6
3CC08061AAxx
2 x 3CC07885Axxx
37-pin
connector 1U
9400XXI416 75 2m
4 x 9400XXI405 BNC
3CC08061ABxx
2 x 3CC07759Axxx
3U EMC
2m
120
2 x 3CC07658Axxx
3CC07810AAxx
9400XXI416
1U
120 2m
3CC08062AAxx non EMC

2 x 3CC07658Axxx
3.6.6 -- Engineering service channel wiring

This wiring is for connecting the users terminal equipment to the ESC connector. For the link cable, use the
connectors supplied in the connector kit shipped with the IDU-ODU assembly. The pinout of the connectors
is given in Appendix 6.2.

3.6.7 -- Alarm and remote control wiring (TS/TC)
The TS/TC interface on:
-- the ALARMS I/O connector of the main IDU,
-- the ESC3 / ALARM I/O connector of the Light IDU versions.
is used to:
-- supply three signals (outputs) to the equipment (dry loops, 0.5 A/100 V).
-- supply (output) one remote control (dry loop, 0.5 A/100 V).
-- connect eight housekeeping alarm inputs: n1 to n8 alarms. These alarms are formed by normally
opened or normally closed loops, see 7.10.
For the connecting cable, use the connector provided in the connector kits supplied with the IDU--ODU
assembly. The connector pinout is given in the Appendix 6.3.
3.6.8 -- Engineering service channel ESC2 telephone handset

The service channel telephone handset (classic IDU only, ref: 9400XXB000, optional kit) is as shown below.
It connects to the IDU, via the RJ11 connector with the handset symbol; it uses DTMF (tone) dialling.
To safeguard against EMC problems, remember to clip the isolating ferrite core on the
cable. This is supplied in the main IDU connector kit (3CC08048ABxx).
The handset can be connected to the main IDU, via the front panel or connector panel.
Caution: to operate, set the handset switch to FV.
Set switch to
FV
Isolating ferrite core
RJ 11 connector

3.7 -- Wiring between a terminals units
3.7.1 -- Main IDU - extension IDU wiring
This is for 1+1 configurations of all types and 1+0 configurations with extension.
( 9 / I6 )
Main IDU
Cable
Cable 3CC07157ABxx
3CC07160ABxx
Extension IDU
Connect the ESC EXT connector on the main IDU to the ESC MAIN connector on the extension IDU using a
cable ref: 9400UXC130 (3CC07157ABxx), with male 37-way connectors (L = 300 mm).
Connect the EXT connector on the main IDU to the MAIN connector on the extension IDU via a cable
ref: 9400UXB221 (3CC07160ABxx), with 68-way rectangular plugs (L = 300 mm).

3.7.2 -- Wiring the access IDU to a main and extension IDU
This applies to 1+1 configurations with multiplex protection.
NOTE:
When the 1+1 configuration with multiplexer protection is selected, the units must be
arranged physically from top to bottom, as follows: main unit, access unit (when used),
extention unit.
3.7.2.1 -- N x 2 Mbit/s without Access IDU (preferred configuration since the IDU type 2 availability )
MAIN IDU
Cable
3/16 Cable
3CC07160ABxx
3CC07157ABxx
2 Mbits HDB3
connection
Cables
3CC13659AAxx
1/8
Extension IDU
Configuration with MUX protection without access IDU

Two identical cables ref: 3CC013659AAxx, 37--pin male plugs,
L = 300 mm are used to be connected to the following connectors between the two IDUs:
-- ACCESS (1/8) connector of the extension IDU to the I/O (1/8) connector of the main IDU.
-- ACCESS (9/16) connector of the extension IDU to the I/O (9/16) connector of the main IDU.
NOTE:
When the 1+1 configuration with multiplexer protection is selected, the units must be
arranged physically from top to bottom, as follows: main unit, extension unit.
3.7.2.2 -- 34 Mbit/s with Access IDU (for both IDU type 1 and IDU type 2)
Main IDU
Cables
3CC07157ABxx
Cable
Cable
3CC07160ABxx Access IDU 3CC07157ABxx
2 Mbit/s 34 Mbit/s 34 Mbit/s HDB3 connection

Extension IDU Aux 2 Mbit/s HDB3 connection
Two identical cables ref: 3CC07157ABxx, 37--pin male plugs,

L = 300 mm are use to be connected to the following connectors of the access IDU:
-- MAIN (1/8) to the I/O (1/8) connector of the main IDU.
-- EXT (1/8) to the ACCESS I/O (1/8) connector of the extension IDU.

3.7.2.3 -- N x 2 Mbit/s with Access IDU (for old IDU type 1)
Main IDU
Cables
3CC07157ABxx Cable
3CC07160ABxx Cable
Access IDU 3CC07157ABxx
Extension IDU 2 Mbit/s HDB3 connection
Four identical cables (two if the number of tributaries is < 8) ref: 3CC07157ABxx, 37--pin male plugs,
L = 300 mm are used to be connected to the following connectors of the access IDU:

3.8 -- Wiring between terminals of a station
The wiring in this case is to provide continuity of tributaries and service channels between the various terminals
of the particular station.
3.8.1 - Tributary wiring

Set up the wiring to interconnect the various tributaries from the N x 2 Mbit/s distributors or the 34 Mbit/s
connectors of each terminal according to the wiring diagram specified by the network administrator.
3.8.2 - ESC wiring

3.8.2.1 -- ESC1 (supervision channel)
STATION WITH TWO 2-WAY TERMINALS

Connect the NMS1 connector on the first unit to the NMS1 connector on the second unit using cable ref:
9400UXC332 (3CC07711AAxx), 2 m long.
STATION WITH THREE 3-WAY TERMINALS

Connect the NMS1 connector on the first unit to the NMS1 connector on the second unit using cable ref:
9400UXC332 (3CC07711AAxx) 2 m long.
Connect the NMS2 connector on the second unit to the NMS1 connector on the third unit using cable ref:
9400UXC332 (3CC07711AAxx), 2 m long.
NODE EXCHANGE
The supervision bus is used to extend the wiring to N items of equipment by linking the NMS2 connector of one
to the NMS1 connector of the next, as many times as is needed, using cable ref: 9400UXC332
(3CC07711AAxx), 2 m long.
SNMP bus protection: the SNMP bus supports meshed connections, for example, by linking the NMS2
connector of the nth terminal to the NMS1 connector of the first terminal, and so on.
3.8.2.2 -- ESC2 wiring (analogue channel)

This channel is not provided in the Light IDU versions.
STATION WITH TWO 2-WAY TERMINALS

Connect the BACK TO BACK connectors of the main IDUs via cable ref: 9400UXC333 (3CC08729AAxx), 2m
long
STATION WITH THREE 3-WAY TERMINALS

-- Connect the BACK TO BACK ports of the first unit and second unit via cable ref: 9400UXC333
(3CC06688AAxx), 2 m long,
-- and connect the AUDIO1 ports of the second unit to the AUDIO1 ports of the third unit using cable ref:
9400UXC332 (3CC07711AAxx), 2 m long.

The connections can be extended to n terminals according to the figure below:
-- Connect the BACK TO BACK ports of the terminals (1 and 2), (3 and 4), (5 and 6), etc, via cable
ref: 9400UXC333 (3CC08729AAxx), 2 m long,
-- and connect the AUDIO1 ports of terminals (2 and 3), (4 and 5), (6 and 7), etc, via cable
ref: 9400UXC332 (3CC07711AAxx), 2 m long .
Back to back Audio1 to Audio 1 Back to back Audio1 to Audio 1 Back to back
E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6
3.8.2.3 -- ESC 3, 4, 5 wiring

CLASSIC IDUS
Set up specific wiring using the connectors supplied with the IDU connector kit
-- Connector pinout information is given in Appendix 5
S 9--way connector 3CC07920AAxx
LIGHT IDU
Only service channel 3 is available.
-- Prepare specific wiring with 37--way connector 3CC09311AAxx supplied with the connector kit.

4 -- Configuration and operation software
Systems are commissioned, operated and maintained via a portable PC with the 946LUX50 1320 CT
supervision software installed which runs in Windows(TM) environment. The computer connects directly to the
main IDU (F connector, item { in the figure below), via an F connector adapter cable (3CC14134AAxx) and
connected to a 9-way/9-way cable (1AB 054120027) supplied with the set of software installation CD--ROM.

CLASSIC IDU
RST
IDU
LIGHT IDU

Figure 35 - Controls, indicators and connectors on the IDU
This manual applies to the 946LUX50 version of the software installed on the PC.
For the terminal to which it is connected and for the remote terminal (when the link is set up), this software can
be used to:
-- display and administer all alarms, status, remote controls,
-- read and modify the configuration (bit rate, frequencies, etc),
-- display transmission parameters (received power, transmission power),
-- monitor performance (G.784),
-- download software,
-- browse remote inventory,
-- display event log.

4.1 -- Installing the software
4.1.1 - Warning note
You are assumed to be familiar with:
-- use of the installed PC and its devices,
-- operation of the PC in WINDOWS NT, 2000 or XP *.
In addition, for some of the configuration applications, the operator should be aware of certain specifications
of the International Standard Organization (ISO) and of the standards applied to the Plesiochronous Digital
Hierarchy (PDH) (ITU--T Recommandations).
The PC must have the following minimum specifications:
S Pentium III or compatible processor operating at 850 MHz or above,
S 256 Mbytes of RAM (512 Mbytes recommended with Windows XP),
S serial asynchronous communication port,
S 4 Gbytes hard disk,
S CD--ROM or DVD--ROM drive,
S 1024 x 768 display.
The operating systems validated are the following:

S Windows NT 4.0 SP3 to SP6, 2000 to SP4, or XP to SP1 installed on the hard disk.
Before installing the system, check the following points:
-- if there is a virtual disk, uninstall it,
-- check that the system date and time are correct and if not, adjust them,
-- if your PC is running under Windows XP, the firewall must be disabled.
* MS-DOS, MICROSOFT and WINDOWS are registered trademarks of MICROSOFT Corporation

4.2 -- Summary of SW installation steps
The installation steps for the software in PC WINDOWS--NT/XP/2000 environments (PC disconnected from
Equipment Controller) are as follows:
Installation from software CD--ROM
-- installation of 1320CT + NE software from software CD--ROM
-- end of SW installation from software CD--ROM
CT initial configuration
-- NE login
-- Craft Terminal configuration
-- NE software downloading preparation that is described in detail in following paragraphs.
4.2.1 - Software loading in PC WINDOWS-- NT/XP/2000 environment
CAUTION:
! S Procedures described in the following are carried out with the PC disconnected from the NE
4.2.2 -- Installation of CT + NE software from CD--ROM

4.2.2.1 -- Standard software installation
The software installation can be performed with two different procedures:
-- CT Products automatic installation
-- CT Products guided installation
The first procedure is used to upgrade the new software in the system, the second one must be used to perform
the first software installation and to upgrade two specific components: Java and LLMan.
The standard installation sequence uses the guided procedure to install the first two components (Java and
LLMan), and then the automatic one to install the other components.
The components that need to be installed are the following:
-- JRE: Java Runtime Environment
-- LLMan: Alcatel Lower Layer Manager (required for craft terminal--to--IDU connection through its
F interface)
-- CT--K: Craft Terminal kernel component
-- SNMP--CT--K--ADD--ON: Craft terminal additional component for management of SNMP NES
-- HOLD--CT--K--ADD--ON: Craft terminal online help component
-- JUSM--LUX50: LUX50 Java User Service Manager, NE management interface
-- SW Package REG 946LUX50: LUX50 IDU embedded software (for IDU software download)
The following describes (step by step) the procedure to install JRE and Alcatel Lower Layer Manager with
the CT Products guided installation

Operations sequence:
Step 1. Select CT Products guided installation and press NEXT button.
Step 2. Select JRE and Alcatel Lower Layer Manager components.
Figure 36 - Craft Terminal Component Selection Guided Installation
Step 3. Press Next button to begin the installation of the previously selected components.
Step 4. Start the Java installation and answer the questions according to your system.
Step 5. If a computer restart is requested, select NO and continue the installation.

NOTE: The computer restart must be performed at the END of the installation procedure.

Figure 37 - Lower Layer Manager Welcome screen
Step 6. Press NEXT button to start the installation of the Lower Layers Manager.
Figure 38 - Lower Level Manager Completion Screen
Step 7. Select Configure Lower Layer and press Finish to complete the operation.

Step 8. Complete the configuration by pressing OK button.
NOTE: If a network adapter is not running on your PC, you can set the System identifierfield with a sequence
of 120. The following window will be displayed.
Figure 39 - Lower Layer Manager Settings Screen
Figure 40 - Null System Identifier Warning

Step 9. Click Yes to confirm.

The following describes the procedure for installing all the components except JRE and Alcatel Lower Layer
Manager with the CT Products automatic installation
Operations sequence:
Step 1. Select the CT Products automatic installation and press Next button.
Figure 41 - CT Products Automatic Installation Screen

Step 2. Select all components except JRE and Alcatel Lower Layer Manager.
Figure 42 - Craft Terminal Component Selection (automatic selection)
Step 3. Press Next to execute the installation of the selected components.
4.2.2.2 -- Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers

After installing the software on the CT you must configure a virtual network interface for the NE connection using
TCP/IP through the serial port.
Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers is a software component used by Alcatel Lower Layers
Manager to manage TCP/IP packets through the serial port.
Follow this guide to install and configure Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers using the Control
Panel.
4.2.2.3 -- Installing the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers under Windows NT 4.0
To install the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers select the Adapters tab in the Network Control Panel
applet.
Before installing Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers you need to install TCP/IP protocol (please refer
to Windows NT Help).
To configure the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers run the Network Control Panel applet from the
Control Panel.

-- Click the Add... button in the Adapter tab of the Network Control Panel applet.
-- In the Select Network Adapter window, click on the Have Disk... button in order to add the Alcatel
Lower Layer network adapter.
Figure 43 - Network Adapter Selection (Windows NT 4.0)

In the Insert Disk dialog box, type the source path of the driver files copied during installation phase (e.g.
C:\WinNT\System32\Drivers\LLmanNIC; type echo %systemroot% from a Command Prompt window to
discover the right location of the WinNT folder) and click OK.

Figure 44 - Alcatel Lower Layer Driver Selection (Windows NT 4.0)
-- If the following dialog box appears, the driver is already installed.
Figure 45 - Existing Net Card Warning (Windows NT 4.0)
Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers is now installed. You will need to configure its TCP/IP parameters
before using it with Alcatel Lower Layers Manager.

4.2.2.4 -- Configuring the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers Under Windows NT 4.0
To configure the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers use both the Bindings and the Protocols tabs
in the Network Control Panel applet.
Before configuring Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers you need to install TCP/IP protocol (please
refer to Windows NT Help).
To install the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers run the Network Control Panel applet from the
Control Panel.
-- Select the bindings of Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers in the Bindings tab (1), (2) of the
Network Control Panel applet.
-- Disable any unnecessary components (3), (4).
-- Select the Protocols tab (5) of the Network Control Panel applet, then either a message box (NT
configuration step 2) or a dialog box (NT configuration step 3) may appear.
-- Follow the instructions until the dialog box (NT configuration step 4) appears.
Figure 46 - Alcatel VNC Configuration (Windows NT 4.0)

-- Click Yes to save changes.
Figure 47 - Change Configuration Dialog (Windows NT 4.0)

-- Select Protocols tab (1), TCP/IP Protocol (2) and click the Properties button (3).
Figure 48 - TCP/IP Protocol Selection (Windows NT 4.0)

-- Configure the IP Address and the Subnet Mask for the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers
and click OK.
Figure 49 - TCP/IP Configuration (Windows NT 4.0)

-- Click Close in the Protocols tab of the Network Control Panel applet.
Figure 50 - TCP/IP End of Configuration (Windows NT 4.0)
-- The new configuration of Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers will be used at the next restart
of the computer.
-- If you are configuring or installing the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers you can click Yes.
If you are installing some other component you should click No, continue the installation and restart
the computer later.
Figure 51 - Computer Restart Confirmation (Windows NT 4.0)

4.2.2.5 -- Installing the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers Under Windows 2000
To install the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers, run the Add/Remove Hardware Wizard from the
Control Panel.
Before installing and configuring Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers you need to install the TCP/IP
protocol (please refer to Windows 2000 Help).
To configure the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers run the Network and Dial- up connections
applet from the Control Panel.
-- Click the Next button in the Welcome to the Add/Remove Hardware Wizard dialog box.
Figure 52 - Add/Troubleshoot Selection (Windows 2000)

Figure 53 - Adding Network Adapter (Windows 2000)

-- Click the Have Disk... button in the Select Network Adapter dialog box.
Figure 54 - Selecting Network Adapter (Windows 2000)
In the Install From Disk dialog box, type the source path of the driver files copied during installation phase (e.g.

Figure 55 - Alcatel Lower Layers Selection (Windows 2000)

-- Click Next in the Start Hardware Installation dialog box.
Figure 56 - Finish Lower Layers Installation (Windows 2000)
Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers is now installed. You need to configure its TCP/IP parameters

4.2.2.6 -- Configuring the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers Under Windows 2000
To configure the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers run the Network and Dial- up connections
Before installing and configuring Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers you need to install TCP/IP
protocol (please refer to Windows 2000 Help).
To install the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers run the Add/Remove Hardware Wizard from the
Control Panel.
-- Open the network connection using the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers from the Network
and Dial--up connections applet.
Figure 57 - Open Lower Layer Connection (Windows 2000)
-- Uncheck any unnecessary component in the Properties dialog box General tab (1). Check and select
the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) component (2) and click Properties (3).

1
Figure 58 - TCP/IP Protocol Selection (Windows 2000)

-- Configure the IP Address (1) and the Subnet Mask (2) and click OK (3).
Figure 59 - TCP/IP Configuration (Windows 2000)
Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers is now configured. You will need the Alcatel Lower Layers
Manager to use it.

4.2.2.7 -- Installing the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers Under Windows XP
To install the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers, run the Add Hardware Wizard from the Control
Panel.
Before installing and configuring Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers you need to install the TCP/IP
protocol (please refer to Windows XP Help).
To configure the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers run the Network and Dialup connections
-- Click the Next button in the Welcome to the Add Hardware Wizard dialog box.
Figure 60 Add Hardware Wizard Selection (Windows XP)

Figure 61 - Adding Network Adapter (Windows XP)

Click the Have Disk... button in the Select Network Adapter dialog box.
Figure 62 - Selecting Network Adapter (Windows XP)

In the Install From Disk dialog box, type the source path of the driver files copied during installation phase (e.g.
Figure 63 Alcatel Lower Layers Selection (Windows XP)

-- Click Next in the Start Hardware Installation dialog box.
Figure 64 Finish Lower Layers Installation (Windows XP)

Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers is now installed. You need to configure its TCP/IP parameters
4.2.2.8 -- Configuring the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers Under Windows XP
To configure the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers run the Network Connections applet from the
Control Panel.
Before installing and configuring Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers you need to install TCP/IP
protocol (please refer to Windows XP Help).
To install the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers run the Add Hardware Wizard from the Control
Panel.

-- Open the network connection using the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers from the Network
and Dialup connections applet.
Figure 65 Open Lower Layer Connection (Windows XP)

-- Uncheck any unnecessary component in the Properties dialog box General tab (1). Check and select
the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) component (2) and click Properties (3).
1
2
Figure 66 TCP/IP Protocol Selection (Windows XP)

Configure the IP Address (1) and the Subnet Mask (2) and click OK (3).
1
2
Figure 67 TCP/IP Configuration (Windows XP)
Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers is now configured. You will need the Alcatel Lower Layers
Manager to use it.
4.2.3 - End of SW installation from SWP CD-- ROM

Having reached this phase, you have finished the Software transfer from SWP CD--ROM to the PC environment.
Now, you can remove the SWP CD--ROM from the PCs CD--ROM drive.

4.3 -- CT initial configuration
4.3.1 -- Preliminary Procedures
CAUTION:
! S Procedures described in the following are carried out with the PC connected to the NE.
! S This is a general procedure valid for all NE types.
4.3.2 - Craft Terminal configuration

This procedure is necessary to configure the PC in order to manage the Network Elements and includes the
following types of configuration:
-- PC hostname
-- CT configuration
-- Communication Protocol (TCP/IP):
-- TCP/IP without a network card
-- TCP/IP with a network card
-- Switching between the two configurations
-- Serial Communication with the NE
-- Screen settings
S Because you can connect the Craft Terminal on either the F socket on the IDU, or through
! an Ethernet network, you must configure the Craft Terminal correctly, depending on the
connection you chose.
Refer to 1320 CT Basic Craft Terminal Operators Handbook, section Installation, chapter Craft Terminal
Configuration (document reference 3AL79551AAAA).
4.3.3 -- NE Login
In order to carry out procedures described in following paragraphs Craft Terminal configuration, NE Profile
management and NE software downloading preparation, the NE must be logged--in, as described below:
Craft Terminal (CT) start--up:
-- power on CT and wait for PC start--up
-- Start 1320CT--P v.x.x.x ; notes:
S if choice 1320CT--P v.x.x.x is not available, PC is not configured as Craft Terminal: Software
Package loading is necessary
S x.x.x depends on Software Package loaded
After a while, the Network Element Synthesis screen will appear, showing all Network Elements
that can be selected. After this Start operation, all NEs appear with symbol ? (it means they are
not supervised)

Figure 68 - Craft Terminal Global View Screen
Start supervision on a selected Network Element (NE):

From screen Network Element Synthesis (see CT start above):
-- select the interested Network Element (NE) clicking once left mouse button on it;
-- while NE selected, with right mouse button choose Start Supervision and with left mouse button execute
it (click once).
Wait until the symbol ? becomes colored (it means NE in supervised state)
Figure 69 - Start NE Supervision
Network Element login

From screen Network Element Synthesis with NE in supervised state ( see Start supervision on a selected
Network Element (NE), second step, above):
-- select the interested Network Element (NE) clicking once right mouse button on it;
-- select Show Equipment.

Figure 70 - NE login
The Login Screen then appears.
Figure 71 - Login Screen

Give your user name and password and click Apply (For more details on user profiles and passwords, see
Profiles Management, para. 4.8.6 on page 187.).

4.3.4 - NE software downloading preparation
This description is taken from the 1320CT Basic Operators Handbook, section EML construction, chapter
Administrating files, paragraph Software Administration and is repeated here for ease of operation.
This phase must be manually carried out by the Operator to make the new equipment software package
available for its downloading toward the equipment controller and the peripheral units.
This operation is independent from the NE management state and must be executed with the following
procedure:
-- From the Supervision pull down menu select the File Administration and then the Software
Administration option:
Figure 72 - Software Administration Selection

-- In the figure that opens (see next as an example) select the directory where the NE software package
is installed: Alcatel / JUSMxxx / ect / swdw / <equipment name> / <version> / <descriptor file>.
-- The NE software package can also be selected from the CD--ROM used for the installation of the NE
software. In this case, after inserting the CD--ROM in the driver, choose the following: ect / swdw /
<equipment name> / <version> / <descriptor file>.
Figure 73 - NE Software Selection

-- Click on Open to activate the installation file selected. At the end of the process, a confirmation
message is displayed.
-- At this point the NE Software Package is installed in another directory and available to be downloaded
on the Network Element.

4.4 -- Software download toward NE
This chapter details all phases necessary to install the SW in the equipment environment for the first time.
CAUTION:
! S Procedures described in the following are carried out with the PC connected to the NE
! This is a general procedure valid for all NE types.
4.4.1 -- Requirements
4.4.1.1 -- NE hardware
The equipment must have been already physically installed, cabled and powered on, according to the
instructions given in the:
4.4.1.2 -- Craft Terminal
The Craft Terminal, already loaded with the SW to be downloaded toward the NE, must be available together
with the 9 pin/9 pin cable and F connector adapter cable for its connection to the equipment F interface.
4.4.1.3 -- Operator skills and profile
In addition to skills stated in para.4.1.1, the Operator must be familiar with all the equipment functionalities.
4.4.2 -- Summary of the SW installation phases

The installation phases are:
-- SW download to the NE (PC is connected to Equipment Controller), para. 4.4.3 below
-- NE configuration, para. 4.5 below
4.4.3 -- SW download to the NE

-- With the suitable cable and F connector adapter cable, connect the PC to F interface of the MAIN unit
-- Activate ECT (1320CT x.x.x) and execute the Login to the NE (see para. 4.3.3 on page 141).
-- Perform the SW download with the following Craft Terminal commands:
S SW Download Server Access Configuration
S SW Download Init SW download (selecting the NE--version to be downloaded)
S then, after about 1/4 hours, SW Download SW status Apply Action to activate the
software.
The software download can be performed also by using the Ethernet interface of the PC. In this case the
download lasts only few minutes.

4.5 -- NE Configuration
Once the software is downloaded and activated on the NE, the NE resets in order to use the downloaded
software version. This reset breaks the connection with the CT. The operator must, therefore, log in to the NE
again (see para. 4.4.1 on page 123).
NE configuration in the case of first installation is processed through the quick configuration procedure. This
procedure is launched from the CT through the menu Configuration/Quick Configuration (see para. 4.16.5 on
page 168). Follow the instructions provided on the corresponding screen. At the end of this procedure, the NE
resets and should be up and running if properly configured.

4.6 -- General Introduction to views and menus
This chapter describes the organization of the 946LUX50 NE., presented after the NE login.
First the view organization is introduced, then the accessible menu options are listed.
Additional advice is given for Navigation principles.
4.6.1 -- 946LUX50 view organization
The 946LUX50 view below contains the following fields, which provide the operator with the information needed
to manage the NE:
-- Alarm synthesis by severity,
-- Alarm synthesis by domain,
-- Management status control panel,
-- View title,
-- View area,
-- Message/state area.
The Menu bar and the View area in the NE view allow you to perform all configuration and supervision operations
and display the selected item.
Alarm synthesis Alarm synthesis
by severity by domain
Menu
bar
Main
tool
bar
View
area
Management
state control panel
Figure 74 - LUX50 Main View Organization
For the meaning of the icons in the Alarm synthesis by severity, Alarm synthesis by domain, and the
Management state control panel refer to Section 3 in this handbook.

4.6.1.1 -- View Area
The View Area manages all domains from which the user can start. It is organized into a tabbed panel, e.g. many
windows placed one upon another. Each window is selectable (placing it on top of the others) with a tab shown
on the top.
Each panel represents a set of functions. The area consist of the following sets:
-- Equipment
-- External Points
-- Line Interface
-- Performance
-- Radio
-- Protection Schemes (1 + 1 configurations only)
-- Loopback
The following figure shows the tabbed panel organization.

Each tab panel is labeled with the set name ( e.g. Equipment, Line Interface, etc ).
RESOURCE RESOURCE
TREE AREA LIST AREA
RESOURCE DETAIL AREA
Figure 75 - View Areas
Each tab--panel (e.g. functionalities area) consists of four areas:

-- Resource--Tree Area: displays all the available resources of the Radio NE.
-- Resource--List Area: may be represented by: Tabular View (e.g., Line Interface Domain) or Graphical
View (e.g., Equipment Domain).

Tabular View: displays a tabular representation of the selected resource. As default, no tabular
element is shown.
Graphical View: displays a graphical representation of the selected resource. As default, no
tabular element is shown.
-- Resource--Detail Area: displays detailed information of a selected item in the Resource List area. As
a default, no entry view is displayed as a consequence of the default behavior of the Resource List area.
4.6.1.2 -- Resource Tree Area

The Resource Area displays all the available resources in a tree structure like the protocol stack hierarchy.
The below figure shows an example of the resource tree instance (for the Line Interface functions):
Figure 76 - Resource Tree Area
4.6.1.3 -- Selection Criteria

Each tree node consists of two symbols. The first symbol indicates the state of the structure e.g., if the symbol
is + the tree can be expanded to a lower level. The tree structure can be collapsed if the symbol is --. Finally,
if there is no symbol, the node represents a leaf. The second symbol is the graphical representation of the
resource.
The user must select the resource by clicking with the mouse to carry out an action that depends on the type
of click.
Each resource listed above may be selected by using the mouse with a:
-- Single left click;
-- or Double left click
Single left click:
Left click one on the resource to highlight it. This selection activates the resource list area, e.g.,
every time the user selects a resource in the resource tree area, the corresponding Tabular or
Graphical representation is displayed in the Resource list area .
Double left click:
Using this type of selection on the items of the resource tree, the user can expand the tree structure
and activate the Resource list area displaying the same information described above. When the
tree node is expanded a double click will collapsethe tree node showing the same information in the
Resource list area.
4.6.1.4 -- Resource Detail Area

This area displays the detailed information of the selected object in the Resource list area. It also provides the
types of operations available

4.6.1.5 -- Button Policy
The possible buttons for selection are the following:
-- Apply this button activates the changes, but does not close the window.
-- Cancel this button closes the window without modifying the parameters displayed in the
window.
-- OK this button activates the changes and closes the window
-- Close this button closes the window
-- Help this button provides help management for the functions of the supporting window.
Critical configuration choices could present a warning message asking for user confirmation before being
activated.
4.7 -- Introduction to the menu options

The menu bar lets you perform configuration and supervision functions on the Network Element.
This paragraph lists all menu options and then provides more details on the respective contained entries.
For each of them the relevant operative function are briefly introduced and it is referred the paragraphs where
they are detailed or the introduction to the options of each menu inserted in next paragraphs of this chapter.
From Chapter 4.8 on page 154 details and operating information on all views are given.
In the menu bar, a number of permanent menu items are always displayed. Starting from the left, the menus
are:
-- Permanent Menus
S Views: (first column)
To navigate among the views and to set the TMN parameters. See para. 4.7.1 on page 151.
S Configuration: (second column)
To set the general configuration of the NE and to show or modify some parameters (performance
monitoring, OverHead parameters). See para. 4.7.1.1 on page 152.
S Diagnosis: (third column)
To get information on the NE (alarms, performance monitoring, remote inventory). See
para. 4.7.1.2 on page 153.
S Supervision: (fourth column)
To set the supervision states (i.e. Craft Terminal enabling). See para. 4.7.1.3 on page 153.
S SW Download: (fifth column)
To manage the NE software (download, activation). See para. 4.7.1.4 on page 153.
S Help: (last column)
To activate the online help.
The menu bar also comprises other menus, presented only when a specific option is selected.
-- Other Menus
S Equipment
This menu is present only when the Equipment menu (selected in the View menu or in the
Equipment tab panel) is active. It lets you go back to the supporting equipment of the displayed
object.

4.7.1 -- Views menu introduction
The menu on the left side of the screen, lets you navigate among the views and to set some parameters, by
means of the following entries:
-- Previous:
Goes back to the previous screen of the application.
-- Open Object:
Not active.
-- Open in New Window:
Not active.
-- Duplicate View in New Window:
Not active.
-- Equipment:
Opens the Equipment view. Then the Equipment menu is available on the menu bar. See Chapter
4.9 on page 192.
-- External Points:
Displays and sets the input/output environmental alarm. See Chapter 4.12 on page 216.
-- Line Interface:
Opens the Line Interface view to configure all the tributary ports. See Chapter 4.10 on page 201.
-- Performance:
Lets you manage the Performance monitoring. See Chapter 4.17 on page 247.
-- Radio:
Lets you manage all the functions relevant to the radio channels. See Chapter 4.11 on page 205.
-- Protection Scheme:
Lets you manage the Protection schemes in 1+1 configuration. See Chapter 4.14 on page 221.
-- Loopback:
Lets you manage the loopbacks available with the equipment. See Chapter 4.15 on page 232.
It is possible to access directly the menus for Equipment, External Points, Line Interface, Performance, Radio,
Protection Scheme, Loopback by clicking on the relevant tab panel above the view area.

Tab panel
Figure 77 - Tab panel
4.7.1.1 -- Configuration menu introduction

This menu lets you set the general configuration of the NE and to show or modify some parameters, by means
of the following entries:
-- NE Time:
Displays and sets the NE local time. See para. 4.8.1 on page 154.
-- Network configuration:
See para. 4.8.2 on page 155.
-- Alarm Severities:
Manages the Alarm Severity Assignment Profile. See para. 4.8.3 on page 163.
-- System setting:
Allows system configuration, sets all the parameters for the NE setup. See para. 4.8.4 on page
168.
-- Quick configuration:
Allows a full system configuration through a guided procedure. See para. 4.8.5 on page 172.
-- Profiles management:
Manages the Security Profiles. See para. 4.8.6 on page 187.

4.7.1.2 -- Diagnosis menu introduction
This menu lets you get information on the NE, by means of the following entries:
-- Log Browsing:
Manages the events stored in the NE. (See para. 4.16.2 on page 240.) Opens the following menu
options:
Alarm log
Event log
-- Current configuration View:
Displays the current configuration of the NE. See para. 4.16.3 on page 241.
-- Summary Block Diagram View:
Displays a global logical view (strictly related to the physical implementation) highlighting a
synthesis of all the alarms and status conditions present in the system (ODU+IDU). See para.
4.16.5 on page 242.
-- Abnormal condition list:
Displays the manually operations active in the NE.
4.7.1.3 -- Supervision menu introduction

This menu lets you set the supervision states of the NE, by means of the following entries (see chapter 4.13
on page 218) :
-- Access State:
Manages the supervision access to the NE, via CT or OS. (See para. 4.13.1 on page 218.) Opens
the following menu options:
OS
Requested
-- Restart NE:
Reset of the NE software. See para. 4.13.2 on page 219.
-- Feature Key Limitations:
Displays the limitations provided by the software feature key plugged into the main IDU. See para.
4.13.3 on page 220.
4.7.1.4 -- Download menu introduction

This menu lets you manage the NE software by means of the following entries (see chapter 4.18 on page 255):
-- Server Access Configuration:
Manages the configuration of the FTP server to be used for the software download to the NE. See
para. 4.18.1 on page 255.
-- Initi SW download:
Manages the software download to the NE. See para. 4.18.2 on page 255.
-- SW status:
Shows and manages the status of the software packages installed in the NE memory banks. See
para. 4.18.3 on page 257.

4.8 -- CONFIGURATION
4.8.1 - NE Time
The NE local time can be displayed and/or reset to the OS time setting.
From the Configuration pull down menu, select the NE Time option.
The following dialog box opens, from which you can set the local NE time.
Figure 78 - NE Time Dialog Box
The NE Time dialog box displays the current NE time and the current OS time.
To reset the NE time to the OS time, click on the Set NE Time With OS Time check box and click the Apply
pushbutton to validate.
With a click on the Daylight Saving Time (DST) check box the manual management of the summer time takes
place.
The Refresh pushbutton lets you read the time actually present in the NE.

4.8.2 -- Network Configuration
To access the Network Configuration option, select the Configuration pull down menu, as shown in the
following figure:
Figure 79 - Network Configuration Menu
The Network Configuration lets you perform the following operations:

-- Local Configuration:
Defines the NE IP address
-- IP Configuration:
IP static routing configuration: defines the Host/Network destination address for IP static routing
OSPF Area configuration: defines the Open Shortest Path First configuration
IP Address configuration of Point--To--Point Interfaces: defines the configuration of the interfaces
which use the PPP protocol
-- Routing information:
Displays the contents of the NEs routing table.
The options are described in next paragraphs.

4.8.2.1 -- Local Configuration
Select the Configuration pull down menu.
Select the Network Configuration option and then, from the cascading menu, the Local Configuration
option.
The dialog box opens (figure below) which lets you to configure the local IP address of the NE.
This local IP address is the IP address associated witth the F interface and with the other interfaces which use
the PPP protocol (the 3 NMS channels).
The Apply button is used to confirm the data contained in the dialog box and closes it.
The Close button closes the dialog.
The Help button provides some useful information on the dialog.
Figure 80 - Local Configuration Dialog Box
4.8.2.2 -- IP Configuration
Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select Network Configuration and then select the IP
Configuration option from the cascading menu ( see following figure).
Figure 81 - IP Configuration Screen

4.8.2.3 -- IP static routing configuration
The dialog--box opens and lets you set the parameters for IP Static Routing Configuration.
The following fields and data are present:
S IP Address: lets you define the IP address necessary to reach a specific Host
S IP Mask: lets you define the IP Mask to reach a network
S Default Gateway IP Address: lets you define the address of the next hop gateway
S Interface type: lets you use point to point interfaces made available by the NE.
The New button is used to insert a new static route.

The Delete button is used to delete the selected static route.
The Close button closes the dialog.
Figure 82 - IP Static Routing Configuration Screen
By pressing the Create button the following screen opens.

In the Host or Network Address Choice field select:
-- Host to address to a single IP address;

-- Network to address to a range of IP addresses.
In the Default Gateway or Point to Point I/F Choice select:
-- Default Gateway IP Address for the Ethernet interface;
-- Point to Point Interface Index for the NMS channels (NMS--RF, NMS1--V11, NMS2--V11)
Figure 83 - Create Static Routing
If the Default Gateway IP Address radio button has been selected in the above screen, set the Default
Gateway IP Address in the corresponding field below.

If the Point To Point Interface Index radio button has been selected, the following dialog box opens.
Figure 84 - Create Static Routing: Point To Point Interface Choice
In this screen, one of the 3 NMS channels (NMS--RF, NMS1--V11, NMS2--V11) can be selected.

4.8.2.4 -- OSPF Area configuration
The dialog--box opens (figure below) and lets you configure the parameters for OSPF (Open Shortest Path First)
Area Table Configuration.
The following fields and data are present:

OSPF Area IP Address
OSPF Area Range Mask (Network Mask)
OSPF Area Stub Flag (used to restrict the NEs routing table to routes belonging to its own area)
The fields give summary information that includes all the addresses (specific to a NE and to a Network) in an
Area.
The Apply button is used to accept a configuration change on the NE and close the view; the view is visible
until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed.
The Close button closes the dialog without changing the data.
Figure 85 - OSPF Area configuration screen
In the screen, enter the IP address, the IP mask and select the flag (True/False).

4.8.2.5 -- IP Address Configuration of Point--To--Point Interfaces
The following dialog box opens and lets you Enable or Disable the three NMS channels, which use the PPP
protocol.
The Apply button is used to accept a configuration change in the dialog box and then closes it; the dialog is
visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed.
The Close button closes the dialog without changing the data.
Figure 86 - IP Address configuration of Point- To- Point Interfaces screen

The Mode parameter lets you configure the NMS V11 working mode (see page AUCUN LIEN ).
-- DTE
-- DCE
-- Codirectional

This parameter cannot be configured in the case of NMS RF and, therefore, is always set to Not Used in this
case.
Radio
MSU1
Routing Supervision
With
NMS1
NMS2
946LUX50
software
NMS1 NMS2
Figure 87 - Available NMS Interfaces

4.8.2.6 -- Routing information
Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select Network Configuration and then the Routing information
option from the cascading menu,.
The following dialog box opens:
Figure 88 - Routing information screen

This screen is a read--only screen and displays the IP routes currently defined in the NEs routing table.
The Refresh button lets you refresh some of the information shown in the screen. (IP Routing field is not
refreshed.)
The possible values for the IP Routing Local Point--to--Point Interface field are:
-- 1: NMS--RF interface
-- 2: NMS1--V11 interface
-- 3: NMS2--V11 interface
-- 4: F interface
-- 6: Loopback interface
The Close button closes the dialog without changing the window.

4.8.3 - Alarm Severities
By selecting the Alarm Severities option from the Configuration menu the Alarm Severities Profiles screen
appears.
In this screen in the Profile Name field are listed the 4 default Alarm Severity Profiles:
-- Profile No Alarms. With this profile all alarms are disabled.
-- Profile Primary Alarms. This profile enables the emission of the primary alarms. General rules used
to define the alarms severity:
MAJOR: the alarm affects the service (it is service affecting);
MINOR or WARNING (according to the impact of the alarm): the alarm doesnt affects the service
(with the exception of High BER alarm, for which MINOR alarm severity is defined, even if it is
service affecting).
-- Profile No Remote Alarms. This profile enables the emission of the primary alarms plus Early
Warning and Low BER alarms. This profile uses the following rules to define the alarms severity:
MAJOR: the alarm affects the service (it is service affecting);
MINOR: the alarm is potentially service affecting but a protection has recovered the service;
WARNING: the alarm cannot affect the service (independent from any protection).
-- Profile All Alarms. This profile enables the emission of all the alarms (including AIS and RDI). This
profile uses the same severity as the Primary alarm profile, the only difference is that Early Warning,
Low BER, AIS and RDI alarms are emitted.
The rules used to define the alarm severity are the same as for the Primary alarm profile.
In case of alarms affecting a protection, different severities are used for SA and NSA. The same severity is used
both for SA and NSA in case of service independent alarms.
The rules used to define the profile alarms severity described above, are not applied to the housekeeping
alarms. In this case, in order to enhance the flexibility, a different severity is assigned to each alarm profile (WAR,
MIN and MAJ).

Figure 89 - Alarm Severities Profile
Two buttons are available in the Alarm Severities Profile screen:
-- Close: to close the screen.
-- Clone: to create a new Alarm Severity Profile. To create a clone refer to para. 4.8.3.1 on page 165.
Only 3 new profiles can be created.
An Alarm Profile is the complete set of the equipment alarms with their severity in case of Service Affecting
situation and No Service Affecting situation.
Each alarm has its Service Affecting and No Service Affecting attribute, which can differ according to the Alarm
Severity Profile.
To some objects in the equipment (overhead alarm, input housekeeping alarm, tributaries etc.) can be assigned
an Alarm Profile.
To do this association:
-- select the tab panel (Equipment, Line Interface, etc.) in which the object to be associated to a specific
Alarm Severity Profile is present;
-- select the object;
-- select the Configuration menu in the relevant Resource Detail Area;
-- select in the Alarm Profile field the Alarm Profile to be associated.

4.8.3.1 -- How to create a new Alarm Severity Profile
-- Select the Alarm Profile to be cloned from the Alarm Severities Profile screen.
-- Click the Clone pushbutton.
-- The following Clone Alarm Severity Profile screen appears.
Figure 90 - Name of a cloned alarm profile
-- Enter the name to be assigned to the new Alarm Profile and click on Apply.
-- Select again the Alarm Severity option from the Configuration menu.
-- Select the newly created Alarm Profile (Link 1 in the following screen).

Figure 91 - Clone of an Alarm Severity Profile
-- 4 buttons are available in this screen :

Close: to close the screen without any change
Rename: to change the name of the Alarm Severity Profile
Modify: to modify the Alarm Severity Profile
Delete: to delete the Alarm Severity Profile.
-- Click on the Modify button.
-- To modify the severity of an alarm, click the Service Affecting field of the appropriate alarm and select
a new severity (following screen).

Figure 92 - Selection of a new severity in the Service Affecting field

-- To modify the severity of an alarm, click on the No Service Affecting field, then click on the suitable
alarm, and select a new severity as shown in the followiing screen:
Figure 93 - Selection of a new severity in the No Service Affecting field
-- To save the changes in the Alarm Severity Profile click on Apply. (By clicking on Cancel you quit the
Alarm Severity Profile screen without any change).
4.8.4 -- System Settings

This menu allows system configuration and lets you set all the parameters for the NE setup.
The main window provides 3 tabbed--panels, one for each type of function to be managed:
-- NE configuration
-- Link Identifier
-- Overhead (Not available with the IDU Light.)

4.8.4.1 -- NE Configuration
The user can view the NE configuration by selecting the NE Parameters tabbed panel.
The window displayed below will appear.
Figure 94 - System Settings: NE configuration
The Type field shows the current NE configuration.

The Structure area displays the market, capacity, modulation and, when possible, the ability to change it.
The Market field shows the market type, which in the case of 946LUX50 is ETSI.
The Capacity field shows the data capacity on the NE.
The information related to the modulation type is shown in the Modulation field. The possible values are
4QAM and 16QAM.
The capacity and the modulation can be modified by selecting a different type according to the Capacity and
Modulation table below and then selecting the Apply button to send the new value.
Capacity and Modulation
Capacity Modulation
2xE1 4QAM
4xE1 4QAM
8xE1 4QAM / 16QAM
16xE1 4QAM / 16QAM
1xE3 + 1E1 4QAM / 16QAM

4.8.4.2 -- Link Indentifier
The Link Identifier area, in the System Settings dialog, displays the current values of the parameters related
to link management.
The operator choices are sent to the NE by clicking on the related Apply button. The parameters involved are:
-- Expected Value: this field is the link identifier value expected by the NE (allowed values: 0 to 31).
-- Sent Value: this field is the link identifier value transmitted by the NE (allowed values: 0 to 31).
Figure 95 - System Settings: Link Identifier
The operator choice will be applied by selecting the related Apply button.

4.8.4.3 -- Overhead
The Overhead tabbed panel (screen below) identifies the parameters for the management of the phone
number.
Figure 96 - Overhead Configuration
The field Phone Number in the Order Wire Configuration area allows the operator to read and write the
station number associated to the Engineering Order Wire to be used in the selective call. Possible values are:
011--999 (with no more than one zero digit in the number).
The phone number can be enabled or disabled by selecting the corresponding buttons.
The parameter will be sent to NE by clicking on the related Apply button.

4.8.5 -- Quick Configuration Procedure
This procedure allows a full system configuration through a guided process, based on a reduced set of screens.
The related windows will be displayed by a Wizard Tool according to a specific order.
To start this application, select the Quick Configuration option from the Configuration menu. This window
that opens is the first step of the procedure.
The procedure consists of different steps according to the configuration:
-- 1+0 configurations:
6 steps for the simplified configuration
11 steps for the advanced configuration (the advanced configuration can be activated in step 5)
-- 1+1 configurations:
7 steps for the simplified configuration
12 steps for the advanced configuration (the advanced configuration can be activated in step 6)
The table below lists all the Quick Config steps involved depending on the NE configuration and the use of the
Advanced Configuration option:
1+0 1+1
Step 1+0 1+1
Adv. Config Adv. Config
NE configuration 1 1 1 1
Tributaries
2 2 2 2
configuration
Frame
3 3 3 3
configuration
Restoration criteria -- -- 4 4
Channels
4 4 5 5
configuration
Local IP address
5 5 6 6
configuration
OSPF area
-- 6 -- 7
configuration
IP static routes
-- 7 -- 8
configuration
NMS--RF interface
-- 8 -- 9
configuration
NMS1--V11
-- 9 -- 10
configuration
NMS2--V11
-- 10 -- 11
configuration
Summary 6 11 7 12
Note on the use of the buttons available in the screens:

-- Back: by clicking on this button the procedure goes back to the previous step
-- Next: by clicking on this button the procedure goes on the next step
-- Finish: this button is active only in the last step. By clicking on this button the operator confirms the
configuration and the new parameters are sent to the equipment.
-- Cancel: by clicking on this button the operator quits the procedure without any change in the
configuration.
-- Help: by clicking on this button the operator calls the help--on line.

Step 1
The following screens correspond to the most complete procedure for a 1+1 configuration with the Advanced
Configuration option which includes all the Quick Configuration steps.
Figure 97 - Quick Configuration Procedure: NE Configuration (Step 1)

The first step provides a screen allowing configuration of NE parameters:
Type configuration.
The possible values are:
1 + 0: unprotected configuration with a classic IDU
1 + 0 L: unprotected configuration with a light IDU
1 + 0 EXT: unprotected configuration with service channel extension
1 + 1 HSB: hot standby protected configuration
1 + 1 HSB--SD: hot standby protected configuration with space diversity
1 + 1 FD: frequency diversity protected configuration
1 + 1 HSB--MP: 1 + 1 HSB with multiplexer/demultiplexer protection
1 + 1 HSB--SD--MP: 1 + 1 HSB--SD with multiplexer/demultiplexer protection
1 + 1 FD--MP: 1 + 1 FD with multiplexer/demultiplexer protection
Market:
ETSI (read only)
IDU configuration:
Depending on the selected configuration type above, the main unit type an be set with one of
the following values:

IDU Light 4x2 Mbps (1 + 0L configuration only)
IDU Main 4x2 Mbps
IDU Main 8x2 Mbps
IDU Main 16x2 Mbps
IDU Main 34 Mbps
The Extension unit is automatically updated depending on the selected configuration Type and
Main Unit Type.
If an Extension unit is present, Extension Service Channels 3 and 4 can be configured with the
following values. These values must comply with physically connected ESC3 and ESC4 daughter
boards inside the extension unit:
ESC 64 kbps G703
ESC 4--wire Audio and E--Q
ESC 64 kbps V11
ESC 64 kbps V28
ESC 9600 or 2x4800 bps V11
ESC 9600 or 2x4800 bps V28
ODU configuration contains the following fields:
Model: ODU Model connected to the equipment. Relevant values for 9400 UX are:
ODU UX 13 GHz 4QAM with RTPC
ODU UX 13 GHz 4QAM, no RTPC
ODU UX 13 GHz 16QAM
ODU UX 15 GHz Standard Power
ODU UX 15 GHz High Power
ODU UX 15 GHz 4QAM with RTPC
ODU UX 18 GHz Standard Power
ODU UX 18 GHz High Power
ODU UX 23 GHz 4QAM
ODU UX 23 GHz 16QAM
ODU UX 25 GHz 4QAM
ODU UX 25 GHz 16QAM
ODU UX 38 GHz 4QAM
ODU UX 38 GHz 16QAM
ODU UX Flat
Duplexer: Depending on the selected ODU Type, the list of duplexers available with this
type of ODU is displayed. For example, when ODU UX 38 GHz 4QAM is selected, the duplexer list
is the following:

Dupl. 1260 MHz LO Inf. (for 1 or 2 Tx Band)
Dupl. 1260 MHz LO Sup. (for 1P or 2P Tx Band)
Other Duplexer
For additional information on LO Inf. and LO Sup. see section 2.9 beginning on page 59.
The special choice Other Duplexer allows you to configure Rx Frequency independently of
the Tx Frequency. In all other cases, only Tx Frequency can be confiigured, Rx Frequency being
deduced from Tx Frequency and duplexer shift.
RF Loopback Support: with some ODU models RF loopback unit is optional. In this case, this
field allows you to indicate if RF loopback is preset or not. In case of ODUs for which RF loopback
unit is not, this field is automatically set to the appropriate value.
WARNING: In the case of a 1 + 1 configuration, only one kind of ODU can be configured for
! both channels.

Step 2
The screen shown below provides the fields to set the Structure of the Frame configuration (Capacity and
Modulation).
The capacity implies the choice of modulation; for example, if the tributary structure is 2E1 only 4QAM
modulation scheme is supported.
The association between Capacity and Modulation is shown on page 169.
Figure 98 - Quick Configuration Procedure: Frame Configuration (Step 2)
In the screen displayed above (and in the following Steps), the Back button is enabled also. It allows the
operator to turn back and change the parameters configured in the previous screen.
To go to the next step click on button Next.
To go back to the previous step click on button Back.

Step 3
Step 3 allows the operator to choose, for each tributary configured, the signal mode status. Possible values
are Unframed and Disabled.
Figure 99 - Quick Configuration Procedure: Tributaries Configuration (Step 3)
By clicking on one of the facility buttons (All Unframed or All Disabled), the operator can configure all the
tributaries at once; otherwise he can configure each tributary separately by selecting the related value from the
relevant scroll list.

Step 4 (1 + 1 Configurations Only)
Figure 100 - Quick Configuration Procedure: Restoration Criteria (Step 4)
Step 4 shows the operator the restoration criteria (revertive or not revertive) for the 3 possible protections
available in the 1+1 configurations:
-- Radio protection
-- Mux/Demux protection
-- HSB Tx protection
The restoration criteria values depend upon the selected configuration type in step 1 (1 + 1 HSB, 1 + 1 FD--MP,
etc.). These values cannot be modified by the operator.
For radio protection restoration criteria values, see 4.14.2.

Step 5
Step 5 allows the operator to define the basic parameters for each configured channel. The related screen is
shown below:
Figure 101 - Quick Configuration Procedure: Channels Configuration (Step 5)
The Channel Configuration screen allows you to configure the Tx power and Frequencies of the ODU(s).
Depending on the choices made in Step 1 (configuration type, duplexer type), some values could be read only.
-- If the configuration type is 1 + 0, only one channel needs to be configured. In 1 + 1 configurations both
channels (1 and 0) need to be configured.
-- If the configuration type is 1 + 1 HSB, Tx frequency for channel 0 is automatically set according to Tx
frequency for channel 1, while Tx Power can be set independently on both channels.
-- If the configuration type is 1 + 1 FD, Tx Frequency has to be configured on both channels, while Tx
Power on channel 0 is synchronized with Tx Power on channel 1.
-- If the configured duplexer type is Other Duplexer, the Rx frequency value can be configured
independently of the Tx Frequency. In all other cases, the Rx Frequency value is deduced automatically
from the Tx Frequency and duplexer shift.
-- If the configured IDU Main Unit is not IDU Light 4x2 Mbps, and if the configured ODU is ODU UX Flat,
the ATPC mode can be enabled or disabled (otherwise ATPC is forced to disabled, due to the fact that
it is not supported).


Step 6
Step 6 performs the network configuration. This window allows the operator to configure the NE IP address.
Figure 102 - Quick Configuration Procedure: Local IP Address (Step 6)
For an advanced network configuration the operator must select the Advanced Configuration flag.
If the flag has been selected, the screens in the next steps allow the operator to perform a complete configuration
of all the Network parameters.

Step 7 (Advanced Configuration Only)
Step 7 allows you to configure the OSPF Area.
Figure 103 - Quick Configuration Procedure: OSPF Area Configuration (Step 7)
If the OSPF area must be a stub area, make the selection in the Stub Area check box.
LUX50 supports one single OSPF area. This area cannot be a backbone area (e.g., area 0.0.0.0 is not
authorized).
Enter the OSPF area number in the IP address field.
Enter the OSPF range mask in the Range Mask field.
IMPORTANT: All NEs belonging to the same OSPF area must have the exact same range mask value.

The following windows for Network Configuration allow complete IP configuration.
Step 8 lets you configure static routes.
Figure 104 - Quick Configuration Procedure: IP Static Routes Configuration (Step 8)
LUX50 NEs can have up to 10 static IP routes defined.

Each static route can be either a route to a host or a route to a gateway.
S If Host Address is selected, the following parameters have to be configured:
Host IP address
IP Mask (if Network address is slected).
S If Gateway Address is selected, the following parameters have to be configured:
Default gateway IP address
S If PPP Id is selected, the PPP interface used for this route has to be defined among the NEs three
PPP interfaces (NMS RF, NMS V11#1, NMS V11#2).

Step 9 allows the configuration of the NMS--RF channel:
Figure 105 - Quick Configuration Procedure: NMS- RF Interface Configuration (Step 9)
The NMS--RF interface is a communication interface based on the use of an inframe RF proprietary 64 kbit/s
channel. Through the NMS--RF interface the NE can exchange management messages with a remote OS (or
Craft Terminal) station.
The NMS--RF channel can be Enabled or Disabled by selection in the NMS RF field.
In the Routing IP Protocol field, indicate whether or not OSPF is used.

Step 10 allows the configuration of the NMS1- V11 interface:
Figure 106 - Quick Configuration Procedure: NMS1- V11 Interface Configuration (Step 10)
Through the NMS1--V11 interface the NE can exchange management messages with an OS (or Craft
Terminal) in the same station.
The NMS1--V11 channel can be Enabled or Disabled by selection in the NMS1 V11 field.
In the Routing IP Protocol field indicate whether or not OSPF is used.
In the PPP_MODE field the following selections can be made:
DTE Mode:
Interface with equipment configured in DCE mode
DCE Mode:
Interface with equipment configured in DTE mode
Codirectional Mode:
Interface with equipment configured in codirectional mode

Step 11 allows the configuration of the NMS2- V11 interface.
Figure 107 - Quick Configuration Procedure: NMS2- V11 Interface Configuration (Step 11)
Using the NMS2--V11 interface, the NE can exchange management messages with an OS (or Craft Terminal)
in the same station.
The NMS2--V11 channel can be Enabled or Disabled by selection in the NMS2 V11 field.
In the Routing IP Protocol field, indicate whether or not OSPF is used.
In the PPP_MODE field the following selections can be made:
DTE Mode:
Interface with equipment configured in DCE mode
DCE Mode:
Interface with equipment configured in DTE mode
Codirectional Mode:
Interface with equipment configured in codirectional mode

Step 12
Step 12 is the last step. The screen shown below summarizes all the parameters configured during this
procedure and some relevant parameters with default values.
Figure 108 - Quick Configuration Procedure: Summary (Step 12)
All the parameters can still be changed by clicking on the Back button. The operator can navigate back to
the desired screen and set the new values.
At the end, the operator confirms the selections by pressing the Finish button. All the parameters will be
stored and sent to the NE.
NOTE: This operation can take a few minutes.
NOTE: In most cases, the NE will reset at the end of the process so that the new configuration parameters can
be taken into account.

4.8.6 - Profiles Management
To access the Profiles Management option, select the Configuration pull down menu, as shown in the
following figure:
Figure 109 - Profiles Management Menu

The Profiles Management lets you perform the following operations:
S Users Management :
Displays the list of the created users
Enables the creation, the password modification and the deletion of users
S Change Password :
Enables the password modification of the current user
The options are described in the next paragraphs.
4.8.6.1 -- Users Management
Select the Configuration pull down menu.
Select the Profiles Management option and then, from the cascading menu, the Users Management option.
This option is only available for users associated to an administrator profile.
The dialog box opens (figure below). It displays the list of the created users and lets you to create new users,
change users passwords and delete users. Each user is associated to a pre--defined security profile. There can
be more than one user using each profile. The initial user is created by default and it cannot be deleted.
Figure 110 - Profiles Management Screen

The predefined security profiles are:
-- Administrator
S can do everything on the NE.
S can manage security features (add/remove users or change own password and all users
passwords).
-- Operator
S is in charge of the operation at network level, not at radio site.
S cannot add or remove users.
S can change only own user password.
S cannot manage network configuration, only for NTP Configuration, due to dangerous isolation of
NE.
S cannot do quick configuration, restart NE. Also the provisioning of equipment is not supported and
the operations that require the operator presence on the radio site.
-- CraftPerson
S is in charge of the installation and the maintenance at radio site.
S can do everything on NE system, but cannot add or remove users.
S can change only own user password.
-- Viewer
S can only explore the NE: he cannot change the NE configuration.
S cannot add or remove users.
S can change own user password.
All user--predefined profiles can be connected to NE by an F interface (local serial interface) or by a remote
interface.
Five buttons are available in the Profiles Management Screen:
-- Create: to create a new user. Refer to para. 4.8.6.1.1 on page 188.
-- Change PW: to change a user password. Refer to para. 4.8.6.1.2 on page 189.
-- Delete: to delete an existing user. Refer to para. 4.8.6.1.3 on page 190.
-- Cancel: to close the screen.
-- Help: this button provides help management for these functions.

4.8.6.1.1 -- How to create a new user
-- Click the Create pushbutton from the Profiles Management Screen.
-- The following Create User screen appears.
Figure 111 - Create User Screen

-- Enter the current administrator user password.
-- Enter the name to be assigned to the new user.
-- Select the profile to be associated to the new user from the cascading menu (following screen).
Figure 112 - Selection of a profile for user creation

-- Enter twice the password of the new user.
-- Click on the Apply button.

4.8.6.1.2 -- How to change a user password
-- Select the user to be changed from the Profiles Management Screen.
-- Click the Change PW pushbutton.
-- The following Change Password screen appears.
Figure 113 - Change Password Screen

-- Enter twice the new password of the user.
4.8.6.1.3 -- How to delete a user

-- Select the user to be deleted from the Profiles Management Screen.
-- Click the Delete pushbutton.
-- From the confirmation dialog box that opens, you can confirm or cancel the user deletion operation.
-- The following Delete User screen then appears.
Figure 114 - Delete User Screen

Note that the initial user is a default user that cannot be deleted.

4.8.6.2 -- Change own password
This option is available for all users. It allows to change only a users own password, whereas the password
change described in para. 4.8.6.1.2 How to change a user password page 190 allows an administrator user
to change the password of all the created users.
-- Select the Configuration pull down menu.
-- Select the Profiles Management option and then, from the cascading menu, the Change Password
option.
-- The following Changing Password screen appears.
Figure 115 - Changing Password Screen

-- Enter the previous user password.
-- Enter twice the new password of the user.

4.9 -- EQUIPMENT
This chapter describes the types of functions offered to the user for Equipment Management.
The equipment domain deals with the management of the NE as a whole and its physical components (subrack,
boards,...)
The main screen of the Equipment tab panel is shown below for a 1+0 Radio configuration:
Equipment Status
ODU
ODU Status
IDU
IDU Status
Figure 116 - 1+0 Radio Equipment view

The main screen of the Equipment tab panel is shown below for the 1+1 HSB--MP.
Equipment Status
ODU
ODU Status
IDU
IDU Status
Figure 117 - 1+1 HSB- MP view
The Resource List Area shows a graphical representation of the Equipment, which consists of an IDU and one
or two ODUs.
A colored ball gives information on the status of the associated object. The color differs according to the severity
of the alarms currently active on ths object:
-- Green: no alarm
-- White: indetermination alarm active (not operative)
-- Cyanic: warning alarm active
-- Yellow: minor alarm active
-- Brown: major alarm active
-- Red: critical alarm active

4.9.1 -- IDU level
To enter the IDU level click on the IDU object in the Resource Tree Area or double click on the IDU image in
the Resource Detail Area.
1+0 configuration
The following screen will appear.
IDU Status
MAIN IDU BOARD
IDU
MAIN IDU BOARD Status
Figure 118 - 1+0 IDU view

The IDU consists of 1 board, the IDU Main board.
1+1 configuration
The following screen will appear.
IDU IDU Status

MAIN IDU BOARD
Status
EXTENSION IDU
MAIN IDU BOARD BOARD Status
EXTENSION IDU BOARD
Figure 119 - 1+1 IDU view
The IDU consists of 2 boards:

-- Main board
-- Extension board

4.9.1.1 -- Board level
To enter a board click on the object in the Resource Tree Area or double click on the board image in the Resource
Detail Area.
For example, following screen shows the MAIN IDU board:
BOARD Status
Figure 120 - Main IDU board view

4.9.1.2 -- ODU level
To enter the ODU level click on the ODU object in the Resource Tree Area or double click on the ODU image
in the Resource Detail Area.
The following screen will appear in case of a UX ODU.
Figure 121 - UX ODU view

The following screen will appear in case of UX--Flat ODU:
Figure 122 - UX- Flat ODU view

4.9.1.3 -- Alarms
The Alarms tab panel provides the fault mangement, which checks the current state of alarms related to the
selected object: (See Appendix 7, page 357.)
Figure 123 - Alarm tab panel for a selected object
The alarm tab panel has one row for each possible alarm, but only rows related to the active alarms are
highlighted. When the alarm disappears it is automatically cleared in the screen.
By putting a tick in the Include alarms from sub--nodes box the alarms currently active in the sub--nodes of
the object will also appear.
For every alarm the following information is given:
-- Severity: the severity associated to the alarm and assigned in the Alarm Profile
-- Event Time: the time of the generation of the alarm
-- Entity: the entity involved in the alarm
-- Probable Cause: the probable cause of the alarm
-- Managed Object Class: the class of the alarm.

4.9.1.4 -- Configuration
The User Label field displays the label associated to the selected node in the tree.
The field Alarm Profile allows to associate to the object alarms a particular Alarm Profile: a default alarm profile
or an Alarm Profile previously created by the Operator (refer to para. 4.8.3.1 on page 165). To associate a
different Alarm Profile click on the selection button and make the selection among the available Alarm Profile.
The default associated Alarm Profile is the Primary Alarm profile.
Figure 124 - Configuration tab panel for a selected object
4.9.1.5 -- Remote Inventory

The information about the unit can be read in the Remote Inventory (when available) panel in the Resource
Detail Area as the following window shows:
Figure 125 - Remote Inventory tab panel for a selected object

4.10 -- LINE INTERFACE
This chapter describes the type of functions available for Line Interface Management.
4.10.1 -- Tributaries
The Line Interface domain deals with the management of the aggregate frame and tributary ports (line side).
The Line Interface view allows the user to manage the resources of a PDH signal, i.e., frames, tributary ports
(line), etc.
-- This domain view consists of the following areas:
Resource Tree Area: displays the frames and tributary ports sorted by the channel number.
Resource List Area: displays tabular information about the selected resource in the tree area.
Resource Detail Area: displays, through tabbed windows, the selected objects properties in the
list area. This area allows you to execute the available commands for the selected resource.
Figure 126 - Line Interface View

The Resource List Area provides information about the tributaries.
-- Interface Type (E1,E3 etc.)
-- Port Number: the port for a given channel and type of port
-- Channel Number: the channel identifier
-- Rate/Modulation: the bit rate of the tributary
-- Signal Mode: the type of frame (Unframed/Disabled)
To change the Signal Mode, select the tributary and change the Signal Mode field in the Resource Detail Area.

4.10.1.1 -- Alarm
The fault management checks the current state of alarms related to the selected tributary.
It is provided by the alarm panel like the one explained in para. 4.9.1.5.
The window shown below gives you access to all available functions for a tributary port.
The managed tributary types are E1 and E3.
To define the involved ports, the channel must be selected in the tree view. Consequently, the selection of the
desired tributary port in the tabular view allows the Resource Detail List to show the available functions for the
individual resource.
Figure 127 - Tributary Configuration Panel
The information related to a PDH frame is shown above, where the fields are read only:
-- Interface Type (E1,E3 etc.)
-- Port Number: the port for a given channel and type of port
-- Channel Number: the channel identifier
The fields which can be changed are:

-- Signal Mode
-- Alarm Profile
Signal Mode
The possible values are:
-- Unframed
-- Disabled
The current state can be modified by selecting a different signal mode value and then clicking on the Apply
button to send the new value to the NE.
Alarm Profile
The Alarm Profile field lets you associate a particular Alarm Profile with the tributary alarms: a default alarm
profile or an Alarm Profile previously created by the operator (refer to para. 4.8.3.1). To associate a different
Alarm Profile, click on the selection button and select from among the available profiles.
The default associated Alarm Profile is the No Alarm profile.

4.10.1.3 -- Test
The Test tab allows you to perform certain tests on the selected tributary by inserting a pseudo random binary
sequence (PRBS) into this tributary at the transmission side and by measuring the Bit Error Rate on its reception
side.
Figure 128 - Tributary Test Panel
PRBS insertion and corresponding BER measure can be started/stopped using the Start/Stop button.
The inserted PRBS sequence is (215 -- 1) inverted.
When PRBS insertion is activated, an abnormal condition is raised on the tributary in order to remind the
operator that the NE is currently not working in normal condition. This abnormal condition disappears when the
PRBS insertion is stopped.
The measures reported on BER measure are the Current BER measure value on the selected tributary, along
with Min and Max BER measure values received since the beginning of the measurement.
NOTE 1: PRBS can only be inserted on one tributary at a time. Therefore, make sure that PRBS is not currently
inserted on another tributary (this can be done easily by checking abnormal condition list) before trying to insert
it on a new tributary.
NOTE 2: Using the Start/Stop button for PRBS insertion and BER measure starts or stops both together,
however, these two features can be used independently of each other.

4.10.2 -- NMS Interfaces
Line Interface view also allows management of alarms related to the 3 NMS interfaces:
Figure 129 - NMS Interface Alarms
Using the Alarms tab, the operator can check if an alarm is present on the selected NMS interface. The
operator can also change the alarm profile for each of the NMS interfaces through the Configuration tab

4.11 -- RADIO
The Radio domain view allows the user to manage the resources of the radio transmission channel.
A Radio NE consists of one or two radio channels with a set of functional blocks (tributary ports, radio ports etc).
This domain view consists of the following areas:
-- Resource Tree Area: displays the radio ports sorted by channel number.
-- Resource List Area: displays tabular information about the selected resource in tree area.
-- Resource Detail Area: displays, through tabbed windows, the object s properties selected in the list
area. This area allows you to execute the available commands for the selected resource.
Figure 130 - Radio Domain View
Six tab panels are present in the Resource Detail Area:

-- Alarms: shows the active alarms (refer to para. 4.11.1 on page 206)
-- Configuration: configures some radio parameters (refer to para. 4.11.2 on page 206)
-- Frequency: sets the Tx/Rx RF frequency (refer to para. 4.11.3 on page 207)
-- RTPC & ATPC: sets the Tx Power (refer to para. 4.11.4 on page 208)
-- Power Meas: performs the Tx and Rx power measurements (refer to para. 4.11.5 on page 210).
-- BER Meas: refers to BER measurement (refer to para. 4.11.6 on page 215)

4.11.1 -- Alarm
The fault management allows you to check the current state of the alarms related to the selected object.
It is provided by the alarm panel like that shown in para. 4.9.1.3 on page 199.
4.11.2 - Configuration
The Radio Frequency window gives you access to all the available functions for a Radio PDH port.
To define the involved port, first select the port/channel in the tabular view: this selection enables the Resource
Detail list to show the available functions for the single resource.
4.11.2.1 -- Tx Local Mute
The information related to the transmitter status is shown in the Status field. To change the transmitter status
choose the desired value (ON for Tx Squelched and OFF for Tx not Squelched) and press the related Apply
button.
When Tx Local Mute is activated, an abnormal condition is raised on the channel in order to remind the operator
that the NE is currently not working in normal condition. This abnormal condition disappears when the Tx Local
Mute is stopped.
4.11.2.2 -- Alarm Profile

The field Alarm Profile allows to associate a particular Alarm Profile to the object alarms: a default alarm profile
or an Alarm Profile previously created by the Operator (refer to para. 4.8.3.1 on page 165). To associate a
different Alarm Profile click on the selection button and select among the available Alarm Profile.
The default associated Alarm Profile is the Primary Alarm profile.

4.11.3 -- Frequency
This menu lets you read and, if necessary, set the frequency parameters.
The information shown concerns the port/channel selected in the Resource Tabular View.
Figure 131 - Radio Frequency menu
4.11.3.1 -- Tx Radio Frequency
The Tx Freq field in the Frequency Value area of the tabbed window shows the current value of the
transmission radio frequency (expressed in kHz). To change this parameter write the new value in the field and
press the Apply button.
The new value must be within the allowed radio frequency range. The allowed range is shown in Min/Max
Value fields. See section 2.9 on page 59 for available frequencies.
4.11.3.2 -- Rx Radio Frequency

The Rx Freq field in the Frequency Value area of the tabbed window shows the current value of the receive
radio frequency (expressed in kHz).
In most cases it is automatically changed as a consequence of the definition of the Tx frequency according to
the Frequency Shifter.
If the configured duplexer is Other Duplexer, Rx frequency can be configured independently from the Tx
frequency.

4.11.4 - RTPC & ATPC
The RTPC & ATPC menu lets you read and, if necessary, set the Tx power parameters.
The shown information is related to the channel selected in the Resource Tabular View.
To work properly, the ATPC must be put in operation in the local and remote stations.
When ATPC is disabled, the active part of the screen is the RTPC area. Refer to paragraph
4.11.4.2.
When ATPC is enabled (if IDU and ODU alow it), the active part of the screen is the ATPC
! area. Refer to paragraph 4.11.4.1.
In ATPC mode, when the modulation is changed from 4QAM to 16QAM, the ATPC mode is
automatically de--activated. It is necessary to reactivate the ATPC mode in operational
configuration after the change of modulation.
4.11.4.1 -- ATPC
Figure 132 - ATPC configuration
The purpose of ATPC functionality is to control the power transmitted by the local station in order to maintain
the received power level of the remote station in a given range.
Depending on the configured IDU and ODU (ATPC is supported with IDU main classic type 2 and ODU UX--Flat
only), ATPC can be Enabled or Disabled for 34 Mbit/s IDU, this feature is only available for IDU produced
after January 2004 (see label underneath the IDU). The feature is not available with the light IDU.
When ATPC is enabled, the ATPC Max Value parameter in ATPC Range area, and the Low Power
parameter in ATPC Rx Threshold area need to be configured in order for ATPC regulation loop to work
properly.

-- ATPC Max Value parameter allows to define the maximum Tx power level at which the NE is
authorized to transmit. The ATPC min value is read--only is defined by the ODU performance (ATPC
range, cf. 2.8). Practically, the minimum Tx power can also be limited by the link characteristic
(free space attenuation too important).
-- ATPC Rx Threshold parameter defines the Rx power level below which the ATPC regulation loop
will start increasing the transmission power level in order to compensate for the low Rx power level.
On the other hand, the ATPC regulation loop will start decreasing the transmission power level when
the measured Rx power level goes above (ATPC Rx Threshold).
Note: The ATPC Rx Threshold must be choosen considering the link budget. For example, if the
threshold is too high, the remote transmitter will permanently remain at maximum power. As a rule of
thumb, it is recommended to choose a value within - 55 dBm and 10 dB above the 10- 6 BER threshold.
4.11.4.2 -- RTPC
Figure 133 - RTPC configuration

The Nominal Power field in the RTPC area is a read--only field and shows the nominal value of the
transmitted power (expressed in dBm).
The Tx Power field in the RTPC area shows the current value of Tx power (expressed in dBm), when the
ODU supports RTPC and ATPC is disabled, it is possible to modify this value by entering the new value and
by pressing the related Apply button.
The new value must be within the allowed transmitted power range. This range is shown in the Power Value
label of RTPC area.

4.11.5 -- Power Measurement
The Power Measurements capability is available by selecting the Power Meas tab shown circled in the
resource detail view below:
Figure 134 - Power Measurements

The Measurement screen allows the operator to set initial parameters for the required measurement.
Measurement interval fields allow the operator to set the time--duration of the measurement. The default
is Days: 7, Hours: 0, Minutes: 0. A 7--day measurement interval is also the maximum allowed interval.
Sample time field is the period between two consecutive measurement samples. The choice is among 2, 4,
6, 30, 60 sec.
The last section of the dialog refers to an optional Log file.

By selecting Create File the log file is created and a default path and name for this file is displayed to the
operator. The file is stored in the ALCATEL/CT--Kv3.0.3 directory.
The log file contains the sample value and records the measurement up to a maximum dimension ( 7 days for
a 2 second sample time).
By clicking on the Start button the screen Power Measurement Graphic appears.
The Power Measurement Graphic is available only if the CT is connected to the NE.
The screen shows the Tx and Rx measurements related to the local NE:
Figure 135 - Power Measurement Graphic
Using this screen the operator can see, in real time, the power transmitted by the local transmitter (Tx) and the
power received by the local receiver (Rx).
If ATPC mode is enabled, the Tx Power displayed in Power Measurement Graphic does not reflect the actual
Tx Power value but the ATPC Max value.
If ATPC mode is disabled, the Tx Power displayed in Power Measurement Graphic is the RTPC power
transmitted by the local transmitter.
The top graphic screen area shows the TX curve, while the bottom area shows the Rx curve.
The top of the screen offers all the characteristics present in the current measurement:
-- Radio channel: gives the symbolic name associated to the radio channel being analyzed;
-- Sample time: indicates the frequency used to send the measurement requests to NE;
-- Start time: is the first request time;
-- Stop time: is the interval time selected in the previous parameters window, added to the start time;
-- Time: is the current response time;
-- Log File: is the complete pathname of the file where the received values are stored.

By clicking on Show details box, on the left side of the Power Measurement Graphic, a new table appears:
Figure 136 - Power Measurement Details
This table shows the following relevant values of the received and transmitted power:
-- Tx Local End
S Max TX local value and date when this value was received for the first time.
S Current TX local value and its current date.
S Min. TX local value and its current date when this value was received for the first time.
-- Rx Local End
S Max Rx local value and date when this value was received for the first time.
S Current Rx local value and its current date.
S Min. Rx local value and its current date when this value was received for the first time.
PTx and PRx levels software reading tolerance is:

-- PTx = Real Value 3dB
-- PRx = Real Value 5dB

4.11.5.1 -- How to read a Power Measurement file
Click on Read File field and press on the Select File button. The directory of the CT automatically opens to
navigate and get the power measurement file.
As default, the measurement files are stored in the ALCATEL/CT--Kv3.0.3 directory and have the extension
.txt.
Figure 137 - Name of File ( Log File ) selected screen
Select the desired file and click the Open button to open the file.
Figure 138 - Example of Power Measurement File Reading

The button in the lower part of the window lets the graph display changes within the measurement interval.
Select the .txt file and click with the right mouse button to open the .txt file with a text editor (e.g. WordPad) and
see the power information in tabular mode:
Figure 139 - Example of Power Measurement File Reading (with WordPad)

4.11.6 -- BER Measures
The BER Meas tab lets you perform Bit Error Rate measures on each radio channel.
Figure 140 - BER Measures
The BER Measures screen allows the operator to set initial parameters for the required measure.
Sample Time field defines the period between two consecutive measure samples.
Clicking on Start button triggers the measurements.
Displayed values are the Current BER measure value, along with Min and Max BER measure values,
corresponding to minimum and maximum BER values encountered since the beginning of the measure.
Measures will go on until the operator clicks the Stop button.

4.12 -- EXTERNAL POINTS
This chapter describes the types of functions offered to the user for External Points Management.
There are two types of external points: input and output external points.
When you click on the tree root, the tree will be expanded according to the equipment configuration.
A single left click selection of a tree element causes the activation of the corresponding Tabular representation
displayed in the Resource list area. A click on a row in the Resoure list area opens the Configuration menu
in the Resource Detail Area.
4.12.1 -- Input External Points

An input external point is described by the following parameters:
-- Id: identification number
-- User Label: associates a user--friendly name to an external point
-- External State: describes the state (on/off)
-- Alarm Profile: describes the associated Alarm Profile
The lower part provides the possible parameters, which can be modified; after a row selection, the user can
modify the User Label and can associate a different Alarm Profile by clicking on the Selection button.
The operator choices will be sent to NE after selecting the Apply button.
Figure 141 - Input External Points View

4.12.2 - Output External Point
An output external point is described by the following parameters:
-- Id: identification number
-- User Label: associate a user--friendly name to an external point
-- External State: describes the state (on/off)
The lower part provides the possible parameters which can be modified; after a row selection, the user can
modify the User Label and External State of the external point selected (On=active; Off=not active).
The operator choices will be sent to NE by clicking on the Apply button.
Figure 142 - Output External Point View

4.13 -- SUPERVISION
4.13.1 -- Access state (allow or inhibit NE Craft access)
The NE can be managed by the OS or by the Craft Terminal. To control the access conflicts of the OS and the
CT, a Local Access Control (LAC) is available.
If the LAC is access denied, it means that the OS manages the NE and the CT is not allowed to modify the
NE configuration (it can only read). In the view, the icon with a key symbol has a circular shape.
If the LAC is granted, it means that the CT is allowed to manage the NE. In the view, the icon with a key symbol
has a rectangular shape.
If the LAC is requested, it means that the CT has requested a permission from the OS and is waiting for a reply.
However, the OS does continue to provide a certain number of services. These services include:
-- Alarm reception and processing,
-- Performance processing,
-- Switching back to the OS access state.
The access state of an NE can be modified from two types of views:
4.13.1.1 -- Switching from the OS to the Craft Terminal access state

Select the Supervision pull down menu. Then select the Requested option from the Access State cascading
menu as shown in the following figure:
Figure 143 - Craft access state configuration from the Equipment NE view in OS mode
The request is sent up to the OS which accepts or refuses it.

If the OS doesnt answer in a predefined time, it is assumed that the NE is in the Craft access state and can be
managed by a Craft Terminal.

4.13.1.2 -- Switching from the Craft Terminal access state back to the OS access state
Select the Supervision pull down menu. Then from the Access State cascading menu, select the OS option.
From the confirmation dialog box that opens, you can confirm or cancel the OS access operation.
The NE is now managed by the OS.
The key symbol icon on the management states of the NE view indicates whether the NE is managed by a craft
terminal or by the OS.
Local Craft Terminal access is denied on recovery phase after a loss of communication of the NE. When the
communication with the NE is lost, the OS automatically recovers the communication and forces the state
existing before the loss of communication (therefore, Craft Terminal access can be denied or granted).
4.13.2 - Restart NE
The RESTART operation is a software reset and can be executed in normal traffic conditions.
From the Supervision cascading menu, select the Restart NE option.
Figure 144 - Restart NE call

The following dialog box opens.
Figure 145 - Restart NE confirmation

Click the Yes button to confirm the restart NE operation
Click the No button to abort the restart NE operation.

4.13.3 -- Software Feature key
From the Supervision cascading menu, select the Feature key option.
In this screen the information read from the feature key plugged into the main IDU are shown.
Figure 146 - Feature Key Screen

Note: Running an equipment without the feature key plugged in is not permitted, and trying to do so, the
operator may sometimes get inappropriate messages when trying to change the NE configuration.

4.14 -- PROTECTION SCHEMES
This domain is present with 1+1 configurations only.
-- Resource Tree Area: displays the radio ports sorted by channel number.
-- Resource List Area: displays tabular information about the selected resource in tree area.
-- Resource Detail Area: displays, through tabbed windows, the properties done in list area. This area
allows you to perform the available functions for the selected resource.
By clicking on the tree root shown below, the tree will be expanded according to the supported protection
schemes.
Figure 147 - Protection Schemes
A single left click selection of an element tree causes the activation of the corresponding graphical
representation displayed in the Resource list area.
Three 1+1 protection schemes are available, depending on the NE configuration:
-- Mux/Demux protection: EPS protection in Tx side
-- Radio protection: EPS protection in Rx side
-- HSB protection: Hot Stand--by protection
To see the current position of the switches enter the menu Diagnosis --> Summary Block Diagram View (refer
to para. 4.16.5 on page 242).
-- The Mux/Demux protection corresponds to the Switch Tx
-- The Radio protection corresponds to the Switch Rx

-- The HSB protection is implemented in the ODU: one Transmitter is connected to the antenna (active),
the other transmitter is in standby.
-- The Criteria column provides information related to the event that triggered the last switch from the
corresponding channel. This is not an alarm. For instance, after startup this criteria may be set, in some
cases, to Equipment Failure even if no such event actually happened.
4.14.1 - Mux/Demux Protection Management

This protection is available for the 1 + 1 HSB--MP, 1 + 1 HSB--SD--MP, and 1 + 1 FD--MP configurations.
The Equipment Protection Management is performed by selecting MuxDemux Protection tree element.
The following windows permit a complete view of all NE resources involved in the EPS protection:
-- Schema Parameters
-- Channels Parameters
Figure 148 - Mux/Demux Protection
4.14.1.1 -- Schema Parameters

The window Schema Parameters displays information about the protection.
The Schema parameters are:
-- Protection Type: this parameter is defined at configuration time and it is read only. The supported type
is: 1+1, e.g. a working channel (Main) is protected by a protecting channel (Spare).
-- Operation type: never revertive (automatic restoration inhibited).
The operator choice for Operation Type will be applied by clicking on Apply button.

4.14.1.2 -- Commands
To enter the Commands menu click on the Spare #0 element in the Tree view or on the Main #1 element.
Figure 149 - Mux/Demux Protection Switch (Spare #0)

Figure 150 - Mux/Demux Protection Switch (Main #1)
You can modify the state of the switch with the Lockout, Forced and Manual commands.
Lockout has higher priority than Forced: the activation forces Channel 1 into service independently of the
possible active alarms. This command activates signaling AC (Abnormal Condition).
Forced has higher priority than the automatic operation: the activation of this command forces in service
Channel 0, independently of the possible active alarms. This command activates signaling AC.
Automatic Switch is the normal operation condition: the position of the switch depends on the commands
generated by the logic.
Manual has the lowest priority: it is performed only if there are no alarms that can activate an automatic switch.
It cannot be performed if Lockout or Forced commands are already activated. If this command is active, it will
be removed by an incoming alarm. This command does not activate signaling AC.
Command priority list
Command Priority
Lockout 1
Forced 2
Automatic switch 3
Manual 4
To release a previously activated command select None and click on Apply.

4.14.2 - Radio Protection Management
This protection is available with all 1 + 1 configurations.
The Radio Protection Management is performed selecting Radio Protection element tree.
The following windows permit a complete view of all NE resources involved in a RPS protection:
-- Switching Threshold Parameters
Figure 151 - Radio Protection View
4.14.2.1 -- Schema Parameter

The window Schema Parameters displays information about the protection.
The Schema Parameters are:
-- Protection Type field: shows the protection schema architecture: 1+1;
-- Operation Type field: always indicates notRevertive while actually automatic radio protection always
tries to give priority to the channel with the best reception quality.

4.14.2.2 -- Switching Thresholds
Protection switching thresholds are the alarm activation thresholds associated with radio protection switching
requests in a 1+1 configuration.
Figure 152 - Radio Protection Switching Thresholds
Two kinds of thresholds can trigger the early switching request: received power level or error ratio.
-- Early Warning alarm. Early Switching Request (ESR):
S Early warning on Rx Power Level: Defines the absolute received power level at which the Early
Warning alarm is triggered.
S Early warning on BER: Defines the BER threshold at which the Early Warning alarm is triggered.
-- Low Bit Error Ratio. Switching Request (SR):
S Defines the BER threshold at which the low Bit Error Ratio switching request alarm is triggered.
-- High Bit Error Ratio. Priority Switching Request (PSR):
S Selects the BER threshold at which the high Bit Error Ratio switching request alarm is triggered.
The selected error rate determines the AIS engagement.

To enter the Commands menu click on the Spare #0 element in the Tree view or on the Main #1 element.
Figure 153 - Radio Protection Switch (Spare #0)

Figure 154 - Radio Protection Switch (Main #1)
The operator can modify the state of the switch with the Lockout, Forced and Manual commands.
Lockout has higher priority than Forced: the activation forces in service Channel 1 (default channel),
independently of the possible active alarms. This command activates signaling AC.
Forced has higher priority than the automatic operation: the activation of this command forces in service
Channel 0, independently of the possible active alarms. This command activates signaling AC.
be removed by an incoming alarm. This command does not activate signaling AC. Due to the fact that automatic
radio protection always tries to work with the best channel, manual command is useless in this particular case.
Command priority list
Command Priority
Lockout 1
Forced 2
Automatic switch 3
Manual 4

Due to the fact that automatic radio protection always tries to work with the best channel, manual command
is useless in this particular case.

4.14.3 - HSB Transmission Protection Management
This protection is available with all 1 + 1 HSB configurations.
The Transmission Protection Management is performed selecting Transmission Protection element tree.
The following windows permit a complete view of all Ne resource involved in a EPS protection:
-- Channels Parameters
Figure 155 - Transmission Protection View
4.14.3.1 -- Schema Parameters

The window Schema Parameters displays the parameters that can be modified.
The Schema parameters are:
-- Protection Type: this parameter is defined at creation time and it is read only. The supported types
are: 1+1, e.g. a working element is protected by one protecting unit.
-- Operation type: Shows the automatic restoration criteria from the protecting to the protected unit.
In the case of 1+1 HSB--SD and 1+1 HSB--SD--MP configurations (space diversity: 2 antennas).
Operation type is not revertive (automatic restoration inhibited).
In case of 1+1 HSB and 1+1 HSB--MP (1 antenna and 1 coupler): Operation Type is revertive
(automatic restoration allowed).
The operator choice for Operation Type will be applied clicking on Apply button.

To enter the Commands menu click on the Spare #0 element or on the Main #1 element in the Tree view.
Figure 156 - Tx Protection Commands (Spare #0)

Figure 157 - Tx Protection Commands (Main #1)
You can modify the state of the switch using the Lockout, Forced and Manual commands.
Lockout has higher priority than Forced: the activation connects to the antenna Transmitter 1 (default
transmitter), independently of the possible active alarms. This command activates signaling AC.
Forced has higher priority than the automatic operation: the activation of this command connects to the antenna
Transmitter 0, independently of the possible active alarms. This command activates signaling AC.
be removed by an incoming alarm. This command does not activate signaling AC.
Command Priority List

Command Priority
Lockout 1
Forced 2
Automatic switch 3
Manual 4

4.15 -- LOOPBACKS
The functions described in this section allow to perform the test operations.
-- Resource Tree Area: displays the object on which the loopbacks can be performed, sorted by number.
-- Resource Filter Area: displays the possible filters to apply to loopback search.
-- Resource List Area: displays tabular information about the loopback supported by the resource
selected in tree area.
-- Resource Detail Area: displays, through tabbed windows, the properties done in list area. This area
enables to perform the available functions for involved resource.
4.15.1 -- Available Loopbacks

The loopbacks can be activated on the local NE only.
4.15.1.1 -- 1+0 Loopbacks
CT
IDU ODU ODU IDU
2 3 4 1
TRIB MUX/ MODEM RF RF MODEM MUX/ TRIB

DEMUX DEMUX
Figure 158 - 1+0 available loopbacks

Figure 159 - Channel 1 Loopback View (1+0)
In the Resource List Area are listed all the loopbacks which can be performed.
In this area the following information is given:
-- Channel: the number of the channel (channel 1 only)
-- Type Interface: the type of interface in which a loopback can be performed.
-- Location: the station in which the loopback is performed (Near End)
-- Type: the type of the loopback (Internal/External Line/External Line RF)
-- Modality: the type of the loopback (Loop and Continue only)
-- Activation: the activation status of a loopback (Active/Not Active)

Figure 160 gives the relationship of all the possible loopbacks and their positions in the block diagram of the
equipment provided by the Summary Block Diagram View option, available in the Diagnosis menu.
2 IDU
CABLE
3 ODU
CABLE 4 Radio
port
(RF loop)
1 E1/E3 Port # xx
Figure 160 - 1+0 Loopback types
Clicking on a L square in the Summary block diagram view alllows you to navigate directly to the loopabck
configuration screen.
Tab. 1. 1+0 Loopbacks
CT selection in
Loopback Ref. to Loopback
No. the Resource Location Note
name Fig. type
Tree Area
E1/E3 Loopback in the remote

1 Channel 1 160 Near End Internal
Port#xx station at tributary level
Loopback at the IDU output

2 IDU cable Channel 1 160 Near End Internal
at aggregate level
Loopback at the ODU input

3 ODU cable Channel 1 160 Near End Internal
at aggregate level
4 Radio port Channel 1 160 Near End Internal RF local loopback

4.15.1.2 -- 1+1 Loopbacks
Figure 161 - Channel 1 Loopback View (1+1)
In the Resource List Area are listed all the loopbacks which can be performed.
In this area the following information is given:
-- Channel: the number of the channel (channel 1 only)
-- Type Interface: the type of interface in which a loopback can be performed.
-- Location: the station in which the loopback is performed (Near End/Far End)
-- Type: the type of the loopback (Internal/External Line/External Line RF)
-- Modality: the type of the loopback (Loop and Continue only)
-- Activation: the activation status of a loopback (Active/Not Active)
In Figure 162 is given the association of all the possible loopbacks and their positions in the block diagram of
the equipment provided by the Summary Block Diagram View option, available in the Diagnosis menu.

2 IDU 3 ODU
CABLE CABLE
4
Radio port
(RF loop)
1 E1/E3
Port # xx
Figure 162 - 1+1 Loopback types
Tab. 2. 1+1 Loopbacks
CT selection in
Loopback Ref. to Loopback
No. the Resource Location Note
name Fig. type
Tree Area
E1/E3 Loopback in the remote

1 Channel 0 or 1 162 Near End Internal
Port#xx station at tributary level
Loopback at the IDU output

2 IDU cable Channel 0 or 1 162 Near End Internal
at aggregate level
Loopback at the ODU input

3 ODU cable Channel 0 or 1 162 Near End Internal
at aggregate level
4 Radio port Channel 0 or 1 162 Near End Internal RF local loopback

4.15.2 - How to activate a loopback
To activate a loopback:
-- Select the suitable loopback to be activated by clicking on the relevant object in the Resource Tree Area
or by selecting the relevant row in the Resource List Area.
-- The following screen will appear:
Figure 163 - Loopback activation
-- Select Active in the Activation field.

-- Click on Apply.
-- In the row in the Resource List Area the Activation field of the relevant loopback changes from Not
Active to Active.
When loopback activation is activated, an abnormal condition is raised on the tributary in order to remind the
operator that the NE is currently not working in normal condition. This abnormal condition disappears when the
loopback activation is stopped.

4.15.3 - How to remove a loopback
To remove a loopback:
-- Select the suitable loopback to remove by clicking on the relevant object in the Resource Tree Area
or by selecting the relevant row in the Resource List Area.
-- The following screen will appear:
Figure 164 - Loopback deactivation
-- Select Not Active in the Activation field.

-- Click on Apply.
-- In the row in the Resource List Area the Activation field of the relevant loopback changes from Active
to Not Active.

4.16 -- DIAGNOSIS
In the Diagnosis menu, six options are available as shown here:
Figure 165 - Diagnosis menu
4.16.1 -- Alarms
In the diagnosis pull--down menu, select the Alarms/NE Alarms options. This opens the Alarm Surveillance (AS)
application, allowing managment of the NE alarms.
Figure 166 - NE Alarms Synthesis

Figure 167 - NE Alarms details
These are the alarms stored in the CT since its last connection to the NE.
4.16.2 -- Log Browsing

In the Diagnosis pull--down menu, select the Log Browsing option.
The proposed options:
-- Select the Alarm Log option to access the Alarm Log file.
The Alarm Log window opens, permitting to analyze all the alarms stored in the NE.
Refer to the 1320 CT Operators Handbook (Alcatel Ref. 3AL79552AAAA).
Figure 168 - Alarm Log Window

-- Select the Event Log option to access the Event Log file.
The Event Log window opens, permitting to analyze all the events stored in the NE.
Refer to the 1320 CT Operators Handbook (Alcatel Ref. 3AL79552AAAA).
Figure 169 - Event Log Window
4.16.3 -- Remote Inventory

This screen is a read--only screen, which shows all the information on the equipment.
Figure 170 - Remote Inventory Window

4.16.4 - Abnormal Condition List
The Abnormal Condition List option in the Diagnosis menu displays all the abnormal conditions (i.e. the
manual operations) currently active in the NE.
Figure 171 - Abnormal Condition List Window

The abnormal conditions can be:
-- Switch commands Forced or Lockout
-- Loopbacks
-- Tx muting (manual or automatic)
4.16.5 -- Summary Block Diagram View

The Summary Block Diagram View of the Diagnosis menu displays a global logical view (strictly related
to the physical implementation) highlighting a synthesis of all the alarms and statuses present in the system
(ODU+IDU).
This window also shows a logical view of the signal flowing through the functional block and switches.
Line (and arrow) trace changes in compliance with the current switch status. By clicking on the objects of the
drawing shown in the figure the operator can navigate to the specific view to perform maintenance operation
(for example specific alarm details, equipment details, manual switches, loopback (L), performance monitoring
(P).
The Summary Block Diagram View depends on the configuration.
As an example, the following configurations are shown here:
-- 1 + 0 (see Figure 172 page 243)
-- 1 + 1 HSB with mux/demux protection (see Figure 173, page 244)
-- 1 + 1 Frequency Diversity (see Figure 174, page 245)

In detail, it is possible to:
-- navigate from Alarm indicator to related Alarm Synthesis;
-- navigate from External Point indicator to External Point view;
-- navigate from Switch indicator to related Protection Scheme view;
-- navigate from Loopback indicator to specific Loopback view; for example, by clicking on (L)
indicator of main board (Ch#1) the operator can navigate to loopback view for IDU cable;
-- navigate from Performance indicator to specific Performance view; for example, by clicking on (P)
indicator (line side) the operator can navigate to Current Data view;
-- navigate from ODU box to the radio view with automatic selection of the related channel.
To refresh the screen press the Refresh button.
S Loopback indicator: yellow letter L means active loop.
S Performance indicator: yellow letter P means active performance.
In the 1+1 configuration the current position of the switches is also shown.
Figure 172 - Summary Block Diagram View: 1+0

Figure 173 - Summary Block Diagram View: 1+1 HSB with Mux/Demux protection

Figure 174 - Summary Block Diagram View: 1+1 Frequency Diversity
By pressing the Refresh button the refresh of the screen takes place (active loopback and performance and
position of the switch).

4.16.6 -- Current Configuration View
This screen is a read--only screen, which shows the current configuration of the NE.
Figure 175 - Current Configuration View

4.17 -- PERFORMANCE MONITORING
This chapter describes the functions to provide Performance Monitoring (PM) management. It explains the
procedures that the operator must perform in order to activate a PM process.
CAUTION:
S In order to avoid discrepancies between performance monitoring data timestamp
! and PC current time, first make sure that date and time are in sync between the NE
to be monitored and the PC running the craft terminal (refer to section 4.8.1 for NE
time configuration).
CAUTION:
! S With the analog cable interface, the G.826 counters are not correctly evaluated.
4.17.1 - General information on the performance monitoring process

The performance monitoring (PM) gives indication on the quality of the service.
Quality of service PM is performed in accordance with G.826 and G.784.
It is assumed that the quality of the single tributary (E1, E3) can be derived from the quality of the aggregate
signal, therefore no dedicated quality of service PM is foreseen on the single tributaries.
Considering one section (see below), one current register is for 15 min and one for 24 h; 96 history registers
are available for 15 min and 8 for 24 h.
The radio section monitored is:
-- Radio Hop Section: the section between two radio stations inside the protection section;
PROPR. FEC MODEM MODEM FEC PROPR.

FRAMING ENCODE RF RF DECODE FRAMING
Radio Hop
Figure 176 - Radio section

The counters supported are the following:
-- Errored Seconds
-- Severly Errored Seconds
-- Background Block Error
-- Unavailable Seconds
The following table provides, for each frame structure, the main features useful to define a SES.
Tab. 3. SES Thresholds

E3 16E1 8E1 4E1 2E1
Gross bit rate
39,498 39,498 19,748 9,874 4,537
[MHz]
G.826 Block size 8 8 4 2 1
Blocks per sec. 4937 4937 4937 4937 4937
SES Threshold
1481 1481 1481 1481 1481
(Note 1)
(Note 1) Note that according to ITU--T G.826 a second is
declared a Severely Errored Second if it is a period of one second with
more than 30 % errored blocks or at least one defect.

The flow chart shown below illustrates the recognition of anomalies, defects, errored blocks, ES and SES
according to ITU--T G.826 (12/2002).
Monitored
second
Yes
Defects?
No
No
Anomalies?
Yes
Yes SES
%EB 30?
(and therefore an ES)
ES
(but not a SES) No
Path in Path in No
No
available available
State? State?
Yes Yes
cES = cES + 1 cES = cES + 1
cBBE = cBBE + EB(s) cSES = cSES + 1
T1313790--98
End
Figure 177 - Anomalies, defects, errored blocks, ES and SES according to ITU- T G.826

4.17.2 -- Performance menu
The performance view allows the user to activate and monitor the PM process on the selected object.
-- Resource Tree Area: displays the threshold for measurement and the object monitoring sorted by
channel number.
-- Resource List Area: displays the PM management for the selected resource in the tree area.
Figure 178 - Performance View
The performance reports can be of 2 different types:

-- 15 minutes
-- 24 hours
The following description explains the functions to provide the PM process with a granularity period of 15 min.
The same functions are provided for 24h PM process.
The PM are only of HOP type. The current report can be seen (and configured) and the history PM log can be
seen.
To see and configure the current report:
-- Click on the channel (0 or 1) (in 1+0 configuration channel 1 only)
-- Click on HOP
-- Click on the desired granularity (15 m or 24 h)

-- Click on CD (Current Data).
To see a history log:
-- Click on the channel (0 or 1) (in 1+0 configuration channel 1 only)
-- Click on HOP
-- Click on the desired granularity (15 m or 24 h)
-- Click on the desired HD (History Data).
Each PM is associated with a threshold table. To see which threshold table is used click on HOP in the Resource
Tree Area. The following screen will appear:
Figure 179 - PM Alarm Profile Assignment Screen
To associate an Alarm Profile click on the selection box and select one of the Alarm Profiles available.

4.17.3 - CD (Current Data)
The following window lets you start and read the 15min PM report and 24h PM report:
Figure 180 - Current Data View
4.17.3.1 -- CD parameters
The fields displayed in the upper part of the Current Data View let the operator check and manage the
parameters of the current data collection.
-- Suspect interval shows whether the current data are suspect or not.
-- Elapsed Time field (read--only) displays the elapsed time in the current interval of monitoring.
-- End Period: displays time of the PM in the graphical description and in the tabular description in the
upper part of the screen. By pressing the Refresh button this time changes.
-- Max Interval supp.: max. number of intervals (reports) which can be suppressed in the History
because they dont have errors.
-- Num. Interval supp.: number of intervals (reports) suppressed in the History because they dont
have errors.
4.17.3.2 -- CD Counters
The fields and buttons displayed in the lower part of the Current Data View screen (Counters Area) allow
management of performance events.

In the left part of Counters Area, there is a graphical description of the event counter value: BBE (Errored block),
ES (Errored second), SES (Severely Errored Second), UAS (Unavailable second).
These values refer to the last refresh performed by pressing the Refresh button.
In the right part of screen, there are button choices to perform actions on the current data collection:
-- Reset button resets the data collection and related counters.
-- Start button starts the counters for the data collection, when the CD has been stopped.
-- Refresh button makes a refresh of the counters.
-- Stop button stops the counters for the data collection, when the CD has been started.
4.17.4 -- HD (History Data)

The PM process monitors the parameters during a specified interval (i.e. 15min) and stores their values in
history data. A History Data collection is created automatically at the end of each time interval of Current Data
and deleted when the relative CD is deleted.
4.17.4.1 -- HD Parameters
The table displayed on the following window collects the history data for a related PM report:
Figure 181 - History Data

The table columns hold the value of following parameters:
-- End Period: End period of the relevant report
-- Elapsed time: elapsed time in the related interval
-- Suspect interval: this field describes whether the History Data is suspect or not.
-- Counters: the last columns hold the counters value (BBE, ES, SES, UAS).

4.17.5 - Threshold Data
This section describes how to see or change the threshold values assigned to PM counters.
To view the available threshold for PM process, the operator must select the Thresholds Tables node tree
in the Resource Tree Area of the Performance View.
By clicking on the threshold table on the view area the parameters of the 2 tables will appear:
Figure 182 - Thresholds Tables
By clicking on threshold 1 or 2 in the Resourse List Area the Thresholds Table Configuration screen will appear.
In the upper part of the screen, the Name field displays the name assigned to the threshold table.
In the lower part of the screen, the low and high threshold for each counter is shown. To change them, the
operator must enter the new values in the table fields and click on the Apply button.

Figure 183 - Threshold table configuration

4.18 -- Software Download
4.18.1 - Server Access Configuration
An FTP server can be used to speed up the software download to the NE .
This menu allows to configure an FTP server on which the previously loaded software will be downloaded.
Copy the ECT directory present in the software CD on the FTP server.
Figure 184 - Server access configuration screen
User Id and Password are the login information to access the FTP server.
In the Address field write the IP address of the FTP server.
In the Port field write the port to be used and in the Root Directory field write the FTP server directory name
from which the software can be downloaded.
By clicking on the Use System Default button, the server access values will be filled in automatically with the
default configuration.
The CT is the default FTP server with the following parameters:
-- User Id: ftp
-- Password: ftp
-- Address: IP address of the F interface or IP address of the Ethernet interface, if present.
-- Port: 15000
The System Default can be changed by writing different values in the fields and then by clicking on button OK.
4.18.2 -- Init SW Download

Using this menu, software is downloaded to the NE in order to upgrade the NE software version.
To start a download, select the desired software version and click on the Init download button.
This screen displays (it may take some time) the software packages previously stored through the menu
Supervision --> Files Administration --> Software Administration available in the NES menu.T
The Forced check box can be used to force download (i.e. the complete description file is downloaded to the
NE).
If the Forced download is not selected, the system will compare the software to be downloaded with the software
present in the NE, and will proceed with the download operation only if the versions are different.

Figure 185 - Init Software Download screen
After selecting the software package to be downloaded and clicking on the Init download button, the following
confirmation dialog box is displayed:
Figure 186 - Init SW Download confirmation dialog

Clicking Yes starts the actual download operation.
When the SW download starts, a screen showing the in progress operation of the download appears. Download
is aborted when the Abort button is pressed.
Figure 187 - SW Download progress window

4.18.3 - SW Status
This menu allows to display the information of the software installed in the NE.
The following information is displayed:
-- Name: software name
-- Version: software version
-- Operational state: enabled or disabled
-- Current status: committed or standby
By clicking on the Software Units Status button the SW Status screen, giving additional information on the
software package.
Figure 188 - SW Status screen

The following information is displayed on the screen:
-- EC: software on the Equipment Controller
Figure 189 - SW Unit Status screen
The Flash card, which stores the NE software, contains 2 banks.

The 2 banks can store 2 different software versions. One bank will be committed (active) and the other bank
will be standby.
The second bank will appear when a new software package has been downloaded the first time.
During download, the download file is automatically stored in the standby bank.
To activate the new version, first check the operational status of the standby bank. If the status is enabled (this
means that download took place without errors) select Activation or Forced Activation in the Software
Management Action field and click on the Apply Action button.
By selecting Forced Activation, the bank to be activated is forced to restart.
By selecting Activation, the bank to be activated restarts only if the content of the two banks differ.


5 -- Commissioning
A very precise knowledge of the link configuration is absolutely vital before you
STOP begin commissioning. For this, complete the sheets for stations A and B accord-
ing to the model supplied in Appendix 2.
5.1 -- Order of commissioning for a link

The commissioning operations described below are for a link comprising a station A and a station B.
STATION A STATION B
Network Network
Figure 190 - Relative positions of stations A and B

The stages are:
-- prepare the PC (see 4.1),
-- install station A and roughly point the antenna towards station B,
-- commission station A,
-- install station B and roughly point the antenna towards station A,
-- commission station B and point the antenna, connect the tributaries and the service channels,
-- return to station A to:
S fine tune the pointing of the antenna,
S carry out all the commissioning checks (switching to local supervision mode),
S check out the link,
S cancel the local supervision function,
S connect the tributaries and engineering service channels.
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
The following equipment is required for commissioning:
-- Multimeter.
-- Portable PC running the supervisory software (see 4.1).
-- PC-NE link cable and F interface adapter cable, supplied with the system CD--ROMs.
-- A service kit (for measuring AGC and the telephone link between the IDU and the ODU).
-- A 2 Mbit/s or 34 Mbit/s BER analyzer, with an impedance of 75 or 120 , depending on the configuration
of the link to be installed.
-- A compass and a pair of binoculars.
-- Tools as defined in 3.3.3.

5.2 -- Installing and commissioning station A (phase 1)
5.2.1 -- Preliminary operations

Main IDU (classic IDU)

Extension IDU (classic IDU)
Light IDU

Figure 191 - Installing and Commissioning: IDU Controls and connectors
-- Install station A according to the instructions in section 3, and in particular those in 3.5.3.4 or 3.5.4.4
describing how to roughly point the antenna of station A towards station B.
-- Check that the correct power supply voltage is present (24 or 48 V), with the correct polarity, on the
power supply outlet.
-- Make a visual inspection for subrack installation and cabling:
-- the subrack allocation (or wall/table installation) according to the station layout.
-- the IDU rack and subrack ground connections.
-- the ODU ground connections.
-- there are no cables connected to any NMS port. Any that are connected must be disconnected.
-- in the case of a non--integrated antenna, the antenna and the ODU must be grounded.
-- the IDU/ODU interconnection cable is disconnected from IDU.
NOTE: Make sure that the IDU--ODU cable connection is removed in order to verify via the CT the
System Tx Power and Frequency settings before powering up the ODU.
-- In the case of a configuration with classic IDU, check that a software features key enabling the
configuration is connected to the SKU/MTN connector (refer to 3.2, Comments on the information
marked on the software key label).

5.2.2 - Powering up the IDU
NOTE: Since the IDU--ODU cable connection has NOT been established powering up the IDU, the ODU
will not be operating. Therefore, the IDU will display the relative alarms.
-- Power up the IDU(s) (via switch { on the connector panel):

S The green LED | should come on.
-- Connect the PC to the equipment using the interface cable and F adapter cable supplied (serial port
-- connector marked F on the IDU ).
-- Wait for the ATT, URG and NURG LEDs to start flashing out of sync on the main IDU. The LED flashing
occurs if IDU and ODU have never been configured together (otherwise, refer to 4). Download the
IDU configuration, by pushing switch to the IDU setting (IDU configuration taken as a reference).
After two minutes at most (for the configuration to be registered), the LEDs should stop flashing
simultaneously.
5.2.3 - Configuring the IDU

-- Run LUX50 1320 CT software on the PC. Once connected to the IDU, the IDU configuration can be
done by running the Quick Configuration procedure (refer to section 4.8.5 on page 172).
5.2.4 - Checking out operation

The checking out operation entails setting up local and remote loopback configurations as defined in section 2.5.
5.2.4.1 -- Checking operation in a 1+0 configuration
1 Connect the 2 or 34 Mbit/s BER analyzer (according to the configuration) to an active tributary.
2 From the CT, select the Loopback tab, and click on the IDU Cable in the tree on the left. Select
Active and click on Apply to activate the IDU baseband loop.
3 Check the bit error ratio. If zero, continue checking; otherwise, check the wiring, that the LAU and
LIU boards of the unit match (and their impedances) and the configuration of the equipment. If ev-
erything is OK, change the IDU.
4 Cancel the IDU baseband loop. Select Not Active and click on Apply button.
5 Set up the ODU cable loop.
6 Check the bit error ratio. If zero, continue checking; otherwise, check the state of the IDU/ODU link
coaxial cable.
7 Cancel the ODU cable loop.
8 Set up the RF loop (if this option is available in the equipment).
9 Check the bit error ratio. If zero, continue checking via operation 10; otherwise, check the radio
configurations and correct the configuration errors.
10 Cancel the RF loop.
11 Check that there are no remote controls still active (the AC indicator on the right should be green).
12 From the CT, select the Radio tab. The light in front of the Radio node in the Radio tree should
appear in green.
13 If an alarm is detected or an incorrect value is found, refer to section 6 and correct as required.
14 Disconnect the BER analyzer.

5.2.4.2 -- Checking out operation in a 1+1 configuration
1 Connect the 2 or 34 Mbit/s BER analyzer (according to the configuration) to an active tributary.
From the CT, click on the Protection Schemes tab. For each protection (depending on the
configuration, protections can be: Radio Protection, HSB Tx Protection, Mux/Demux
2
Protection), select the Spare#0 node in the tree, and then select Lockout + Apply in order to
force operations on channel 1.
3 On channel 1, carry out operations 2 to 11 in section 5.2.4.1.
On channel 0, carry out operations in 5 to 11 in section 5.2.4.1 for a basic 1+1 HSB configuration,
4
operations 2 to 11 in section 5.2.4.1 for a 1+1 HSB configuration with multiplexer protection.
Cancel forcing on channel 0 via the remote controls Command: None + Apply on Main#1 for
5
each protection.
6 Check that there are no remote controls still active (the AC indicator on the right should be green).
From the CT, select the Radio tab. The light in front of the Radio node in the Radio tree should
7
appear in green.
8 If an alarm is detected or an incorrect value found, refer to section 6 and correct as required.
9 Disconnect the BER analyzer.

5.3 -- Installing and commissioning station B
5.3.1 -- Preliminary operations
-- Commission station B by carrying out the same operations as those described for station A in
5.2.1 to 5.2.4, apart from the RF loop operations.
5.3.2 - Pointing the antenna with pole mounting 1+1 (9400UXI101)

Rough elevation locking
Ground connection screw 6
Elevation locking screw
Elevation
turnbuckle
Rough Azimuthal 7
locking screw
Azimuthal locking
screw (x4)
Azimuthal turn-
Window of the pole mounting buckle
Figure 192 - Pole mounting 1+1 adjustments (9400UXI101)

-- Attach the hook of the service kit (ref. 9400UXT102) in the window of the Pole mounting.
-- Connect connector P01 (see Appendix 4) to the MAINT port on the front panel of the ODU.
-- Check the tightness of the two rough pointing screws and , tighten with a 5 mm Allen key.
-- Connect the voltmeter, set to DC range, to P02/P03 of the service kit 9400UXT102 or to P02/P03 of
the service kit 3EJ04113AAAA113. With the two turnbuckles, fine tune the azimuthal and elevation
settings (Figure 192) to obtain a maximum voltage on the voltmeter (AGC DC voltage of between 0 and
5 V).
-- Retighten the two azimuthal locking screws using the box wrench.
-- Tighten the four front elevation screws using the 5 mm Allen key (tighten in criss--cross fashion).
-- Finish the operation by tightening the azimuthal and elevation turnbuckle lock nuts with the 16 mm flat
wrench.
CAUTION: For the tightening torques of the screws, refer to chapter 3.3.4.

5.3.3 - Pointing the antenna with pole mounting 1+0 (9400UXI102)
4 screws azimuthal tightening
Elevation turnbuckle
1
3 screws elevation tightening
Grounding connection
Azimuthal turnbuckle
Figure 193 - Pole mounting 1+0 (9400UXI102)

-- Connect connector P01 of the service kit (see Appendix 4) to the MAINT port on the front panel of
the ODU.
-- Connect the voltmeter, set to DC Volts, to P02/P03 of the service kit 9400UXT102 or to P02/P03 of
the service kit 3EG04113.
-- Be sure that the three screws { and the four screws | are a bit slackened, just enough to allow
movement of the different parts of the pole mounting. These screws must not be too much slackened,
otherwise, the fine--tuning of alignment will be imperfect. Use the 8 mm Allen key.
-- With the two turnbuckles and the 16 mm flat wrench, fine tune the elevation and azimuthal settings until
you obtain the maximum voltage reading in the voltmeter.
-- Tighten the three screws { and the four screws | with torque 3 mdaN.
Note: Fine pointing of the antenna is described in 5.3.2.
5.3.4 - Checking out operation

-- Using the local loop configurations (apart from the RF loop), repeat the operations carried out on station
A (see 5.2).
-- From the CT, run the Power Measures application (Radio tab, then the Power Meas tab).
-- Check that the received power level is greater than --90 dBm. This check must be carried out on the
normal channel and, if appropriate, the standby channel.
If the received power is less than this value, the reason is probably an antenna coarse pointing problem
or a transmission problem in station A.
-- Connect the tributary, supervision and ESC cables previously disconnected.
-- If an operator is available in another station of the network and there is a telephone in station B, test
the telephone ESC (general call using number 00).
-- Test the ESC 3, ESC 4 and ESC 5 connections, if applicable, and if the corresponding equipment is
installed in the station.

5.4 -- Commissioning the link from station A (phase 2)
5.4.1 - Pointing the antenna

-- Adjust the orientation of the antenna in the same way as for station B (see 5.3.2).
5.4.2 -- Checking the radio transmission parameters
-- Connect the CT to station A and check that there is no remaining equipment alarm (EQP alarm
synthesis indicator should be green).
-- Check that there is no remaining transmission alarm (TRS alarm synthesis indicator should be green).
If some transmission alarms remain, use the Radio and Line Interface tabs to investigate the cause
of the alarms and, if necessary, correct it.
-- Select Radio tab and then Power Meas tab in order to retrieve the received power level value. Write
down this value. This operation has to be performed on both radio channels (Channel#1 or
Channel#0 in the Radio Channels tree).
-- Connect the CT to station B and repeat the same operations.
The received power levels should match the nominal received power indicated on the station configuration sheet
to within 6 dB. If the difference is greater:
S Check that there are no abnormal propagation conditions (storm or heavy rainfall, for example).
S In the case of a 1+1 HSB configuration with integrated coupler, use the Protection Schemes tab
on each station to check that the standby channel is not being used for reception and/or
transmission.
S Check the pointing of the antennas (if necessary, pointing to a secondary lobe).
If the problem persists, contact the network administrator or Alcatel customer service.
If some transmission alarms remain (TRS alarm synthesis indicator), proceed as follows for the stations with
an alarm condition:
-- Connect the CT to the station.
-- Follow corrective maintenance operations as described in 6.2.3.
-- In case of configuration errors (tributaries incorrectly set to Unframed or Disabled, for example), use
the Line Interface and Radio tabs to make the necessary changes.
Be careful not to disconnect the link by setting the parameters incorrectly!
5.4.3 -- Remote tributary loop

A remote loop on an active tributary is needed for the checks described in 5.4.4 and 5.4.5.
-- Select the Loopback tab from CT connected to station B.
-- Set up the remote loop configuration as follows:
S Select the E1/E3 port#xx (xx : the number of the tributary on which the loop is set up).
S Select Active in the Activation panel and click Apply.
-- In station A, connect the BER analyzer to the port of tributary x and check that there are no errors.

5.4.4 - Checking the transmit/receive switching function
These checks need to be carried out only in 1+1 FD and 1+1 HSB configurations.
-- Set up the remote loop on an active tributary.
-- Select the Protection Schemes tab from the CT for both station A and station B.
-- In both stations, initiate a switchover to the standby channel as described below.
5.4.4.1 -- 1+1 configuration
PROTECTION CHANNEL 1+1 FD CONFIGURATIONS 1+1 HSB CONFIGURATIONS

HSB Tx Main#1 Command Forced + Apply
Protection
Radio Protection Main#1 Command Forced + Apply Command Forced + Apply
-- Check that the switchover is completed (see the graphic representation for stations A and B using the
Diagnosis/Summary Block Diagram View menu.
NOTE: Receive mode switchovers must be executed without errors.
S In 1+1 FD configurations, there is no transmit switching.
S In 1+1 HSB configurations, transmit switching causes transient dropouts on the link and a loss of
received data indicated by a burst of errors.
-- In both stations, initiate a switchover to the normal channel as described below:
HSB Tx Spare#0 Command Lockout + Apply

Protection
Radio Protection Spare#0 Command Lockout + Apply Command Lockout + Apply
Diagnosis/Summary Block Diagram View menu. The above note still applies.
-- Reinstate automatic switching mode by cancelling the remote controls previously activated as
described below:

HSB Tx Spare#0 Command None + Apply
Protection
Radio Protection Spare#0 Command None + Apply Command None + Apply
5.4.4.2 -- 1+1 configurations with multiplexer protection
-- In both stations, force operation to the normal multiplexer/demultiplexer as described below:
PROTECTION CHANNEL 1+1 MP CONFIGURATIONS
MUX/DEMUX Spare#0 Command Lockout + Apply

P t ti
Diagnosis/Summary Block Diagram View menu).
-- MUX switchovers cause a microinterruption of the link which results in the appearance of error bursts.
-- Check that there are no errors (after traffic has stabilized on the normal MUX).
-- In both stations, initiate a switchover to the standby multiplexer as described below:

MUX/DEMUX Spare#0 Command None + Apply
P t ti
Protection
Main#1 Command Forced + Apply

Diagnosis/Summary Block Diagram View menu).
-- Check that there are no errors.
-- Reinstate the automatic switching mode by sending the remote control:

MUX/DEMUX Main#1 Command None + Apply
Protection
5.4.5 -- Checking quality

-- Select the Performance tab on the CT(see 4.17.2). This application keeps a counter (errored
seconds, severely errored seconds, background block errors and unavailable seconds) on the hop
(results given for each hop and link).
Duration and results:

Application running time: 2 hours.
Tolerance: the readings must be less than or equal to those given in the table below:
AGGREGATE BIT RATE
EVENT 4 Mbit/s 8 Mbit/s 16 Mbit/s 34 Mbit/s

ES 2 3 4 4
SES 0 0 0 0
UAS 0 0 0 0
BBE 0 0 0 0
NOTE:
If fading is observed over a period of less than 15 minutes, the fading period is not taken into account.
If fading is observed over a period of longer than 15 minutes, the test will be extended as required.
5.4.6 -- End of commissioning

To terminate the commissioning process:
-- Cancel the remote loop as follows:
S Select the Loopback tab from CT connected to station B.
S In the tree, select the E1/E3 Port#x entry corresponding to the tributary which is looped back.
S Select Not Active in the Activation panel and click Apply.
S Set different link identity codes for the transmit and receive directions
-- Reconnect the tributary, monitoring and ESC cables previously disconnected.

-- Check that there are no remote controls still active (AC indicator on the CT should be green).


6 -- Operation, servicing and maintenance
6.1 -- Preventive maintenance
This kind of maintenance is performed when carrying out a corrective maintenance procedure, or on a routine
visit to all the equipment of the station. It involves inspecting the units and their interconnections (connectors,
cables, sockets, etc), as well as all the equipment involved in the operation of the station (power supply,
batteries, solar panels, earthing, etc) and, in case of doubt, checking the suspect parts, taking all the necessary
precautions to avoid disrupting data transmission over the link (using the 1+1 switching capability if available,
etc). Preventive maintenance is recommended for the following units:
-- MCU board battery:
S every 7 to 10 years (see 7.15.1).
-- Fan unit:
S every 2 to 3 years or in case of alarm.
The system uses 2 fans. An alarm occurs when one fan fails. Both fans should be changed at the
same time (see 7.15.2).
If a main IDU and an extension IDU are used in accordance with chapter 3.4.2.2 recommendations (1U
separation) this preventive maintenance could be forgotten.
6.2 -- Corrective maintenance

6.2.1 -- Methodology
-- Check the condition of the cables, connectors and connections, and of all the components that are
involved in the operation at the station (power supply, battery, earthing, etc),
-- Analyze the IDU alarm indicators,
-- If alarms are indicated, locate them using the Craft Terminal alarm indicators and analyze them and
carry out the necessary corrective procedures (change of unit, module, cable, etc).
6.2.2 -- Analyzing IDU alarm indicators

The alarm indicators on the IDUs provide an indication of the network elements that are affected by alarms:
Besides the information given below (classic IDU and Light IDU indications), the URG, NURG and ATT LEDs
can flash in a particular way to indicate equipment status information, as explained below:
-- URG, NURG and ATT LEDs flashing in sequence: change of configuration or software startup phase
(lasts about two minutes),
-- URG, NURG and ATT LEDs flashing simultaneously: the configurations of the IDU and ODU do not
match. The equipment is waiting for the operator to operate the IDU/ODU-ACO switch.
Meaning of indications on the main IDU (classic):
Red LED URG ON : Service Affecting alarm indicated

Red LED NURG ON : Non-Service Affecting alarm indicated
Yellow LED BZ ON : Busy (telephone ESC busy)
Green LED IDU ON : No alarm on main IDU
Green LED ODU ON : No alarm on main outdoor unit
Meaning of indications on the Light IDU:
Red LED URG ON : Service Affecting alarm indicated

Red LED NURG ON : Non--Service Affecting alarm indicated
Yellow LED MAN ON : Active remote control signal present
Green LED IDU ON : No alarm on IDU equipment
Green LED ODU ON : No alarm on ODU equipment

Meaning of indications on the extension IDU (if installed):
Yellow LED MAN ON : Remote control from the supervision function
Green LED T-IDU ON : Traffic on extension multiplexer/demultiplexer
Green LED T-IDU OFF : Traffic on main multiplexer/demultiplexer
Green LED TX-ODU ON : Transmit traffic on standby ODU
Green LED TX-ODU OFF : Transmit traffic on main ODU
Green LED RX-ODU ON : Receive traffic on standby ODU
Green LED RX-ODU OFF : Receive traffic on main ODU
Green LED IDU ON : No alarm on extension IDU
Green LED ODU ON : No alarm on standby ODU
Note: One green LED IDU / ODU OFF indicates an alarm on the equipment.
6.2.3 - Corrective Servicing
In a 1+1 configuration with a Mux/Demux protection, it is the spare Mux/Demux that is

chosen by default at the start even if an alarm is present on this equipment. Then, you
must force the main Mux/Demux with the remote control, change the spare unit and go
back to automatic mode with the remote control.
With the analog cable interface, the G.826 counters are not correctly evaluated.
6.3 -- Changing IDU
The IDU box can be of two different types. Both kinds are defined in paragraph 7.2.2.2.
Please refer to this paragraph to identify your box.
6.3.1 -- Replacing like for like a Light or classic IDU (1+0 or basic 1+1)
-- Power down the Light IDU / main IDU. Disconnect it from the power source.
-- Disconnect all the cables connected to the unit you are changing (remember to remove the software
key).
-- Change the Light IDU / main IDU after checking that the characteristics match (number of inputs,
impedance, etc). The impedances of the IDU can be reconfigured in any case (see 7.2.2) and
configuration is not needed with IDU which reference ends with the C letter (3CC......C) provided cables
referenced by Alcatel are used.
-- Reconnect all the cables to the unit and the software key.
-- Power up the IDU.
-- Wait for the URG, NURG and ATT LEDs to start flashing simultaneously.
-- Configure the IDU from the ODU by setting the IDU/ODU switch to the ACO/ODU position. Wait about
two minutes for the terminal to be reconfigured. The alarm LEDs should go off and the equipment LEDs
should turn green.
-- Check that there are no alarms in the LUX50 1320CT software application.
-- Update the stations installation form (see model in Appendix 2).
In the event of an error, particularly if the pushbutton is set to the wrong side, re-enter all of the station
configuration (see section 5, Commissioning).

Note: In the case of a basic 1+1 configuration, power down the extension IDU.
6.3.2 -- Replacing a Light IDU with a classic IDU (1+0 only) and vice versa
The procedure for changing the equipment is the same as for like for like replacement, but, in some cases, the
ODU configuration may not be taken into account. Connect the 1320CT to the IDU. Run the
Configuration/Quick Config procedure in order to change the NE configuration from 1 + 0 to 1 + 0L or vice
versa.
6.3.3 -- Replacing like for like a main IDU with MUX protection
-- Force operation using the protection command Forced on Channel #1 for Mux/Demux protection,
and switchover to the multiplexer/demultiplexer on the extension IDUs SCU board.
-- Force transmission and reception to the standby ODU.
-- Power down the main IDU. Disconnect from the power source.
-- Disconnect all the cables connected to the unit you are changing (remember to remove the software
key from the main IDU). For IDU configured with a MUX protection without Access IDU, only disconnect
the part of the cables connected directly to the IDU.
-- Change the main IDU after checking that the specifications are the same (number of inputs, impedance,
etc).
-- Reconnect all the cables to the unit starting with the lower MAIN/EXT cable (68--pin connector) taking
care not to damage the contacts and also the software key from the removed unit.
-- Power up the main IDU.
-- Send the ODUs configuration to the IDU by pushing immediately on the IDU/ODU switch to the
ACO/ODU position (the lower green LED must be lighted).
Warning: An error of handling at this moment, will result in a connection break with a
loss of traffic.
The flashing of the leds is limited to 1 minute. The switch has to be activated as soon as the
led starts flashing otherwise the IDU sends its configuration to the ODUs and breaks the
connection.
-- The alarm leds should turn off and the 2 green leds should light on the main IDU (this stage can take
around one minute according to the ODU type).
-- Check that there are no alarms in the LUX50 1320CT software, otherwise cut off forcing on the receiver
of the spare ODU.
In the event of an error, particularly if the pushbutton is set to the wrong side, re-enter all of the station
configuration (see section 5, Commissioning).
6.3.4 -- Replacing like for like an extension IDU

-- Check that the transmit and receive multiplexers are switched to the main channel.
-- Power down the extension IDU and disconnect it from the power source.
-- Disconnect all the cables connected to the unit you are changing.
-- Change the unit after checking that the specifications are all the same (number of inputs, impedance,
etc).

-- Reconnect all the cables to the unit.
-- Power up the unit.
-- Check that the alarm LEDs are off.
-- Check that there are no alarms in the LUX50 1320CT software.
6.3.5 - Note on IDU compatibility

It is possible for the two IDUs to have different but compatible configurations for use in the station. In such cases,
you must alter the stations configuration parameters through the LUX50 CT software.

6.4 -- Changing ODU
Only in the case of a 1+0 configuration.
If you are replacing a ODU UX 23 MHz/1008 MHz with a A9400 UX Flat ODU, make sure
that the new ODU is compatible with the operating frequency.
-- Switch--off the IDU connected to the ODU to be changed.

-- Disconnect the IDU--ODU cable.
-- Change the ODU after checking that the characteristics of the two ODUs are the same.
-- Reconnect the IDU--ODU cable.
-- Switch--on the IDU.
-- In the case of a standby ODU, wait two minutes. The reconfiguration takes place automatically.
-- For a main ODU, wait for the URG, NURG and ATT LEDs to start flashing simultaneously. Configure
the ODU from the IDU by pushing the IDU/ODU switch to the IDU position. Wait about two minutes
for the terminal to be reconfigured. The alarm LED should go off and the equipment LEDs should turn
green.
In the event of an error, particularly if the pushbutton is set to the wrong side, re-enter all the station
configurations (see section 5, Commissioning).
-- If you are replacing an 16 QAM UX ODU or an 13 or 15 GHz ODU with RTPC by a A9400UX flat ODU,
you must systematically upgrade the software feature key.


7 -- Changing configurations
Changes to the transmission network may entail upgrading the equipment configurations to satisfy new
requirements. The 9400 UX system is designed to support these changes simply by modifying the software
configuration, or by physically modifying the equipment and its configuration.
Before any change of configuration, disable all remote controls.

For any work on the boards (dismantling/reassembly, change of configuration), the
operator must wear a grounded wrist strap (for example, the 3M Disposable Wrist
Strap, reference 2209).THESE OPERATIONS MUST BE CARRIED OUT ONLY BY
TECHNICIANS, AUTHORIZED BY ALCATEL.
Update the reference documents and the labels in accordance with the new
configuration.
Some of these operations may entail opening the IDU to change the hardware configuration ( 7.6 ). These
changes may lead to:
-- changing the IDU ( 6.3):
S replacing like for like a light or classic IDU (1+0 or basic 1+1) ( 6.3.1),
S replacing a Light IDU with a classic IDU (1+0 only) or vice versa ( 6.3.2),
S replacing like for like a main IDU with multiplexer protection ( 6.7.3),
S replacing like for like an extension IDU ( 6.3.4),
-- changing the ODU ( 6.4),
-- changing from a 4QAM to a 16QAM:
S replace the 4QAM ODU with the 16QAM ODU ( 6.4),
-- changing the channel frequency ( 7.1) :
S changing frequency within the same sub--band ( 7.1.1),
S changing frequency within another sub--band or a different band ( 7.1.2),
-- changing the tributaries ( 7.2) :
S enabling inactive tributaries ( 7.2.1),
S changing the impedance of a tributary (classic IDU) 7.2.2,
S changing the impedance of a tributary (Light IDU) 7.2.3,
S changing the bit rate by software ( 7.2.4),
S changing the bit rate by changing the LAU and LIU tributary boards ( 7.2.5),
-- changing the feature key ( 7.3),
-- supervision
S changing the physical address of the NE ( 7.4),
S upgrading the software ( 7.5),
-- telephone service channel ESC2 (if any) 7.7
S inserting, deleting or changing the telephone number in a station ( 7.7.1),
S hardware configuring service channel 2 ( 7.7.2),

-- service channels ESC 3, 4 and 5 ( 7.8)
S configuring service channels 3, 4 and 5 in the main IDU without ESC extension ( 7.8.1),
S configuring service channels 3, 4 and 5 in the ESC extension unit ( 7.8.2),
S adding an ESC extension IDU ( 7.8.3)
S configuring the service channel and network ports of a Light IDU ( 7.9),
-- configuring remote indication loops ( 7.10),
S main classic IDU ( 7.10.1),
S light IDU ( 7.10.2),
-- changing redundancy configuration ( 7.11)
S upgrading from 1+0 to 1+1 without ESC extension or MUX protection ( 7.11.1),
S upgrading from 1+0 to 1+1 without MUX protection ( 7.11.2),
S upgrading from 1+0 to 1+1 with multiplexer protection ( 7.11.3),
S adding multiplexer protection to a 1+1 configuration ( 7.11.4),
-- changing transmitted power level ( 7.12),
-- changing the HSB coupler polarization ( 7.13).
-- changing SIMM memories board ( 7.14),
-- replacing the following ( 7.15),
S MCU board battery ( 7.15.1),
S IDU fan ( 7.15.2),
S IDU fuses ( 7.15.3).
The presence of the symbol at the start of a procedure indicates that it will involve temporarily
disconnecting the link.

7.1 -- Changing frequency
7.1.1 -- Changing frequency within the same sub-band
A change of frequency within the same sub-band does not entail moving to each station of the link. The change
of frequency on remote station (B) can be applied from local station (A) using the local supervision function, or
from the general supervision terminal.
The frequency of the remote station must always be modified before that of the local
station.
-- Update the information sheet needed to install the station (Appendix 2).
-- Open the CT on station B.
-- Select the Radio tab, then the Frequency tab.
-- For each channel, modify the transmit and receive frequencies (if authorized) and click on Apply
-- Check that the duplex separation between the transmit and receive frequencies is correct.
-- Open the CT on station A
-- Select the Radio tab, then the Frequency tab.
-- For each channel, modify the transmit and receive frequencies (if authorized) and click on Apply.
-- Check that the duplex separation between the transmit and receive frequencies is correct.
-- Download the new configuration.
-- Close the application.
7.1.2 - Changing frequency within another sub-band or a different band
Changing frequency in a different sub-band entails changing the ODU (one or two units according to the
configuration).
Changing frequency in another frequency band also entails changing the antennas and, if necessary, the HSB
coupler.
This means that, in both cases, changing the frequency entails going to each station. The configuration is
changed locally in each station by software.
The following procedures must be carried out on each station:
-- Power down the IDUs.
-- Adjust the outdoor part according to the new configuration (exchanging ODUs and, if necessary,
antennas and the HSB coupler), referring to section 3, Installation.
-- Repeat the commissioning procedures as described in section 5, in particular:
S If there is a change of frequency band, make sure the correct ODU and duplexer are selected.
S In all cases, adjust the Tx and Rx frequencies according to the new frequency band.
-- In a 1+1 HSB configuration, check that the transmit and receive frequencies of the two channels are
the same.
-- Check that there are no alarms.

7.2 -- Changing tributaries
7.2.1 -- Enabling inactive tributaries
-- From the CT, select the Line Interface tab.
-- Activate the required tributaries by changing their signal mode from Disabled to Unframed.
-- Check that there are no alarms on the newly activated tributaries.
7.2.2 -- Changing the tributary impedance (classic IDU)

7.2.2.1 -- Impedances according to the configuration
The tributaries ports are compatible with the G.703 ITU--T standard.
For the n x 2 Mbits tributaries type, the impedance can vary from 75 to 120 and reciprocally only by
configuration.
These different configurations can be carried out by:
-- configuration modification of the L.A.U. boards alone
-- connection of the cable 75 referenced 3CC07885ADAA for the 4 x 2 Mbits with 1.6 / 5.6 connectors
or referenced 3CC07885AEAA for the 8 x 2 Mbits with 1.6 / 5.6 connectors or 3CC07759ADAA for the
4 x 2 Mbits with BNC connectors or 3CC07759AEAA for the 8 x 2 Mbits with BNC connectors whereas
the IDU is forced in 120 .
-- configuration of the L.A.U. boards and the IDU port
-- automatic configuration when connecting the cables in 1+0 or in 1+1 provided that the codified Alcatel
cables are used or that the cabling is respected as defined in Appendix 6.1.1.1.
These configuration possibilities are listed in the table in the chapter 7.2.2.2.
7.2.2.2 -- Configuration of the impedances according to the configuration
During the lifetime of a product, various versions of the material manufacturing are made and to ease the
explanation of configuration modifications of these various versions, we use the following acronyms (IDU ,
IDU ,CABLE , CABLE ).

DEFINITION
IDU
References of the
L.A.U boards References of the main IDU
extension IDU
16X2 NUM 120: 3CC08971AAAx*
16X2 NUM 75: 3CC08971ABAx* EXT FULL 16X2:
LAU 8x2 Mbits/s: 3CC06059AAxx
16X2 H.I 1+1 Full: 3CC08974AAxx*
3CC08971ACAx* EXT 8X2: 3CC08975AAAx*
8X2 NUM: 3CC08972AAAx*
LAU 4x2 Mbits/s: 3CC06058AAxx 4X2 NUM: 3CC08973AAAx* EXT 4X2: 3CC08976AAAx*
* x = A or B
IDU (Z AUTO appears on the connector panel. See Appendix 6.)

References of the
L.A.U boards References of the main IDU
extension IDU
16X2 NUM: 3CC08971AAAC 16X2 NUM: 3CC08974AAAC
LAU 8x2 Mbits/s: 3CC06059ACxx
8X2 NUM: 3CC08972AAAC 8X2: 3CC08975AAAC
LAU 4x2 Mbits/s: 3CC06058AAxx 4X2 NUM: 3CC08973AAAC EXT 4X2: 3CC08976AAAC
CABLE (see details 3.6.5)

Impedance Reference Connector Mbits/s
3CC07885AAxx 1.6/5.6 4X2
3CC07885ABxx 1.6/5.6 8X2
75
3CC07759AAxx BNC 4X2
3CC07759ABxx BNC 8X2
120 3CC07658AAxx distribution bar 8X2
CABLE
Reference Connector Mbits/s
3CC07885ADxx 1.6/5.6 4X2
3CC07885AExx 1.6/5.6 8X2
3CC07759ADxx BNC 4X2
3CC07759AExx BNC 8X2

GENERAL PRINCIPLE
In 1+0 or 1+1 configuration, the impedance modifications from 120 { 75 are made on the L.A.U. boards.
In 1+1 configuration with the multiplexer protection, the main IDU and the extension IDU are positioned in high
impedance and it is the IDU port that is configured in 75 or 120 .
In 34 Mbits (with only the IDU ), the impedance modifications are made on the 3CC06061AAxx board as
indicated in chapter 7.2.2.4.
In n X 2 Mbits/s with IDU , to modify the impedance from 120 { 75 or to get high impedance (HZ) the straps
have to be positioned on the 3CC06059AAxx or 3CC06058AAxx as indicated in chapter 7.2.2.4.
In n X 2 Mbits/s with IDU , the impedance modifications are made automatically when connecting the cables
in 1+0 or in 1+1 provided that the codified Alcatel cables are used or that the cabling is respected as defined
in Appendix 6.1.1.1. It is only when using the 3CC06059ACxx or 3CC06058ABxx board has to be configured
as indicated in chapter 7.2.2.4.
If the IDU is used, it is strongly recommended to change or to remain in automatic

position and it is only when using the cable that it is mandatory to change in
manual configuration.
7.2.2.3 -- Method
-- Power down the main IDU and, if necessary, the extension IDU. Disconnect them from the power
source.
-- Disconnect the tributary ports and engineering service channels between IDUs.
-- Open the IDUs concerned ( 7.6).
-- Set the strap on the LAU board or boards to the 75 ohms, 120 ohms or protection setting as required.
-- Close the units.
-- Reconnect the connectors of the tributaries and service channels to the IDUs.
-- Connect the IDUs to the power source. Power them up again.

7.2.2.4 -- LAU boards for main and extension IDUs
CONFIGURING THE 34 MBIT/S LAU BOARD

Port impedance levels:
-- 34 Mbit/s tributaries must be set to the 75 ohms or protection setting, as indicated in figure 194,
S Tributary positions
2 Mbit/s auxiliary
34 Mbit/s tributary
IN 34 Mbit/s OUT
34 Mbit/s port on connector panel
Positions of impedance straps and ports on the 34 Mbit/s LAU board, 3CC06061AAxx
S Impedance strap positions
34 Mbit/s in 75 ohms 34 Mbit/s in protection mode
Figure 194 - Position of the straps in 34 Mbits/s
2 Mbit/s in 75 ohms symmetrical 2 Mbit/s in 120 ohms 2 Mbit/s in protection mode
Figure 195 - Position of the straps in N x 2 Mbits/s

CONFIGURING THE TRIBUTARIES OF THE N X 2 MBIT/S LAU BOARDS
-- 3CC06059AAxx or 3CC06058AAxx
The tributary port impedances must be set to the 75 ohms, 120 ohms or protection settings, as indicated below:
S Tributary positions
TB101 75 T101
TB10175
TB100
1
TB100
T100 1 Tributary N_ 1/9 T100
1
1 T101
1 120 1 120
1
2
TB102 TB102
1
2
C100 C500 C100 C500
T150 T200 T250 Tributary N_ 1 T250
J101
J101
C150 TB150C200 TB200C250 TB250 TB250
1 75
TB151
TB201
C250
TB251
Tributary N_ 7/15 1 75
TB201
TB251
1
1 120 Tributary N_ 4/12 Tributary N_ 4 1
Tributary N_ 6/14 TB152 TB202 TB252 TB252
1 120
T151 T201 T251

T251
C450 C450
T451 T451
T300 T350 T400 T400
TB300
C300
B350 C350TB400 120C400 12075 TB400 120C400 12075
TB401
1
TB301
TB351T
TB401
Tributary N_ 8/16 1 Tributary N_ 3/11 Tributary N_ 3 1
1
TB450
TB451
Tributary N_ 5/13 75 1
TB450
TB451
TB302 TB352 TB402
111 Tributary N_ 2/10 Tributary N_ 2 TB402 75
T301 T351 T401 TB452 111
T401 TB452
T450
T450
3
3719
201
3719
1
20
P101 P101
3CC06059AAxx 3CC06058AAxx
Figure 196 - Position of the tributaries on the boards
S Strap positions
75 ohms 120 ohms Protection with port
The 75 ohm and 120 ohm settings are marked on the PCB
Figure 197 - Position of the straps in N x 2 Mbit/s

-- 3CC06059ACxx or 3CC06058ABxx
MX101
MX101
T101 T102 T101 T102
1
2
1
2
C101 C101
T103 T104 T105 T105
J101
J101
MX104
MX102
MX103
MX104
T106 T107 T108 T108
T109 T110 T111 T111
T112 T112
MX107
MX105
MX106
MX107
MX108
MX108
T113 T114 T115 T115
S101 S101
CR101 CR102 10 1 CR101 CR102 10 1
MX109 MX109
T116
T116
ON ON
19
19
1
1
37
20
37
20
P101 P101
3CC06059ACxx 3CC06058ABxx
Figure 198 - Position of the tributaries on the board

S101 S101 S101 S101
Auto/120
Auto/120
Auto/120
Auto/120
Auto/Z
Auto/Z
Auto/Z
Auto/Z
Hard
Hard
Hard
Hard
Std
Std
Std
Std
10 10 1
1 10 10 1
1 10 10 1
1 10 1
ON ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON
Z
Spe
Soft
75
Spe
Soft
75
Spe
Soft
75
Spe
Soft
75
HZ
HZ
HZ
HZ
Automatic position (recom- Manual forcing 120 ohms, Manual forcing 75 ohms, (for Manual forcing in protection
mended), standard factory use of cable information) mode with port (for informa-
configuration with IDU tion)
Figure 199 - Position of the switches

The white part of the above drawing indicates the switches position.
The automatic mode position covers all the cases of use of cable (or those respecting the cabling given in
appendix 6.1.1.1) and the 1+1 protected.

7.2.2.5 -- LAU combination boards in access IDUs
CONFIGURING THE 34 MBIT/S LAU COMBINATION BOARD IN ACCESS IDUS
-- Set the straps for the auxiliary 2 Mbit/s portion of the 34 Mbit/s bit rate on board 3CC07443AAxx
S auxiliary 2 Mbit/s tributary port impedence must be set to 75 ohms or 120 ohms.
Note: The impedance of the 34 Mbit/s tributary port must not be modified, it is set to 75 ohms.
34 Mbit/s port on connector panel

120 75
1J101
2 IN 34 Mbit/s OUT
R109
R108
R105
R107 C102 R106
C103
C101
R102
R101
R110
R112
R130R128
R131R127
R111
R113 R124
R114
R126
T101 J102
R119 R125
R121
R103
R123
L101
R120
DH101
R117
R129
R116
MCL
R118
R115
R104
P101 J102 R132
19 1 R122 J103 R133
37 20 P102 J103
3719
20
1
19 1
37 20
Figure 200 - Position of 2 Mbit/s impedance strap and tributary ports on board 3CC07443AAxx

--
Tributary N_ 16
Tributary N_ 14
Tributary N_ 12
Tributary N_ 10
Tributary N_ 2
Tributary N_ 8
Tributary N_ 6
Tributary N_ 4
3CC14295AGAA TQ BJA 01
R112
R115
R101
R102
R104
R109
R103
R105
R106
R107
R108
R110
R111
R113
R114
R116
T101 T102 T103 T104 T105 T106 T107 T108
C101 C102 C103 C104 C105 C106 C107 C108
R119
R117
R120
R122
R121
R118
R125
R126
R127
R128
R123
R124
R130
R132
R129
R131
T109 T110 T111 T112 T113 T114 T115 T116
75 ohms
C109 C110 C112 C116
C111 C113 C114 C115
R133 TB101 R134 TB102 R135 TB103 R136 TB104 R137 TB105 R138 TB106 R139 TB107 R140 TB108
R141 R148 R151 R153 R157 R160 R163
TB122
TB110
TB112
TB120
TB115
TB118
TB124
TB114
R142 R147 R150 R154 R156 R159 R162
L101 TB109 R145
L102 TB111 L103 TB113 L104 TB116 L105 TB117 L106 TB119 L107 TB121 L108 TB123
R143 R146 R149 R152 R155 R158 R161 R164
R166 R168 R170 R174 R176 R180

C125 C126 C127 C128 R172 C129 C130 C131 R178 C132
R171C120
R165C117
R167C118 R144
R179C124
R169C119
R173C121
R175C122
R177C123
R183 TB127 R186 TB130 R190 TB132 R194 TB136 R197 TB138 R201 TB140 R205 TB144 R210 TB148
R182 R185 R189 R195 R198 R203 R206 R209

TB145
TB142
TB147
TB128
TB134
TB126
TB131
TB139
R181 R187 R191 R193 R199 R202 R207 R211
L109 TB125 L110 TB129 L111 TB133 L112 TB135 L113 TB137 L114 TB141 L115 TB143 L116 TB146
R188 R192 R196 R200 R204 R208 R212
R184
C133
R214 R216 R218 R220 R224 R226 R228
C134 C136 C138 C140 C142 R222 C144 C146 C148
R215C135
R217C137
R223 C143
R225C145
R219 C139
R221C141
R227C147
R213
board 3CC06765AAxx
Issue 01 -- December 2005

19 1 19 1
37 20 37 20
19 1 19 1
3719
P101 P102
120 ohms
The 75 ohms and 120 ohms settings are marked on the PCB
37 20 37 20
Positions of straps for N x 2 Mbit/s on board 3CC06765AAxx

-- positions of N x 2 Mbit/s tributaries on board 3CC06765AAxx
P103
Figure 202 - Positions of straps for N x 2 Mbit/s on

Figure 201 - Position of the tributaries on the board
Tributary N_ 9
Tributary N_ 7
Tributary N_ 5
Tributary N_ 3
Tributary N_ 1
Tributary N_ 11
Tributary N_ 15
Tributary N_ 13
On board 3CC06765AAxx, the impedances of the tributary ports must be set to 75 ohms or 120 ohms.
287/374
CONFIGURING THE TRIBUTARIES ON THE N X 2 MBIT/S LAU COMBINATION BOARD IN ACCESS IDUS
7.2.2.6 -- Upgrading IDU tributaries from fixed impedance to auto impedance.
-- Update the information sheet need to install the station (Appendix 2).
-- Power down the IDUs, disconnect them from the power source and disconnect the tributary, service
channel and inter--unit cables.
-- Open the IDUs ( 7.6).
-- Disconnect the plug linking the power supply to the front panel.
-- On the front panel, using a 5 mm flat wrench, remove the spacers securing the LAU boards to be
replaced.
-- Raise and remove the LIU board (held on the lower circuit by two plugs).
-- Remove the LAU board and the corresponding LIU board (linked by ribbon cable).
-- Install the new LAU and LIU boards after checking the impedance configurations.
-- Close the IDUs again.
-- Reconnect the tributary, put a label to identify the new impedance type on the front panel,
-- Reconnect the service channel, inter unit and power supply cables.
-- Repeat the commissioning operations described in section 5, in particular, make sure the following
parameters are updated:
S IDU Main Type
S Capacity
S Tributary status (Unframed or Disabled)
Figure 203 - Indoor unit, positions of LAU and LIU boards and port wiring

7.2.3 - Changing the tributary impedance (Light IDU versions only)
7.2.3.1 -- Methodology
-- Power down the Light IDU.
Disconnect it from the power source.
Note: For the Plug--in IDU, extract it from the BTS.
-- Disconnect the tributary ports and engineering service channel from the IDU.
-- Open the IDU.
-- Set the switches to the 75 ohms or 120 ohms position as required.
-- Close the unit.
-- Reconnect the connectors of the tributaries and service channel to the IDU.
-- Connect the IDU to the power source.
Power up again.
Note: For the Plug--in IDU, simply insert it in the BTS, it will power on automatically.
7.2.3.2 -- Configuring the n x 2 Mbit/s tributaries

The port impedance values of tributaries 1 to 4 can be set to 75 ohms or 120 ohms using switch modules:
-- S105 for channel 1
-- S104 for channel 2,
MX157
C124 CR111 C125 CR112 C126 C127 R118

C128
C133
C134
Y107
C129 MX156
K101 R117
FL105
Y108
R120
R119
C132
T101 T102 T103 T104

C131
CR116 CR117 MX159 L105L106
C130
CR115 S102 S103 S104 S105 S106 S107 C135 C136
L107
CR118
MX160
10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON FL106 C137 L108

S101MX161 MX165 MX166 CR119
L112
MX162
MX163
T105 T106 T107 T108 L109

C145
C144
MX164 J107
R121 L110
CR120
C139 C141 C143 CR121

R122
R123
K102 K103 K104 K105 C138 C142 CR127

MX167 C140 MX170 MX171
CR126
C149
MX169
CR125
CR124
MX168
CR123
CR122
C146 J108
C152
L111
C147 C148 C150
19 1 5 1 C151 C153
S108 9 6
FL107
S109 37 20
6 1
95
19 1 5 1 DS102
37 20 9 6 A101 A102
P101 P102
P103
Figure 204 - Positions of switches on the MCU board

Each switch module has ten switches, as shown below.
--
Switches 5 to 10 are for choosing the 75 or 120 ohms impedance for the
channel concerned.
-- Switches 2, 3, 4 are for choosing the type of ground in 75 ohms
configuration.
-- The combination of settings of switches 1 on S104 and S105 can be used
to identify the type of engineering practice containing the SCU board: switch
1 of S102 and S103 is not used.
Figure 205 - Locating and using the switches on the switch module
OFF OFF
ON ON
75 ohms with electrical ground HDB3_IN_P 120 ohms

HDB3_IN_M TRANSFO
OFF
2 OFF
ground isolated via
ON capacitor
3 OFF
75 ohms with ground isolated via board electrical ground
capacitor
4 OFF
ground isolated from board
OFF
ON
The position of switch 1 should not be altered (reserved for factory use)
75 ohms with ground isolated from the
board
Figure 206 - Configuring the impedance of a tributary
7.2.3.3 -- Identifying the type of engineering practice
The combination of switches 1 on S104 and S105 can be used to identify the type of engineering practice
containing the MCU board. This setting is reserved for Alcatels use.
7.2.4 - Changing bit rate by software
In the classic IDU version, choose, from the list of available bit rates, another bit rate offered by the software
feature key--LAU and LIU board combination (for example, change from a 4x2 Mbit/s configuration to an 8x2
Mbit/s configuration).
In the Light IDU versions, you can change from a 2x2 Mbit/s configuration to a 4x2 Mbit/s configuration (or vice
versa).

This operation can be performed only if the number of tributaries used is less than the number of tributaries
available on the equipment. If this condition is satisfied, you must also have a software feature key that
is compatible with the new bit rate. If not, you must first change the key as described previously in 7.3.
The bit rate of the remote station must always be modified before that of the local sta-
tion.
-- Connect the CT to the station and select menu Configuration/System Settings.
-- Select the new value for Capacity, then click on Apply.
-- Close the System/Settings window.
-- Activate the new tributaries, if necessary, as described in 7.2.
7.2.5 -- Changing bit rate by changing an LAU and LIU tributary boards
These operations concern only classic IDUs.
7.2.5.1 -- Procedure
The case in which a change of bit rate does not involve changing the LAU and LIU boards is described in 7.2.
The table below summarizes the procedures according to the various changes of configuration.
1+0 or 1+1 1+1 CONFIGURATIONS WITH

CONFIGURATIONS MULTIPLEXER PROTECTION
UPGRADE
MAIN IDU MAIN/ EXT. IDU ACCESS IDU (if present)
Change boards:
Change boards:
LAU:
LAU:
3CC06058xxx !3CC06059xxx
4 inputs 3CC06058xxx !3CC06059xxx
LIU: Check the configuration of the new
# LIU:
3CC05818AAxx ! 3CC06026AAxx port impedances (75 or 120 ohms)
8 inputs 3CC05818AAxx ! 3CC06026AAxx
with configuration of main and
and configuration of main IDU:
extension IDUs:
2 Mbit/s tributaries: 75/120 ohms
2 Mbit/s tributaries: protection
Add boards:
Add boards:
LAU: Check the configuration of the new
LAU:
3CC06059Axxx port impedances (75 or 120 ohms)
8 inputs 3CC06059Axxx
LIU:
# LIU: Add link cables for tributaries 1
3CC06119AAxx
16 inputs 3CC06119AAxx to 16 between the access IDU and
with configuration of main and
and main IDU configuration: the main and extension IDUs
extension IDUs:
Change boards:
Change boards: Change the LAU combination
LAU: ! 3CC06061Axxx
LAU: ! 3CC06061Axxx board:
n x 2 Mbit/s LIU: ! 3CC06118AAxx
LIU: ! 3CC06118AAxx ! 3CC07443Axxx
# and configuration of main and
and main IDU configuration: and configuration of access IDU:
34 Mbit/s extension IDUs:
34 Mbit/s: 75 ohms 34 Mbit/s: 75 ohms
34 Mbit/s: protection
2 Mbit/s tributaries: 75/120 ohms 2 Mbit/s tributaries: 75/120 ohms
Change boards:
Change boards:
LAU:
LAU: Change the LAU combination
34 Mbit/s 3CC06061Axxx ! 3CC06058Axxx
3CC06061Axxx ! 3CC06058Axxx board:
# LIU:
LIU: 3CC07443AAxx ! 3CC06765AAxx
n x 2 Mbit/s 3CC06118AAxx ! 3CC05818AAxx
3CC06118AAxx ! 3CC05818AAxx and configuration of access IDU:
(n 4) and configuration of main and
and configuration of main IDU: 2 Mbit/s tributaries: 75/120 ohms
extension IDUs:

1+0 or 1+1 1+1 CONFIGURATIONS WITH
CONFIGURATIONS MULTIPLEXER PROTECTION
UPGRADE
MAIN IDU MAIN/ EXT. IDU ACCESS IDU
Change boards:
Change boards:
LAU:
LAU:
34 Mbit/s 3CC06061Axxx ! 3CC06059Axxx
3CC06061Axxx ! 3CC06059Axxx
# LIU:
LIU:
n x 2 Mbit/s 3CC06118AAxx ! 3CC06026AAxx
3CC06118AAxx ! 3CC06026AAxx
(4 < n 8) and configuration of main and
and configuration of main IDU:
extension IDUs:
2 Mbit/s tributaries: 75/120 ohms Change the LAU combination
b d
board:
Change boards: 3CC07443AAxx ! 3CC06765AAxx
Change boards:
LAU: and configuration of access IDU
LAU:
3CC06061Axxx
34 Mbit/s 3CC06061Axxx
! 2 x 3CC06059Axxx
# ! 2 x 3CC06059Axxx
n x 2 Mbit/s LIU:
LIU:
3CC06118AAxx
(n > 8) 3CC06118AAxx
! 3CC06026AAxx + 3CC06119AAxx
! 3CC06026AAxx + 3CC06119AAxx
and configuration of main and
and configuration of main IDU.
extension IDUs.

7.2.5.2 -- Method
-- If the new configuration requires a change of key, change it first (see 7.3).
-- Power down the IDUs, disconnect them from the power source and disconnect the tributary, service
channel and inter-unit cables.
-- Open the IDUs ( 7.6).
-- Disconnect the plug linking the power supply to the front panel.
-- On the front panel, using a 5 mm flat wrench, remove the spacers securing the LAU boards to be
replaced.
-- Raise and remove the LIU board (held on the lower circuit by two plugs).
-- Remove the LAU board (and for the 34 Mbit/s tributary, disconnect the two subclick plugs).
-- Remove the LAU board and the corresponding LIU board (linked by ribbon cable).
-- For changing from 16 x 2 Mbit/s to 34 Mbit/s, similarly remove the second LAU/LIU board level.
-- Install the new LAU and LIU boards after checking the impedance configurations.
For the 34 Mbit/s version, fit the small daughter board supporting the 1.6/5.6 connectors
(3CC07830AAxx), in place of the top I/O connector (9/16) or ACCESS connector (9/16), fit the daughter
board at the back of the connector panel and secure it by screwing the spacers to the outside of the
connector panel.
-- For the 34 Mbit/s version, remember to connect the two subclick plugs to the LAU board.
-- Close the IDUs again.
-- Reconnect the tributary, service channel, inter unit and power supply cables.
-- Repeat the commissioning operations described in section 5, in particular, make sure the following
parameters are updated:
S IDU Main Type
S Capacity
S Tributary status (Unframed or Disabled)
PSU board
position
R106
R107
C103
R103
R104
R108
R109
J102 R105
R110
R114
1
R112
R113
R111
R116
2
R115 J104 1 R117
R123
R120
2
R122
R119
R124
J103
R121 R118 R125 IN OUT
R126
R127
R128
R129
J105 R130
LAU board position LIU board position T102 T103 T104
(two boards stacked in (two boards stacked in
R132
C105 34 Mbit/s
R131
R134
16 x 2 Mbit/s config) 16 x 2 Mbit/s config) P101 R133R135
3719
201
LAU/LIU link Power supply

cable connection board
Figure 207 - Indoor unit, positions of LAU and LIU boards and port wiring

7.3 -- Changing software feature key
Not applicable in the Light IDU versions.
When changing configuration (1+0, 1+1, etc) and bit rate, you may need to change the feature key if it does not
offer the requisite functionality. The procedure for changing the key is as follows:
-- Connect the CT to the IDU and make sure that the Equipment tab is selected (this is the default).
-- Remove the software feature key from the main IDU and check that the alarm Replaceable Unit
Missing appears on IDU/MAIN/SKU.
-- Fit the new key.
-- Wait for the software feature key alarm to disappear. The alarm will not disappear if the characteristics
of the key are incompatible with the configuration.
7.4 -- Changing a NEs IP Address and/or OSPF Area

7.4.1 - From the station configured as a network element
-- With the CT connected to the NE, select the Configuration/Quick Configuration menu.
-- Navigate through the quick configuration steps and update the IP address and OSPF parameters.
Proceed through the end the Quick Configuration and click Finish.
-- Close the CT.
-- Wait (about two minutes) for the NE to reset its management processor in order to apply the new IP
address to the NE.
-- Notify the network supervisor of the change of the NEs IP address.

7.5 -- Upgrading software (from 946LUXn to 946LUXn+1)
On any change of onboard software in the equipment, consider updating the

installation form in Appendix 2 and, if necessary, notify Alcatel customer service.
7.5.1 - Installing 946LUX50 1320CT

-- If not already done, install the 1320CT Craft Terminal software on the PC to be used as LUX50 Craft
Terminal, as described in section 4.1.
7.5.2 - Upgrading from 946LUX12 to 946LUX50

946LUX50 software requires the main IDUs MCU board to be fitted with an 8 Mbytes flash memory and 4
Mbytes of RAM (see 7.14).
If the LUX12 IDU to be upgraded to LUX50 does not comply with these requirements, IDU upgrade procedure
described in either 7.5.2.1 or 7.5.2.2 must be executed. Otherwise, procedure described in 7.5.2.3 can
be used instead.
For any of the above cases, procedure described in 7.5.2.4 needs to be executed afterwards in order to have
the NE networking parameters configured.
7.5.2.1 -- Replacing main IDU
-- Replace the LUX12 main IDU with a LUX50 main IDU, following the procedure described in 6.2. At
the end of the operation, the LUX12 configuration coming from ODU is automatically converted to
LUX50 format, and applied to both IDU and ODU.
-- Connect the LUX50 1320CT to the IDUs F interface using F interface adapter cable.
-- Configure the IDU network parameters as described in 7.5.2.4.
7.5.2.2 -- Replacing main IDU memories

-- Open the cover of the main IDU as instructed in 7.6.
-- Install the new memories (including LUX50 flash memory) as shown in figure 204, 7.14.
-- Close the main IDU cover, reversing the order of operations on opening.
-- Reconnect all the cables to the unit and the software key.
-- Configure the IDU from the IDU by setting the IDU/ODU switch to the IDU position. Wait about two
minutes for the terminal to be reconfigured. The alarm LEDs should go off and the equipment LEDs
should turn green. At the end of the operation, the LUX12 configuration coming from IDU is
automatically converted to LUX50 format, and applied to both IDU and ODU.

7.5.2.3 -- Downloading 946LUX50 software
Reminder: this procedure can only be used if the LUX12 IDU to be upgraded to LUX50
is already set up with an 8 Mbytes flash memory and 4 Mbytes of RAM.
Do not use this procedure on IDUs manufactured prior to November 2000. Check the
IDU date.
-- Connect the LUX12 Craft Terminal to the LUX12 IDU to be upgraded to LUX50.
-- Using Software downloading application (refer to 4.6 in LUX12/LUX40 User Manual), upgrade the
IDU 360 software to LUX50. The LUX50 IDU 360 software file compatible with LUX12 software
download application is available at the following location on LUX50 CD--ROM Ref 3CC14311AxAA:
<CD--ROM Drive>:\V_N50\3CC07767.bin
-- At the end of the operation, the LUX12 configuration is automatically converted to LUX50 format, and
applied to both IDU and ODU.
7.5.2.4 -- Configuring IP address, OSPF and NMS

Due to the fact that LUX12 network management relies on RQ2, while LUX50 uses SNMP, network parameters
need to be configured on a LUX50 IDU following a migration from LUX12.
-- Open 1320CT application and log on the NE as described in 4.3.3.
-- Configure the NE IP address (see 4.8.2.2).
-- Configure OSPF area (see 4.8.2.4).
-- Configure point--to--point interfaces (see 4.8.2.5).
Do not use this procedure on IDUs manufactured prior to November 2000. Check the
IDU date.
-- Connect the LUX40 Craft Terminal to the LUX40 IDU to be upgraded to LUX50.
-- Using Software downloading application (refer to 4.6 in LUX12/LUX40 User Manual), upgrade the
IDU 360 software to LUX50. The LUX50 IDU 360 software file compatible with LUX40 software
download application is available at the following location on LUX50 CD--ROM Ref 3CC14311AxAA:
<CD--ROM Drive>:\V_N50\3CC07767.bin
-- At the end of the operation, the LUX40 configuration is automatically converted to LUX50 format, and
applied to both IDU and ODU.
-- Open 1320CT application and log on the NE as described in 4.3.3.

-- Follow indications provided in 4.4: Software download toward NE.

7.6 -- Opening an IDU
A classic IDU is opened as described in the photos in Figure 208 and the procedure below.
The procedure for opening a Light IDU is the same, except the step shown in photo , since this unit does not
have a Display panel.
-- Isolate the power supply and disconnect all the cables to the IDU.
-- Undo the side screws on the unit (screws securing the fixing brackets (Photo ) and the metal plates
concealing the fixing brackets mounting position on the operation panel).
-- Using a 5 mm flat wrench, undo the connector fixing nuts on the operation panel of the IDU
(Photo ).
Dismantling one of the fixing brackets Dismantling the connector securing screws on the Operation panel
(This phase does not concern the Light IDU version)
Using a fixing bracket to release the cover Opening the cover
Figure 208 - Opening an IDU
-- Slide the cover away from the connector panel towards the operation panel using the fixing brackets
as a lever to disengage the cover from the connector panel (Photos and ).
-- To reassemble, proceed in the reverse order.

7.6.1 -- Indoor unit configuration
UNIT CONFIGURATION ITEM BOARDS
1 or 1 PSU
Light IDU 1+ 0
2 Light MCU
1 PSU
3 MCU
4 LIU 4x2 Mbit/s

LIU 8x2 Mbit/s
(Classic) LIU 34 Mbit/s
All configurations
Main IDU 5 16x2 Mbit/s extension LIU
6 LAU 4x2 Mbit/s

LAU 8x2 Mbit/s
LAU 34 Mbit/s
7 16x2 Mbit/s extension LAU
1 PSU
1+0 ESC extension 8 ESC extension SCU
9 ESC daughter boards
1 PSU
basic 1+1 8 ESC extension 1+1 SCU
9 ESC daughter boards
1 PSU
Extension IDU
8 1+1 protection MUX SCU
9 ESC daughter boards:
4 4x2 Mbit/s LIU

8x2 Mbit/s LIU
1+1 with multiplexer protection 34 Mbit/s LIU
5 16x2 Mbit/s extension LIU
6 4x2 Mbit/s LAU

8x2 Mbit/s LAU
34 Mbit/s LAU
7 16x2 Mbit/s extension LAU
10 16x2 Mbit/s LAU combination

Access IDU 1+1 with MUX protection
34 Mbit/s LAU combination

Fans omitted if high efficiency
power supply option chosen
1 DRAM memory
2 Flash memory
Connector panel
Light IDU
Flash memory
Fans
1
3
7 5
6 4
Connector panel
Main (Classic) IDU
10
Connector panel
Access IDU
Fans
1 9
8
7 5
9
6 4
Connector panel
Extension IDU
Figure 209 - Layout of boards in the indoor units

7.7 -- Telephone service channel
7.7.1 - Deleting, inserting or changing telephone numbers
-- Open the CT and select the menu Configuration/System Settings and click on the Overhead tab.
S To cancel use of the telephone on the IDU, check the Disabled option and click Apply.
S To enable use of the telephone on the IDU, make sure that the Enabled button is checked. If not,
click it to activate it.
S Enter the telephone number and then click Apply.
-- Close the System Settings window.
7.7.2 - Configuring the ESC 2

ESC2 can be configured on the main IDU, by switches (see figures 210 and 211) on the digital MCU--NUM
board (3CC06088AAxx, for an IDU/ODU digital link), or on the analogue MCU board (3CC05714AAxx for an
analogue IDU/ODU link), in accordance with the table below:
The MCU--NUM has two main variants:
--The variant 3CC06088AAAN
--The other variants 3CC06088AAAx where x is a letter of the alphabet between A and M.
The variant reference is indicated on a label near the power supply under the LIU daughter board. According
to the variant the switches S504 to S515 are different:
On the variant 3CC06088AAAN, the angle between the 2 positions of the switch is about 300.
n the variant 3CC06088AAAx (with x different from N), this angle is only 45.
SETTING SETTING
3CC06088AAAX 3CC06088AAAN
SWITCH CHARACTERISTIC
S504 (S104*),
ESC 2 level audio input -13 dBm 0 dBm --13 dBm 0 dBm
S505 (S105*)
S506 (S106*),
ESC 2 level audio output 0 dBm +4 dBm 0 dBm +4 dBm
S507 (S107*)
* for an IDU/ODU analogue link
ESC2 is available on the AUDIO 1 and AUDIO 2 connectors.

NOTE: If you want a TTL interface with E&M (TRON/RON) type signalling, close swap SW517 (SW115*).

7.8 -- Hardware configuration of service channels 3, 4 and 5 (classic and
extension IDU)
The 9400 UX can have up to five ESCs (except in a 2 x 2 Mbit/s configuration in which only three are possible);
for more details, refer to 2.3. Only ESC1 (NMS 1 and NMS 2 connectors) cannot be configured manually.
7.8.1 -- Configuring ESC 3, 4 and 5 in the main IDU without ESC extension
-- Update the information form needed to install the station (Appendix 2).
ESC3, ESC4 and ESC5 can be configured on the main IDU, by switches (see Figures 210 and 211) located
on the digital MCU--NUM board (3CC06088AAxx, for a digital IDU/ODU link), or on the analogue MCU board
(3CC05714AAxx for an analogue IDU/ODU link), in accordance with the following table:
SETTING SETTING
3CC06088AAAX 3CC06088AAAN
S510 (S110*) ESC 3 port Clock inversion No inversion Inversion No inversion Inversion
S511 to S515 V11
ESC 3 port Format V11 V28 V28
(S111* to S115*)
* for an analogue IDU/ODU link

S service channels ESC 3, ESC 4 and ESC 5, are available on the ESC EXT connector.
7.8.1.1 -- V.11 { V.28 conversion on ESC N_ 3
-- Power down the main IDU and disconnect it from the power source.
-- Open the unit.
-- Set switches S511 (S111*) to S515 (S115*) on the MCU board to the required position (see 7.7.2).
-- Set switch S510 (S110*) according to the required clock polarity (see 7.7.2).
-- Close the unit.
-- Reconnect the main IDU to the power source and power up again.

3CC14295AGAA TQ BJA 01
SW115
S107
S108
CR102
CR101 L101
Figure 210 - Locations of switches on the MCU board with digital IDU/ODU link
A1 6
P101
C101
Figure 211 - Locations of switches on the MCU board with analogue IDU/ODU link
CR103 CR102
CR101
CR108 L102
L101
1
J101
B1 A1 6
P101
SW517
S105 S106
CR106
CR105
C101
6
S507
CR103
S508
CR108 L102
1
J101
1 B1
Q101 CR104
CR106
CR105
MX101 MX102
6
2
3
1
SW102SW103
1
CR107 Q101 CR104 MX101 MX102
SW104
C108
C109C103
SW101
C107
2
3
1
C102 SW102SW103
MX108
SW104
CR107
C108
C109C103
S505 S506
SW101
C107
SW105 Y103 MX104 MX103 MX105 C102
C110
MX108
C113 SW105 MX104 MX103 MX105
C110
Y103
POSITIONS OF SWITCHES ON THE MCU--NUM BOARD (DIGITAL): 3CC06088AAxx
MX109 C113
POSITIONS OF SWITCHES ON THE MCU BOARD (ANALOGUE): 3CC05714AAxx

C114
C115 SW108
S104
MX110 MX109
C114
C121
MX112 C115 SW108

C118 C119 C120 MX110
C122
C117
C116
C121
R101
R102
R103 R105 R107 C118 C119 C120 MX112
C122
C117
SW109
C116
MX114
R101
R102
R104 R106 R108 R103 R105 R107
MX114 SW109
R104 R106 R108
S504
MX115
C123MX116 MX117 MX118 MX119
C127
MX115
C123MX116 MX117 MX118 MX119
C127
R112
C125 C124
C126CR110
R112
R109
R110 R111 R113 R114R115 SW110 CR113 C124
CR112 C125 C126CR110 R113 R114
C130
T102 T1041 SW112 R109

R110 R111 R115 SW110 CR113
C130
MX120 Q102C128 C129SW111 T102 T1041 CR112 SW112
CR111 CR114 MX120 Q102C128 C129SW111
CR111 CR114
1 T101 T103 MX121 1 T101 T103
MX121
C134 C132
C134 C132
S103
MX122
Issue 01 -- December 2005

T105 T1071 MX123 MX122 S103
C131 T105 T1071 MX123
C139 SW113
MX126
C139 SW113
C131
MX126
1 T106 T108 1 T106 T108
C133
S106 S107 SW114 CR115
C140
S104 S105 C133

S106 S107 SW114 CR115
C140
SW115 CR116 S104S105
S108 SW115 CR116
MX127 S108
1 1 1 1 MX127
MX128
1 1 1 1
1 MX130 1 MX128 MX130
C141 MX129 MX129
C141
LS101 LS101
C143
C143
MX134 MX135 MX136 MX134 MX135 MX136
J115
J115
MX142 MX142
Y105 MX144 Y105 MX144
C151
C151
J106 J106
C155
C155
J108
J108
C154
S109
C154
S110
S109
S110
MX148 MX149 CR120 1 1 MX148 MX149 SW118
CR120 1 1 SW118
C157
C160
SW119 CR123
C157
C160
Y106 SW119 Y106 SW120
CR123
SW120 C159 CR124
C167
R121
R125
C170
CR125
C159 CR122
SW121
CR124
C167
CR122
R121
R125
C170
CR125
SW121
MX150
C168
R122
C169
R123
R124
C171
C172
R126
MX150
C168
R122
C169
R123
R124
C171
C172
R126
MX158 S111 MX154
R132C178
C180R130
R136R131
MX154
R134C176
MX158 S111
1 1 1 1 1
MX160
CR130
R132C178
C180R130
R136R131
Y107
R134C176
MX161
1 1 1 1 1
MX160 S112 S113 S114 S115
C175
CR130
Y107 MX161 R129 C179
SW123SW122
S112 S113 S114 S115
C175
R129 C179
C182
R135
R142 C181C177
SW123SW122
C182
R135
R142 C181 C177
R133 MX164
R137
R133 MX164 CR133
R139
MX168
R137
SW132
CR133 MX167 C186
I/O connector on connector panel

MX168 R138
R139
SW132
MX167 R138 C186 CR136
C191
CR136 C185 R140 FL109 Q106 SW124
SW124 Q105
C191
C185 R140
C188
Q105 FL109 Q106
R143
C188
MX172 MX173 MX174 MX175 MX176 MX177 K102
R143
MX172 MX173 MX174 MX175 MX176 MX177 K102 CR142
FL110SW133 SW134
R146
R147
FL110SW133 CR142 P103
SW134 1 P104
R146
R147
R148
P103 P104 5 1 13 1
1 2
R148
5 1 13 1 9 6 J113 25 14
2 CR143
CR144
9 6 J113 25 14 5 1 1
CR143
CR144 9 6 P108 2
5 1 1 50
9 6 P108 2
50
302/374
connector
connector
panel
I/O
on
S509
S514
S511
S512
S513
S115
S510
S515
S109
S112
S113
S111
S114
S110
7.8.2 -- Configuring ESC 3, 4 and 5 in the ESC extension unit
-- service channels 3, 4 and 5 can be configured in the extension IDU, on the SCU board and the
daughter boards that it supports.
7.8.2.1 -- Configuring service channels 3 and 4
ESC3 position
ESC4 position
Figure 212 - Positions of service channels 3 and 4 in the ESC extension unit
ESC 3 and ESC 4 can be customized via daughter boards ESC 1 to ESC 5 described below. These boards
are installed on the SCU board in the extension unit.

ESC 1 board: 3CC05710AAAA & 3CC05710AAAB (64 kbit/s G703 point-to-point)
This ESC board is an add-on board which will support a 64 kbit/s ESC with codirectional interface.
The ESC board has two variants:
--The variant 3CC05710AAAA
--The variant 3CC05710AAAB.
Switch positions (customizing ESCs 3 and 4):
Figure 213 - Switch Positions onboard 3CC05710AAxx (Botttom view)
SETTING SETTING
3CC05710AAAA 3CC05710AAAB
Synchronization
Channel 2 bit Channel 2 byte Channel 2 bit Channel 2 byte
S201 (not active on this
(special) (Normal) (special) (Normal)
equipment)
Channel 1 bit Channel 1 byte Channel 1 bit Channel 1 byte
S202 Synchronization
(special) (Normal) (special) (Normal)

ESC 2 board: 3CC05711AAxx (analogue ESC, point-to-multipoint or point-to-point)
The ESC board 3CC05711AAxx supports a point-to-point or point-to-multipoint type analogue ESC.
The ESC board has two variants (refer to the label):
--The variant 3CC05711AAAB .
Figure 214 - Switch Positions onboard 3CC05711AAxx (botttom view)
The underside of the board with the settings can be accessed only when removed.
SETTING SETTING
S501 Output level +4 dBm 0 dBm +4 dBm 0 dBm

TTL interface with E&M
S502 disabled Enabled disabled Enabled
type configuration
S503 Input level 0 dBm -13 dBm 0 dBm -13 dBm
ESC type Point-to- Point-to- Point--to-- Point--to--
S504
multipoint point multipoint point

ESC 3 board: 3CC05712AAxx(64 kbit/s V11 or V28 point-to-point)
The ESC board 3CC05712AAxx supports a V11 or V28 compliant ESC operating at 64 kbit/s.
This ESC board has two variants (refer to the label):
Figure 215 - Switch Positions onboard 3CC05712AAxx (botttom view)
SETTING SETTING
S201, S203, S205,

S208, S210, S212,
Operator interface type V11 V28 V11 V28
S214, S215, S216,
S220, S222
No No
Transmitted clock Inversion inversion Inversion
S206 inversion
inversion (*) (*)
(*) (*)
No No
Inversion Inversion
S207 Received clock inversion inversion inversion
(*) (*)
(*) (*)

(*)
no inversion: Data bit n bit n+1
D
Clock
2D
inversion: Data bit n bit n+1
D
Clock
2D
Figure 216 - Clock and Data signals onboard 3CC05712AAxx
CAUTION:
The recommended position is the clock inversion for V11 and no inversion for V28:
S inversion of S206 in V11, 64 Kbits and no inversion of S207.
S inversion of S207 in V28, 64 Kbits and no inversion of S206.

ESC 4 board: 3CC05713AAxx
The 3CC05713AAxx ESC board is an optional daughter board that can be installed on the extension IDU SCU
board for configurations with engineering service channels 3 and 4.
It supports a V11 compliant digital asynchronous engineering service channel:
-- a ESC (9.6 kbit/s maximum), point-to-point (PP1) or point-to-multipoint (PM1 and PM2), or
-- two engineering service channels (4.8 kbit/s maximum), the first point-to-point (PP1A) or
point-to-multipoint (PM1A, PM1B), the second point-to-point (PP2A).
Figure 217 - Switch positions onboard 3CC05713AAxx

Switch positions
SETTING SETTING
Point-to- Point-to-
S101 Link type Point-to-point Point-to-point
multipoint multipoint
1x 2x 1x 2x
S102 V11 bit rate (9600 bit/s (4800 bit/s (9600 bit/s (4800 bit/s
max.) max.) max.) max.

ESC 5 board: 3CC06482AAxx
The engineering service channel board 3CC06482AAxx is an optional daughter board that is installed on the
extension IDUs SCU ESC mother board for configurations with engineering service channels 3 and 4.
It supports V28 compliant digital asynchronous engineering service channels,
-- a ESC (9.6 kbit/s maximum), point-to-point (PP1) or point-to-multipoint (PM1, PM2), or
-- two ESC (4.8 kbit/s maximum), the first point-to-point (PP1A) or point-to-multipoint (PM1A, PM1B), the
second point-to-point (PP2A).
Figure 218 - Switch positions onboard 3CC06482AAxx
Switch positions
SETTING SETTING
Point-to- Point-to- Point-to-

S101 Link type Point-to-point
multipoint point multipoint
1x 2x 1x 2x
S102 V28 bit rate (9600 bit/s (4800 bit/s (9600 bit/s (4800 bit/s
max.) max.) max.) max.

7.8.2.2 -- Configuring ESC 5
The two possible configurations of ESC 5 (V11 or V28) are obtained by setting switches on the SCU board, of
which there are several versions (see page 303).
For the SCU board with digital IDU/ODU link, there are two main variants. The label on the board gives the
variant of the board.
According to the variant the switches S502 to S511 are different:
On the variant 3CC07794AAAN or 3CC07797AAAN, the angle between the 2 positions of the switch is about
300.
n the other ones (3CC07794AAAx or 3CC07797AAAx with x different from N), this angle is only 45.
SETTING SETTING
3CC07794AAAx or 3CC07794AAAH or
3CC07797AAAx (xH) 3CC07797AAAH
S502 to S505
(S102* to S105*)
and S507 to ESC 5 format V11 V28 V11 V28
S510
(S107* to S110*)
Transmit and receive clock No No
S511 (S111*) Inversion Inversion
inversion on ESC 5 port inversion inversion
* on SCU with analogue ODU/IDU link
S510 S508 S505 S503

S509 S507 S504 S502
S511
Figure 219 - Switch positions on the SCU board wiith digital IDU/ODU link

S110 S108 S105 S103
S109 S107 S104 S102
S111
Figure 220 - Switch positions on the SCU board wiith analog IDU/ODU link
7.8.2.3 -- Method
-- Power down the extension IDU and disconnect it from the power source.
-- Open the unit.
-- If the change entails changing the ESC 3 and/or ESC 4 daughter board, change as necessary.
-- Configure ESC 3 and/or ESC 4:
Configure the replaced board or modify the configuration of the existing board (see 7.8.2).
-- Configure ESC 5:
Set switches S502 (S102*) to S505 (S105*) and S507 (S107*) to S510 (S110*) of the SCU board to the
V11 or V28 setting according to the required configuration. Set switch S511 (S111*) according to the
required clock polarity (see 7.8.2).
-- Close the unit.
-- Reconnect the extension IDU to the power source and power up again.
-- If a change has been made to the ESC 3 and/or ESC 4 daughter boards, connect the CT and run the
Configuration/Quick Config procedure. (see 4.8.5).
-- In Quick Config Step 1, make sure that the appropriate values are selected for ESC3 and ESC4.
-- Run Quick Config until the end in order to apply these new values to the NE.
7.8.3 - Adding an ESC extension IDU
If adding an ESC unit, the positions of ESC 3 and 4 may be fitted with daughter boards.
If the station has back-to-back terminals, transmission of the ESCs from one terminal
to the other is performed in baseband and the extension units of each of the terminals
must be fitted with daughter boards.
-- Do not connect the extension IDU to the power source.
-- Open the extension IDU to be added and check the configuration of the engineering service channels
(ESCs 3 and 4 daughter boards, SCU boards for ESC 5). If the configuration needs to be changed:

ESC 3 and/or ESC 4 configuration:
Configure the replaced board or modify the configuration of the existing board (see 7.8.2).
ESC 5 configuration:
Set switches S502 (S102*) to S505 (S105*) and S507 (S107*) to S510 (S110*) on the SCU board to the
V11 or V28 setting according to the required configuration. Set switch S511 (S111*) according to the
required clock polarity (see 7.8.2).
-- Close the unit.
-- Install the unit and connect it to the main IDU (see 3.6).
-- Connect the extension IDU to the power source and power up again.
-- Connect the CT and run the Configuration/Quick Config procedure. (see 4.8.5).
-- If the previous NE configuration was 1 + 0, change it to 1 + 0EXT. In all other cases leave it unchanged.
-- Change the ESC3 and ESC4 values to the appropriate value.
-- Run Quick Config until the end in order to apply these new values to the NE.

7.9 -- Configuring ESC3 and the NMS ports (Light IDU versions)
7.9.1 - Switch positions
The light 9400 UX has:
-- one engineering service channel, ESC3,
-- two network management ports, NMS1 and NMS2.
For more details, refer to 2.3.
These ports can be set to V.11 format (factory configuration) or V.28 format using the switch modules on the
MCU board installed in the IDU (see Figure 204) :
-- S101 configures ESC3,
-- S106 configures the NMS1 port,
-- S107 configures the NMS2 port.
Switch 9 reverses the clock

Clock state Switch state
OFF OFF
Forward OFF
ON Reversed ON
ON
V.11 configuration (factory set) V.28 configuration
Figure 221 - Selecting the V.11 or V.28 configuration and clock direction
7.9.2 -- Methodology
V.11 { V.28 conversion of ESC3, NMS1 and NMS2
-- Power down the IDU and disconnect it from the power source.
-- Open the unit (see 7.6).
-- Set switch modules S101, S106 and S107 on the MCU board, with switches 1 to 8 set as described
in 7.9.1.
-- To alter the polarity of the clock, adjust switch 10 on the same switch modules (see 7.9.1)
-- Close the unit.
-- Reconnect the IDU to the power source and power up again.

7.10 -- Configuring remote indication loops
7.10.1 - Classic (main) IDU remote indication
The equipment has eight remote indication loops configured as normally open (see 2.4). These loops can
be configured as normally closed by altering the swap configuration on the MCU board according to the drawing
below.
MX112
MX119
SW111
P101
CR122
MX104 MX103 MX105

CR115
CR111
SW110
MX176 MX177
MX129
SCU board with digital SCU board with analog J108 CR108
L102
CR112
P104
MX161
CR116
MX123
L101
IDU/ODU link IDU/SCU link
CR113
MX136
MX130
CR106
SW101 SW103
SW108
SW119
SW118
SW132 C151 C130
C109
C103
MX114
SW120
J115
SW112
SW102
21
C179
14
1
TS8 : SW528 TS8 : SW124
CR123
1
1
CR125 2
S103
6
6
CR114
3
1
MX164
SW124
K102
MX154
C110 C104
SW109
TS7 : SW529 TS7 : SW125
CR124
9
9
C105
5
5
C111
SW125
CR109
CR134CR128
MX155MX156 MX157
TS6 : SW530 TS6 : SW126
MH101
P102
J116
K103
J118
CR137
CR131
5
5
9
9
MX106
1
1
SW126
P105
TS5 : SW531 TS5 : SW127
C135
SW127
MX165 MX166
SW107 S102
SW128
6
6
1
1
MX113
K104
TS1 : SW532 TS1 : SW128 C112

C106
SW129
L103
C137
SW130
TS2 : SW533 TS2 : SW129
C136
J117
SW131
S101
CR129
CR135
K105
C138
TS4 : SW534 TS4 : SW130 CR138
CR132 Y101
DS101
MX111
5
5
L106
9
9
TS3 : SW535 TS3 : SW131

FL108
FL107
C161
MX138
J110
J105 MX131
Y102
P106
C142
SW106
MX162
MX170
C148
C753 C173
MX145C153
FL101 MX124
FL102
CR119 R117 R116
6
6
L107
J103
J104
1
1
K101 CR121
R141 MX163 L105 DS102

L114
C189
CR117 MX139
SW116
C174 CR126 L111
C183
Q103
L112
C190
Q104
C166 R120 C163
FL105
C184 J109
MX146
MX132 Y104
C193
MX133
MX171
CR127 MX159
R118
CR139
DS103
C192
CR140
MX153 L109
R119
MX107
FL111
SW117
R144
L108
J112C752
C162
R145
A101 MX143
MX147 C156
C152 J107
CR118 MX137
A102 L113 R127 C144 MX125

R128
C164
L104
72
72
L110 FL103
C158
FL106
FL104 J102
MX151
C165 TB102TB101
Figure 222 - Positions of swaps on the MCU board
To obtain normally closed remote indication loops, you must alter the positions of the soldered links on swaps
SW 124 to SW 131 or SW 528 to SW 535 as described below.
Loop type Unactivated Alarm condition Swap position
RS input RS input
Normally open Prewired swap
RS input RS input Change swap position : 2

Normally closed 1) cut strap 1
2) insert new strap

7.10.1.2 -- Method
Changing the configuration of remote indication loops 1 to 8 entails moving soldered links on the MCU board.
-- Disconnect all tributary, service channel and inter-unit cables.
-- Open the main IDU (see 7.6).
-- Alter the swap positions on the MCU board.
-- Close the unit.
-- Connect the new remote indications.
-- Reconnect the main IDU to power source and power up again.
-- Declare the names of the new RIs with the CT by selecting the External Points tab. For each input
port, a dedicated alarm profile can be used.
-- Check the operation of the remote indication loops by verifying that their color changes from green to
yellow, blue, brown, or red (depending on the alarm profile) when the corresponding loop is active.

7.10.2 - Light IDU versions remote indication
The equipment has eight remote indication loops set as normally open loops (see 2.4).
These loops can be set to normally closed operation by adding 0 ohm resistors to the MCU board as shown
in the diagram below.
B1
J101 A1 R101
R102
R103
R104
R105
Y101
C101 R102 R104 R105
R106MX101
MX102
MX103
MX104
MX105 MX106
MX107
R109 R111
R107R108 R110 J102
MX108
MX109
MX110
MX111
MX119
MX114
MX115
MX118
MX120
MX112 MX113
R113
R112 R115 R116
R114
MX116 MX117
MX121
SW101 SW102
CR101 SW103 CR102
R106
MX124
MX125
CR103
MX127 MX128
MX126 CR104 MX129
MX122 MX123
R108 R110
J104J103
Y102 1
MX131
MX133
MX134
MX135
72
MX132
1
MX130
MX136
C107
72
MX141
C104 C106
C105
MX139
C102 MX137MX138
FL102
CR106 L101
C110
C103 C113 FL101

J106
MX152MX143
C108 CR105 FL103 DS101

J105 C112 Y103 L102
MX140 C116
C111
FL105MX158MX146
C114 CR107
MX144 C119
C109C117 Y104 MX145
L103
C122
MX142
C115 CR108
MX147
MX154
CR109
CR110 C118
MX148
MX149
MX150
MX151
C120 Y106 MX155

MX153
R115
MX157
CR113 Y105 C121L104

CR114
R112
C123
C128
FL104
C133
C134
C124
CR111
C125
CR112
C126 C127 Y107 R118
C129MX156
R119
R120
C132
Y108 K101 R117

C131T101 T102 T103 T104 CR116 CR117 L106
L105
C145 CR118
MX160
MX159
L107
CR115 C130S102 S103 S104 S105 S106 S107

S101 C135C136
10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1
ON ON ON ON ON FL106 C137 L108
RI1 : R115 RI4 : R105 RI7 : R104
MX162
ON
MX169 MX163
ON
MX161 MX165 CR119
MX166 L112
C144
T105 T106 T107 T108 L109

CR120
RI2 : R102 RI5 : R108 RI8 : R106

MX164 J107R121 L110
R122
R123
C139C141
C143 CR121
CR126
MX167K102 K103 C140C142

K104 K105 C138 CR127
CR124
CR125
MX171
CR123
MX170
CR122
C149
C152
C146 MX168
RI6 : R112
L111
RI3 : R110
C150 J108
C147 C148
FL107
19 1 5 1 C151 C153
S108 S109 37 20 9 6
61
19 1 5 1
95
DS102
37 P101 20 9P102
6 A101
A102
P103
Figure 223 - Locations of housekeeping loop resistors on the MCU board
Loop type Unactivated Alarm condition
RS input RS input
Normally open
RS input RS input
Normally closed

7.10.2.2 -- Method
To change the configuration of the remote indication loops 1 to 8 to normally closed loops you must fit 0 ohm
SMC resistors to the MCU board.
-- Disconnect all tributary, service channel and inter--unit cables (See 3.7.1).
-- Open the IDU (see 7.6).
-- Solder zero value SMC resistors to the MCU board, in the positions shown in Figure 223.
-- Close the unit.
-- Connect the new remote indication loops directly to the ESC3 / ALARM I/O connector or via a cross
connect panel.
-- Reconnect the IDU to the power source and power up again.
-- Declare the names of the new remote indication loops with the CT by selecting the External Points
tab. For each input port, a dedicated alarm profile can be used.
-- Check the operation of the remote indication loops by verifying that their color changes from green to
yellow, blue, brown, or red (depending on the alarm profile) when the corresponding loop is active.
7.11 -- Changing redundancy configurations

7.11.1 - Changing from 1+0 to 1+1 without ESC extension or MUX protection
-- Install the extension IDU.
-- Connect the tributary, engineering service channel and inter-IDU cables (See 3.7.1).
-- Connect the extension IDU to the power source.
-- If necessary, change the software key on the main IDU (1+1 max).
-- Install the new ODU configuration, referring to section 3: ODU, HSB coupler, antenna, extension IDU
link cable.
-- Recommission the station and, if necessary, the link (section 5).

7.11.2 - Upgrading from 1+0 to 1+1 without multiplexer protection
-- Power down the main IDU.
-- Install the extension IDU (check the ESC configuration, see 7.8.2).
-- Connect the tributary, service channel and inter-unit cables (see 3.7.1).
-- Connect the extension IDU to the power source.
-- Install the new ODU configuration referring to section 3: ODU, HSB coupler, antenna, link cable with
extension IDU.
-- Recommission the station and, if necessary, the link (section 5).
7.11.3 - Upgrading from 1+0 to 1+1 with multiplexer protection and access IDU
The IDU box can be of two different types. Both kinds are defined in 7.2.2.2 . Please refer
to this paragraph to identify your boxes;
The use of the access IDU requests to have specific LAU and LIU selection straps. These
straps depend on the kind of IDU available. (see 7.2.2.4 for more details)
-- Power down the main IDU. Disconnect it from the power source.
-- Disconnect the tributary, service channel and inter-unit cables.
-- Open the main IDU, and the access IDU.
-- If there is one, open the extension IDU, remove the customizing boards and install them in the new
extension IDU.
-- Check that the number of physical ports on the main and extension IDUs are the same.
-- On the LAU boards of the extension IDU, set the tributary impedance selection straps to Protection
with port for type n IDU or are set to Manual forcing in protection mode with port for type o IDU.
-- On the LAU boards of the main IDU, set the tributary impedance selection straps to Protection with
port for type n IDU or are set to Manual forcing in protection mode with port for type o IDU.
-- On the LAU combination board of the access IDU, check the positions of the impedance selection
straps.
-- Close the units.
-- Reconnect the main and extension IDUs to the power source.
link cable.
-- Reconnect the tributary, service channel and inter--unit cables (see 3.7.2).
-- Recommission (section 5).

7.11.4 - Adding MUX protection with access IDU to a 1+1 configuration
This change of configuration entails replacing the extension IDU with a version supporting multiplexer protection
and the addition of an access IDU.
-- Power down the main and extension IDUs. Disconnect them from the power source.
-- Open the main IDU and the new extension IDU.
-- On the LAU boards of the extension IDU, set the tributary impedance selection straps to Protection
with port for type n IDU or are set to Manual forcing in protection mode with port for type o IDU.
-- On the LAU boards of the main IDU, set the tributary impedance selection straps to Protection with
port for type n IDU or are set to Manual forcing in protection mode with port for type o IDU.
-- Close the units again.
-- Open the access IDU.
-- Check, on the LAU combination board of the access IDU, the positions of the impedance selection
straps.
-- Close the unit again.
-- Install the new units (extension and access IDU).
-- Reconnect all tributary, service channel and inter-unit cables (see 3.7.2).
link cable.

7.11.5 - Upgrading from 1+0 to 1+1 with multiplexer protection without access IDU
This procedure is only available if the IDU type is (see 7.2.2.2).

If not type , please use another IDU of the correct type or upgrade it to type .
-- Power down the main IDU. Disconnect it from the power source.
-- Disconnect the tributary, service channel and inter-unit cables
-- Check that the IDU type is (see 7.2.2.2).
-- Open the main IDU.
-- If there is one, open the ESC extension IDU, remove the customizing boards and install them in the
new extension IDU.
-- On the LAU boards of the extension IDU, set the straps according to 7.2.2.2.
-- On the LAU boards of the main IDU, set the straps according to 7.2.2.2.
-- Close the units.
-- Connect the cable(s) 3CC13659AAxx (see 3.7.2).
link cable.
-- Reconnect the tributary, service channel and inter--unit cables (see 3.7.2).

7.11.6 - Adding MUX protection without access IDU to a 1+1 configuration
This procedure is only available if the IDU type is (see 7.2.2.2).

If not type , please use another IDU of the correct type or upgrade it to type .
This change of configuration entails replacing the extension IDU with a version supporting multiplexer
protection.
-- Power down the main and extension IDUs. Disconnect them from the power source.
-- Check that the IDU type is (see 7.2.2.2).
-- Open the main IDU and the new extension IDU.
-- On the LAU boards of the extension IDU, set the straps according to 7.2.2.2.
-- On the LAU boards of the main IDU, set the straps according to 7.2.2.2.
-- Close the units.
-- Install the new extension IDU.
-- Connect the cable(s) 3CC13659AAxx (see 3.7.2).
-- Reconnect all tributary, service channel and inter-unit cables (see 3.7.2).
link cable.

7.12 -- Changing power level
7.12.1 - All frequency bands except 9418UXR201 and A9418UXR202
This operation is a software option.

In the classic IDU version, the main unit must in addition be fitted with a key
providing access to this functionality (TPC:Y labelling on the key).
-- Modify the output power from the CT using the Radio tab and then the RTPC tab.
7.12.2 -- Frequency bands without RTPC

You may need to open the ODU to insert an attenuator to adjust the output power using integrated attenuator
kits, the references of which are:
Value 3 dB 6 dB 10 dB
13 GHz to 18 GHz 3CC08543AAxx 3CC08543ABxx 3CC08543ACxx
THIS OPERATION MUST BE CARRIED OUT IN A DRY, DUST FREE LOCATION
PROCEDURE FOR INSTALLING ATTENUATORS :

-- Undo the four M4 screws at the corners of the ODU (3 mm Allen key)
S The four nuts are unsecured and can easily be lost!
-- Remove the cover.
-- Depending on version, carefully disconnect the top board.
13 GHz with semi--rigid coaxial cable:
-- To dismantle: undo the two ends of coaxial link W06 between the filter and the RF amplifier (use an
8 mm torque wrench).
-- To reassemble: screw the attenuator onto the RF amplifier plug and the coaxial coupling onto the
filter plug.
Replace the coaxial link between the filter and the RF amplifier.
Tighten the attenuator, coaxial coupling and the two ends of the coaxial link using the 8 mm torque
wrench.
13 GHz with flexible semi--rigid coaxial cable:
-- Procedure as above, without the use of the coaxial coupling.

15 and 18 GHz with semi--rigid coaxial cable:
-- To dismantle, undo the plug at the filter end of link W06 between the filter and the RF amplifier (TX
output) using an 8 mm torque wrench.
-- To reassemble, screw the attenuator onto the filter plug. Tighten with an 8 mm torque wrench.
-- Replace coaxial link W06 between the filter and the RF amplifier (tighten with an 8 mm torque
wrench).
-- Replace the top board if applicable (depending on version).
S Press alongside the connectors to lock it in position.
-- With a small screwdriver, remove the units ring seal from its groove.
S Do not scratch the casting!
-- Fit a new seal (caution: handle with care because it is fragile!)
S Imperative: Position the seals vulcanized coupling in a corner.
-- Depending on version, if there is a top board present, check for presence of the CHO--TERM foam pads
on the bottom of the cover.
-- Replace the cover and check the positioning of the front panel polarizer.
-- Tighten the four M4 screws with their nuts using the torque wrench with a socket cap tip to a torque
of 1Nm + 0.2/0.
-- Affix to the unit (on the handle side), the label supplied with the kit, marking on it the internal attenuators
value.
POSITIONING THE ATTENUATOR IN THE ODU
Attenuator
Attenuator
W06
RF
Filter
Filt.
RF W06
13 GHz 15 and 18 GHz amplifier
Position of coaxial coupling.
To be fitted in 13 GHz ODU with
Depending on frequency band, cable W06
semi-- rigid coaxial cable.
may be connected to the other filter plug.

7.13 -- Changing 1+1 HSB coupler polarization
7.13.1 -- Polarization changing for former 1+1 coupler
This operation must be carried out before installing the coupler on the pole mounting. This applies only to
configurations with integrated antenna.
THIS OPERATION MUST BE CARRIED OUT IN A DRY AND DUST-FREE LOCATION.

IMPORTANT NOTE: NEVER REMOVE THE ROUND YELLOW PADS THAT ARE USED
TO SEAL THE SYSTEM.
Dismantling
-- 1) Place the coupler on the table, with the microwave nose (which mates with that of the antenna)
uppermost, and undo the four M6 screws using an M5 Allen key, then remove the nose; you can now
see the waveguide to be replaced.
-- 2) On the side nose corresponding to the standby ODU and marked COUPLED ACCESS on the
casting, insert the 2.5 mm Allen key (M3 screw) and undo the four screws securing the flexible
waveguide.
-- 3) Using a 5 mm Allen key (M6 screw), undo the four screws securing the side-mounted COUPLED
ACCESS nose and remove the nose.
-- 4) Using a 16/17 mm box wrench and an 8 mm Allen key, dismantle: the four M10 socket cap screws
+ four nuts + eight flat washers + four crinkle washers, holding the two shells of the HSB coupler
together.
-- 5) Open the HSB casing and, with a 2.5 mm Allen key, remove the straight waveguide on the antenna
side to replace it with the twisted waveguide. Pay particular attention to fitting the waveguide gasket
on the coupler.
4 Four M10 socket cap screws
(16/17 mm box wrench + 8 mm Allen key)
Standby ODU port

Antenna port
Four M3 socket cap screws

2 (2.5 mm Allen key)
Four M6 socket cap screws 1

Four M6 socket cap screws
(5 mm Allen key) 3 (5 mm Allen key)
Reassembly
-- Insert the four M10 socket cap screws 4 in their positions,
-- Fit the side-mounted nose and the four M3 screws 2 in their positions,
-- Fit the four M6 screws 3 in their positions on the side-mounted nose,
-- Tighten the M3 screws and then the M6 screws,
-- Fit the front-mounted nose and the four M6 screws 1 , and tighten,
-- Tighten the four M10 screws 4 ,
-- Replace the HSB coupler, then the ODUs as described in the section on assembling a 1+1 configuration
ODU with HSB coupler and integrated antenna.
-- On the units label, indicate the antenna waveguides direction of polarization: H (horizontal) with the
twisted guide, V (vertical) for the straight guide.
13 GHz : 3CC07725AAxx 15 GHz : 3CC07998AAxx
Twisted waveguide reference
(flextwist) 18 GHz : 3CC11263AAxx 38 GHz : 3CC08024AAxx
23/25 GHz : 3CC11264AAxx

7.13.2 -- Polarization changing for new 1+1 coupler
This procedure applies to 3CC13472ABXX, 3CC13473ABXX and 3CC13474ABXX items.
Before mounting the coupler on the pole mounting, check that the polarization is the appropriate one for your
application (the coupler is delivered in the vertical polarization). For doing so, place the coupler in front of you
with the MAIN ACCESS identification on the top and on the left part of the coupler:
Vertical Horizontal
Polarization Polarization
Figure 224 - Information about polarization configuration
7.13.2.1 -- Changing the polarization from vertical to horizontal :

The modification of the polarization is done on the coupler by rotating rings at antenna port and on the antenna
by rotating the nose (the ODU are always in the same position).
Place the coupler in front of you as described before and follow the procedure :
1) Remove the 3 M2.5 screws at front side using a wrench of 2 :
Figure 225 - View of the first top Figure 226 - Coupler in V polarization
rotative piece with screws

2) Remove the first rotative piece to access the second rotative piece :
First rotative piece on top with H and V marks Second rotative piece below the first one
This one is screwed With marks : H and V
Figure 227 - View of the two rotative pieces
3) Turn the second rotative piece as shown on the

picture using the holes (be careful not to damage
the yellow watertightness window). The wave
guide must be in the vertical position and the 3
holes of the rotative piece must fit with the 3 holes
of the coupler. Put the H mark in front of the mark
done on the coupleur as shown on the image:
4) Then put back the first rotative piece as shown

below, also with the H mark in front of the one on
the fixed part. The waveguide must be in the
vertical position and the 3 holes must fit with the
holes of the second rotative piece.
5) Put back and secure the 3 screws.
6) Stick the label H delivered with the coupler to identify the polarization
The coupler is now configured in Horizontal polarization.

7.14 -- Changing SIMM memory boards
Note:
This procedure enables to evolve from the LUX12/LUX 50 version.
-- Open the unit ( 7.6).
-- Open the locking and extract the SIMM board (if any) (Photo ).
Note: Not applicable for the light IDU. The IDU Light LUX 12 has no SIMM board.
-- Insert the two LUX 50 SIMM boards one after the other (Photo ).
-- Push the boards backward to lock them.
-- Close the unit.
-- Connect the unit to the power source.
-- Power up the unit again.
Locking
SIMM memory for LUX 1x
SIMM memories for LUX 50
Classic IDU with SIMM memory LUX 1x SIMM memories
Insertion of the SIMM boards IDU with SIMM memories LUX 50

Figure 228 - Changing SIMM memories

7.15 -- Replacing consumable items
7.15.1 -- MCU board battery
The MCU board of the main IDU (classic or light) has a battery to safeguard the memory which stores
supervision passwords, the last 300 events detected (remote inventory), and so on.
This battery must be replaced every 7 to 10 years if, after powering down, the remote inventory information is
lost when you power up again.
CAUTION
There is a risk of explosion if the incorrect battery is used.
Only replace with a battery of the same type:
M4T28--BR12SH1, Supplier: STMicroelectronics
Observe all applicable national standards regarding the disposal of used batteries.
Do not burn and do not recharge.
-- Change the battery (see Figure 229 or 230 depending on the type of IDU). The battery simply plugs
into the printed circuit board.
-- Close the unit.
-- Power up the unit.
-- Wait for the ATT, URG and NURG LEDs to start flashing simultaneously on the main IDU and reload
the configuration from the ODU by pushing the IDU--ACO/ODU switch on the IDU connector panel
to the ACO/ODU setting. After two minutes at most, the LEDs should stop flashing simultaneously.
-- Check out operation of the equipment.

Display panel
MAIN IDU
Connector panel 6
P502
9
DS501
1 5
J502
S502
6 9 S501
1 5
Y502
SW502 SW503
C512 C507
C511 C506
C509C504
C510C505
1
2
2
1
2
MX507 MX508 MX504
SW506
1
CR509 MX511
MX513
MX514 SW508 BATTERY
1
2
1
RAM memory
J503 72
C531
SW511
CR514 1
Flash memory
72
Figure 229 - Position of the battery on the MCU board (classic IDU)
C101
Y101
MX106 MX107
J102
MX119
IDU MX118
MX117
CR101 CR102
SW103
Connector panel CR103

MX127 MX128
MX126 CR104 MX129
BATTERY
1
RAM memory
J103
72
1
J104
Flash memory
72
Figure 230 - Position of the battery on the light MCU board (Light IDU)

7.15.2 - Changing fans
Note: Both fans must be changed at the same time.

Note the voltage indicated by the used fans (5 or 12 V)
For the 12 Volt fans, use the fan replacement kit 9400UXZ200 (3CC11761AAxx).
For the 5 Volt fans, use the fan replacement kit 9400UXZ201 (3CC12847AAxx).
-- Identify the orientation of the fan and extract the fan off its recess (Photo ).
-- Note the polarities and then disconnect the two fan power supply wires (Photo ).
-- Connect the power supply wires of the replacement fan (the red wire must be connected to the positive
terminal, marked on the PCB (Photo )).
-- Insert the new fan in its recess, the same way round as the one removed previously, and with the power
supply wires run along the same path.
-- Close the unit.
-- Check that the fans extract air (otherwise, reverse their orientation).

Fans
Position of the fans Extraction of the fan
+
red -
black
Disconnection of the power supply wires Fan polarity
Figure 231 - Changing fans

7.15.3 -- Changing a fuse of an IDU
The power supply units of the main, extension and Light IDUs versions are protected by two fuses which snap
into their clip mountings. The procedure below describes how to change these fuses.
-- Open the unit, for IDU, see 7.6.
-- Remove the suspect fuse and check it with an ohmmeter (if out of service: infinite impedance).
-- Insert a good fuse.
-- Close the unit.
Always replace fuses with fuses of the same type:

S For the classic IDU (31 x 6 cartridge):
F10H 250 V (10 A fast blow fuse, high breaking capacity).
S For the Light IDU (20 x 5 mm cartridge):
With Alcatel power supply: T3,15H250V (3.15 A slow blow fuse, high breaking capacity),
With ARTESYN power supply: F3,15H250V (3.15 A fast blow fuse, high breaking capacity).
If the fuses blow again on power up:

-- in an installation phase, check the polarity of the external voltage and/or that there is no short circuit
in the power connector,
-- if the fault occurs in operation, change the IDU.


Appendix 1 -- Human exposure to electromagnetic
fields
A.1.1 -- Introduction
This document explains the precautions that are taken to make sure the electromagnetic waves transmitted by
Alcatel 9400 family of equipment for Low and Medium Capacity Fixed Radio links are harmless for the public.
It provides an evaluation of a safety parameter based on calculations derived from the ICNIRP Guidelines and
the means (i.e. installation rules) by which this safety parameter has to be implemented, where necessary.
It applies to the protection of the public from electromagnetic field radiated by the transmit antenna of the
equipment. It does not apply to the protection of the workers.
The calculations, based on far--field telecommunications equations, provide, in case this hypothesis is not
validated by the result, an over--estimated value for the safety limit in the boresight direction of the antenna.
In this latter case, more realistic evaluations could be derived from near--field calculations, provided that an
adequate model of the antenna is used.
Where several radio equipment are installed on the same site, the contributions from each of them have to be
taken into account for the definition of the global safety parameter. Each radio site is then a particular case and
the safety parameter is no more depending on the characteristics of a single equipment only.
A.1.2 -- Standards and regulations
A.1.2.1 - ICNIRP guidelines

The International Commission on Non--Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) is formally recognized by the
World Health Organization (WHO) to draft health based exposure guidelines. This commission has updated the
guidelines on the thresholds of exposure to electromagnetic fields for frequencies from 0 to 300 GHz
[Guidelines for Limiting Exposure to Time Varying Electric, Magnetic and Electromagnetic Fields (up
300 GHz), Health Physics, Vol. 74, n4, pp. 499522, April 98]. This document defines the basic restrictions
on the populations level of exposure to electromagnetic fields and from that it derives reference levels for more
straightforward application in the lowest frequency ranges.
A.1.2.2 - European regulation
The R&TTE Directive [Directive1999/5/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 9 March 1999 on
radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity]
is effective since April 2000. The objective of this Directive is to define the rules for allowing CE marking of these
equipment so that they can be placed on the market. These rules rely on harmonised standards. The article 3.1.a
of the Directive states that the following essential requirements are applicable to all apparatus: The protection
of the health and safety of the user and any other person, including the objectives with respect to safety
requirements contained in Directive 73/23/EEC, but with no voltage limits. The Directive 73/23/EEC of
February 1973 defines the harmonisation of the laws of Member States relating to electrical equipment designed
for use within certain voltage limits (from 100 V to 100 kV).
The European Commission has also published the Council recommendation 1999/519/EC of July 12 on the
limitation of the exposure of the general public to electromagnetic fields (0 to 300 GHz). The limits defined in
this recommendation are based on the ICNIRP guidelines of April 1998 for the general public

A.1.3 -- Evaluation of safety perimeters
As far as ALCATEL 9400 infrastructure is concerned, the level of human exposure to electromagnetic waves
is characterized by the power density, which represents the basic restriction at those frequencies.
The following formula gives the power density assuming far field propagation of RF fields in free space. Then,
the power density at a distance D in the main lobe of an antenna of gain G with an input power Pf is:
Pf G
DP=
4 D2 (1)
Far field propagation assumption is valid at a distance equal to or higher than Dff from the antenna such that
Dff>2D2/, where D is the largest dimension of the antenna and the wave length.
Considering antennas with high gain, the safety parameter is first evaluated in the direction of the main lobe.
The distance DL where exposure level may reach the exposure limit DPL is provided by formula (2).
PfG(W )
DL (m) =
4 DPL(W / m2) (2)
Formula (2) overestimates the safety distance if it is lower than the far field distance Dff.

A.1.4 -- Safety perimeters
Based on the maximum power of the equipment, the following table gives the safety distances for the general
public. Theses distances are valid for 1+0 and 1+1 configurations.
If the transmitted power changes (see 7.12), the safety distance can be calculated using the formula given
in Appendix 1.3 above.
Antenna Maximum Safety Distance in

Frequency range
Equipment gain power front of the antenna
(GHz)
(dBi) (dBm) (meters)
35,3 25 2,9
38,3 25 4,1
9413 UX 12 75 13 25
12,7513,25
41,5 25 6
45,1 25 9
35,3 21 1,8
38,3 21 2,6
9413 UX 16 QAM 12 75 13 25
12,7513,25
41,5 21 3,8
45,1 21 5,7
31,1 21 1,1
36,5 21 2,1
9415 UX 14,415,35
, , 40 21 3,2
42,5 21 4,2
46 21 6,3
31,1 24 1,6
36,5 24 3
9415 UX RTPC 14,415,35
, , 40 24 4,5
42,5 24 6
46 24 8,9
33,3 16,5 0,9
38,6 16,5 1,6
9418 UX 17,719,7
, , 42,1 16,5 2,4
44,6 16,5 3,2
47,8 16,5 4,6
33,3 24,5 2,2
38,6 24,5 4
9418 UX 17,719,7
, , 42,1 24,5 6
44,6 24,5 8
47,8 24,5 11,6

Antenna Maximum Safety Distance in
Frequency range
Equipment gain power front of the antenna
(GHz)
(dBi) (dBm) (meters)
34,9 19 1,4
40,1 19 2,5
9423 UX 4QAM
Q 21,223,6
, , 43,6 19 3,8
46,1 19 5,1
49,4 19 7,4
34,9 17 1,1
40,1 17 2
9423 UX 16QAM
Q 21,223,6
, , 43,6 17 3
46,1 17 4
49,4 17 5,9
36 18 1,4
9425 UX 4QAM 24 5 26 5
24,526,5
41,1 18 2,5
36 16 1,1
9425 UX 16QAM 24 5 26 5
24,526,5
41,1 16 2
39,6 16 1,7
9438 UX 4QAM 37 39 5
3739,5
44,5 16 3
39,6 14 1,4
9438 UX 16QAM 37 39 5
3739,5
44,5 14 2,4

A.1.5 -- Implementation of protection rules
In order to comply with the previously mentioned distance constraints, a safety parameter must be materialized
along with the proper regulatory signaling and warning,
unless the following mounting rules could be implemented for the antennas or outdoor equipment with
embedded antennas; they must be placed:
-- At the edge of the roof in a position such as nobody can sit or stand in front of the antenna within the
applicable distance mentioned above.
OR
-- Against an outside wall or under a roof, with no obstacle within 2 meters in the direction of the signal
transmission, taking into account the antenna aperture.If the antenna is placed on a balcony, it should
be placed in a position such as nobody can pass in front of it. This means that: either the equipment
is fixed on the outside wall, not on the wall between the balcony and the building, and pointed toward
the outside with no obstacle within 2 meters; or the access to the balcony must be closed and proper
marking used.
OR
If none of these mountings is possible, then a safety parameter must be materialized along with the proper
regulatory signaling and warning.
These rules apply to the general public and therefore do not apply in case the equipment is installed in
professional premises of an Operator with no access to the public, provided that the access to the so defined
area around the equipment be restricted to workers having received an adequate information on EMF risks.
These constraints are based on a theoretical general worst case study.
A.1.6 -- Conclusion
Alcatel 9400 transmit non--ionizing electromagnetic waves at a very low power, not exceeding 1 Watt at lower
frequencies.
Our installation rules make sure that it is impossible for anybody to sit or stand in front of the antenna within these
distances either by the physical position of the antenna or with a safety parameter.
These installation rules are followed by our installation teams and any of our sub--contractors and are they part
of the instructions delivered along the equipment for installation by our customers or by third parties.

Appendix 2 -- Installation information
Station
Station name Name of terminal in station *
Main Extension Access Name of remote terminal *
IDU N_ Remote terminal site
ODU N_ Remote terminal azimuth
Software version Power supply 24 V 48 V
* CAUTION ! No more than eight characters allowed by MS-DOS
1+0 1+0 1+1 HSB 1+1 HSB 1+1

Hardware configuration without ESC ext with ESC ext 1 antenna 2 antennas Frequency div.
Max config. Max capacity TPC Modulation

Soft are key
Software ke
Tributaries
Terminal bit rate (Limited by the interface boards and the 2 x 2 Mbit/s 4 x 2 Mbit/s 8 x 2 Mbit/s 16 x 2 Mbit/s 1 x 34 Mbit/s
software key installed)
4 inputs 8 inputs 16 inputs 34 Mbit/s
Tributary board type 2 Mbit/s 2 Mbit/s 2 Mbit/s + 2 Mbit/s
Tributary Name Impedance BNC-1.6/5.6-Terminal block Tributary Name Impedance BNC-1.6/5.6-Terminal block
N_ 1 N_ 2
N_ 3 N_ 4
N_ 5 N_ 6
N_ 7 N_ 8
N_ 9 N_ 10
N_ 11 N_ 12
N_ 13 N_ 14
N_ 15 N_ 16
2 Mbit/s aux.
Impedance: 75 or 120 Ohms for 2 Mbit/s channels only.
Tributary cross connect If no particular matrix is supplied by the network administrator, use the standard configuration.

Radio configuration
Standby
Polarisation (H/V) Normal channel
channel
Transmit frequency (FTx) Values supplied by network administrator
|FTx -- FRx | = Duplex
D l separation
ti
Receive frequency (FRx)
Duplex separation MHz
Transmit Receive Value between zero (default) and 31, in-

serted in transmission and awaited in re
re-
Link identification code
ception, supplied by the network adminis-
trator
Amplifier Standard power High power

(15 and 18 GHz bands only)
Output attenuator 0 dB 3 dB 6 dB 10 dB
(13, 15 and 18 GHz bands only)
Output power control Normal Standby Values supplied by network administrator

(13, 23, 25 and 38 GHz bands only) dBm dBm
Local loop Absent Present Absent Present

(Option)
Engineering service channels (ESC)
Superv. bit Bit rate: 9600 bit/s for an 9400XX network

NE physical address
able*
Supervision rate Address: 01 by default
nal cab
Values supplied by network administrator
ter -
termina
Inte
Apply standard configuration unless a specific matrix is supplied by the network admin-
SCC/NMS switching matrix
istrator
N
Caution! No more than one zero in the num-
Station telephone Input level dBm
ber. Value supplied by network administrator.
Output level dBm
Absent Present Optional in 1+0 configurations
ESC extension IDU
Standard in 1+1 configurations
Definition of ESCs
S ESC N_ 3 V11 V28 ESC-1, 2, 3, 4 or 5
S ESC N_ 4 (Bit rate > 2 x 2 Mbit/s) 64 kbit/s V11 ESC-1, 2, 3, 4 or 5
S ESC N_ 5 (Bit rate > 2 x 2 Mbit/s) 64 kbit/s V11 64 kbit/s V11 or V28
* Check the boxes for which the inter-- terminal link cables need to be installed.
Performance thresholds (triggering alarms)
Early switching request 2 x 2 Mbit/s 4 x 2 Mbit/s 8 x 2 Mbit/s 16 x 2 Mbit/s 1 x 34 Mbit/s

S 4 QAM minimum values --93 dBm --90 dBm --87 dBm --84 dBm --84 dBm
16 QAM minimum values -- --86 dBm --83 dBm --79.5 dBm --79.5 dBm
S Terminal values
Early Performance Priority
Bit error ratio
switching request switching request switching request
S Average values 1E --08 1E --06 1E --03
S Terminal values

Telesignalling (TS) and remote controls (TC)
Install the loops required and name them in the software (NO: Normally open/NC: Normally closed).
Loop Name NO/NC Loop Name NO/NC
TS N_ 1 TS N_ 2
TS N_ 3 TS N_ 4
TS N_ 5 TS N_ 6
TS N_ 7 TS N_ 8
TC N_ 1
Specify the default alarm, equipment and environment alarms (UG, NURG, Disabled, Status).
G784 thresholds
Threshold BBE ES SES UAS

Value

Appendix 3 -- Set of consumables
This set is defined for a link, its reference is: 9400UXT002
ITEM NUMBER DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

1AC000570017 Black heat--shrinkable, 4.8 to 2.4 sheath 1m
1AC000570010 Black heat--shrinkable, 9.5 to 4.8 sheath 1m
1AC001250004 Black heat--shrinkable, 19 to 9.5 sheath 1m
1AD012980002 Black Colson cable tie, length: 350x9 100
1AD012980003 Black Colson cable tie, length: 173x6 50
77081203 Autoamalgama. Adhesive tape, 19mm wide, 10 m 1
length
77091318 ty--rap cable tie, 4.6X385 50
77094664 Green plio Heat 0.6 1m

Appendix 4 -- Service kit
A.4.1 -- Service kit 9400UXT102 for ODU 94xxUXR201 to 94xxUXR203

The service kit is used when pointing the antennas of each station. It comprises:
-- a cable for connecting to the MAINT connector on the ODU, ref. : 9400UXT102, 3CC07972AAxx
-- a headset/microphone assembly for links with the indoor unit and the remote station for using the
telephone service channel ESC 2, not available for use with the Light IDU versions, ref.:
1AF00375ABAA.
Cable fixing
P05 AUDIO PINOUT P05

1 -- Micro P
2 -- Micro N
3 -- Speaker P
P01 P04
4 -- Speaker N (ground)
P02
Cable ref.: 9400UXT102
P03
Figure 232 - Cable 9400UXT102

-- Connector P01 : ODU link, Maintenance socket.
-- Connector P02 / P03 : Multimeter for measuring AGC voltage.
-- Connector P04 : Connector for portable PC, reserved for Alcatel use.
-- Connector P05 : Connector for headset (cannot be used with Light IDU versions).
Right earphone
Left earphone
Male connector -- External view
Audio equipment ref: 1AF00375ABAA
Figure 233 - Audio equipment 1AF00375ABAA

A.4.2 -- Short service kit 3EJ04113AAAA for A9400UX flat ODU
The short service kit 3EJ04113AAAA is used when pointing the antennas of each station. It comprises a cable
for connecting to the MAINT connector on the ODU, ref.: 3CC13477AAxx.
P05
P01
P02
P04
P03
Figure 234 - Cable 3CC13477AAxx
-- Connector P01: ODU link, Maintenance socket.

-- Connector P02: For future use.
-- Connector P03 / P04:multimeter for measuring AGC voltage.
-- Connector P05: connector for portable PC. To be used for maintenance purpose or necessity to
upgrade the ODU embedded software.

Appendix 5 -- Assembling N type coaxial connectors
A.5.1 -- Type 1 fitting on cable 1AC001100022
Connector BECLER Square, 18 mm

BK / 224 across flats
Hex, 20 mm
across flats
Hex, 20 mm
across flats
re
1) Strip 15 mm of outer insulation from the cable

and comb out the braid.
2) Fit onto the cable: the nut, washer, flat gasket

and braid clamp, then fold back the braid over the
braid clamp and cut away the excess.
Strip the core of the cable to the dimensions
opposite.
3) Fit the centre contact fully home on the core of

the cable. Crimp with DANIELS M22520/5--01 tool
fitted with jaws Y215P (hex: .128 across flats).
If not possible, solder.
CAUTION: DO NOT MELT THE CABLE

INSULATION.
4) Abut the gasket and washer against the braid

clamp then offer up the end of the cable into the
body of the connector making sure that the
contacts mate correctly with each other.
Screw the nut into the body of the connector
(torque: 500 N/cm).
The connector is now ready for use.

A.5.2 -- Type 2 mounting on cable 1AC001100022
not permitted without written authorization from ALCATEL
Fiche/Connector DELTA OHM

08 250 173
Dnuder la gaine sur 10 mm, mettre lcrou sur la gaine.

Strip cable (10 mm), put the clamping nut on the cable.
Rabattre les 10 mm de tresse sur la gaine.

Fold back the 10 mm of braid over the outer insulation.
Couper le dilectrique et le ruban sur 6 mm.
Cut dielectric & foil over 6 mm.
Souder ou sertir le contact central.
Solder or crimp the contact on the inner conductor.
Monter la partie accouplement entre le ruban et

la tresse du cble.
Fit the coupling part between the foil and the
braid of the cable.
Rabattre la tresse vers lavant du connecteur et

couper le surplus.
Fold the braid towards the front of the connector
and cut away any surplus flush with the connector.
Assembler la partie presse toupe et

accouplement, serrer avec une cl plate 20 mm
(couple maxi 35 N/m).
Mount the gland and coupling part,
tighten with a 20 mm open ended wrench
(Max torque 35 N/m).
Pince sertir: DELTA OHM 22395208

Crimping Tool : DELTA OHM 22395208

Appendix 6 -- Pin out of user ports

Z

A
U
T
O
Main IDU
Access IDU
Z
A
U
T
O
Extension IDU
Light IDU
Figure 235 - IDU connector panels

A.6.1 -- Tributaries
A.6.1.1 -- 2 Mbit/s tributaries

A.6.1.1.1 -- 19IDU connectors (Main, light, access)

I/O 1 - 4 Light IDU
I/O (9/16) main IDU
Connector I/O (1/8) main IDU
I/O (9/16) access IDU
I/O (1/8) access IDU
2 Mbit/s tributary N 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
In+ 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
In- 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
Pin Out
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
+
Out
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
-
Light IDU MCU board Light IDU MCU board
LAU: 3CC06058Axxx
4 x 2 Mbit/s boards
LIU: 3CC05818Axxx
8 x 2 Mbit/s boards LAU: 3CC06059Axxx LIU: 3CC06026Axxx
16 x 2 Mbit/s boards LAU: 3CC06059Axxx LIU: 3CC06026Axxx LAU: 3CC06059AAxx LIU: 3CC06119Axxx
Access board LAU: 3CC06765AAxx (requires the same configurations in main and extension IDUs)
Ground pins: 10,29 on I/O (1/8) and I/O (9/16) of the main IDU and access IDU,
6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 34, 35, 36, 37 on I/O 1 - 4 of the Light IDU
In 75 ohms version, In+, Out+ are the live input and output pins and In-, Out- are the ground pins for the same signals.
Depending on the boards installed, some connector pins may not be available (areas shaded in the table).
For the main and access IDU:

-- The pins 1 &11 must be not connected.
-- For the automatic configuration of impedance, the pin 20 must be grounded in
75 ohms and not connected in 120 ohms, otherwise the switching has to be
forced (see chapter 7.2.2.4)
A.6.1.2 - 34 Mbit/s tributaries

The 34 Mbit/s port is via 1.6/5.6 connectors:
-- I/O (9/16) on the main IDU in a configuration without MUX protection,
-- I/O (9/16) on the access IDU in a configuration with MUX protection.
If the connector system required for the 34 Mbit/s system is BNC, use a BNC/ 1.6/5.6 adapter kit
ref: 3CC08249AAxx (option).
1.6/ 5.6 connector
1.6/ 5.6 connector
E R
34 Mbit/s port
I / O ( 9 / 16 )
Auxiliary 2 Mbit/s
port
Figure 236 - 34 Mbit/s tributary connectors

The auxiliary 2 Mbit/s port uses female 37-way Sub-D connectors:
-- I/O (1/8) on the main IDU,

-- I/O (1/8) on the access IDU.

PIN LAU: 3CC06061AAxx
SIGNAL LIU: 3CC06118AAxx
In+ In-- Out+ Out--
Auxiliary 2 Mbit/s stream 9 28 19 37 X
Pin 10: ground; in 75 ohms configurations, In+ and Out+ are the live input and output pins and In- and Out-
are the ground pins for the same signals.

A.6.2 -- Engineering service channels
A.6.2.1 -- Supervision bus interface

Concerns the NMS1 and NMS2 female 9-way Sub-D connectors on the main or Light IDU.
Pin Signal Pin Signal

1 RS 485 data in (--) 6 RS 485 data in (+)
2 RS 485 clock in (--) 7 RS 485 clock in (+)
3 Ground
4 RS 485 data out (+) 8 RS 485 data out (--)
5 RS 485 clock out (+) 9 RS 485 clock out (--)
A.6.2.2 -- Telephone ESC with selective calling

Concerns the AUDIO 1 and AUDIO 2 female 9-way Sub-D connectors on the main IDU.
Pin Signal Pin Signal

1 Audio signal from user (+) 6 Audio signal from user (-)
2 7 M--wire signal
3 0V
4 Audio signal to user (-) 8 Audio signal to user (+)
5 E--wire signal 9 +5 V protected
A.6.2.3 -- Engineering service channels ESC 3, ESC 4 and ESC 5

A.6.2.3.1 -- Service channel ESC3 on the Light IDU versions: ESC3 / ALARM I/O connector
Female 37-way connector Out+ pin Out-- or 0 V pin Pin

64 kbit/s transmitted data input 4 23 Unprotected +5 V 11
64 kHz transmit clock input 5 24 Ground 12 -- 30
64 kbit/s received data output 1 20 Reserved for ALCATEL use 3 -- 6 -- 22 -- 25
64 kHz receive clock output 2 21

A.6.2.3.2 -- Without extension unit: ESC EXT connector on the main IDU
ESC3 ESC4 ESC5

Out+ Out-- or 0 V Out+ Out-- or 0 V Out+ Out-- or 0 V

pin pin pin pin pin pin
64 kbit/s transmitted data input 1 20 7 26 13 32
64 kHz transmit clock input 2 21 8 27 14 33
8 kHz transmit byte sync input 3 22 9 28
64 kbit/s received data output 4 23 10 29 15 34
64 kHz receive clock output 5 24 11 30 16 35
8 kHz receive byte sync output 6 25 12 31
ESC processing signal (Reserved for Alcatel use) 17 36
0 volt (ground) 18
Squelch signal for ESCs (Reserved for Alcatel use) 19
(Reserved for Alcatel use) 37
A.6.2.3.3 -- ESC MAIN connector on extension IDU
ESC3 ESC4 ESC5
Out+ Out-- or 0 V Out+ Out-- or 0 V Out+ Out-- or 0 V

pin pin pin pin pin pin
64 kbit/s transmitted data input 4 23 10 29 15 34
64 kHz transmit clock input 5 24 11 30 16 35
8 kHz transmit byte sync input 6 25 12 31
64 kbit/s received data output 1 20 7 26 13 32
64 kHz receive clock output 2 21 8 27 14 33
8 kHz receive byte sync output 3 22 9 28
ESC processing signal (Reserved for Alcatel use) 17 36
0 volt (ground) 18
Squelch signal for ESCs (Reserved for Alcatel use) 19
DO NOT CONNECT (Reserved for Alcatel use) 37

A.6.2.3.4 -- With extension unit
The table below concerns the following connectors:
Female 9-way Sub-D, ESC. 3-1, ESC. 3-2, ESC. 4-1, ESC. 4-2 on the extension IDU.
ESC. 3-1 and ESC. 4-1 connectors ESC. 3-2 and ESC. 4-2 connectors
G703 64 kbit/s Analogue ESC G703 64 kbit/s Analogue ESC

Pin Pin
signal signal signal signal
8 Output (+) Audio 1 (+) OUT 8 N.C. Audio 2 (+) OUT
4 Out put (--) Audio 1 (--) OUT 4 N.C. Audio 2 (--) OUT
1 Input (+) Audio 1 (+) IN 1 N.C. Audio 2 (+) IN
6 Input (--) Audio 1 (-) IN 6 N.C. Audio 2 (-) IN
9 N.C. N.C. 9 N.C. N.C.
5 N.C. E signal 1 5 N.C. E signal 2
2 N.C. N.C. 2 N.C. N.C.
7 N.C. M signal 1 7 N.C. M signal 2
3 Ground Ground 3 Ground Ground
N.C. = Not connected.
ESC. 3-1 and ESC. 4-1 connectors
V11 or V28 * signal

Pin 9600 bit/s max. 9600 bit/s max. 2x4800 bit/s max 2x4800 bit/s max.
64 kbit/s
P to MP P to P P to MP + P to P P to P
8 Data Out (+) Output PM1 signal (+) Output PP1 signal (+) Output. PM1A signal (+) Output PP1A signal (+)
4 Data Out (--) Output PM1 signal (--) Output PP1 signal (--) Output PM1A signal (--) Output PP1A signal (--)
1 Data In (+) Input PM1 signal (+) Input PP1 signal (+) Input PM1A signal (+) Input PP1A signal (+)
6 Data In (--) Input PM1 signal (--) Input PP1 signal (--) Input PM1A signal (--) Input PP1A signal (--)
9 Clk Out (+) NC NC Output PP1A signal (+) Output PP2A signal (+)
5 Clk Out (--) NC NC Output PP1A signal (--) Output PP2A signal (--)
2 Clk In (+) NC NC Input PP1A signal (+) Input PP2A signal (+)
7 Clk In (--) NC NC Input PP1A signal (--) Input PP2A signal (--)
3 Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground
N.C. = Not Connected ; PM = Point-to-Multipoint ; PP = Point-to-point ; * In V28 mode, all the (--) signals are
grounded.

ESC. 3-2 and ESC. 4-2 connectors
V11 or V28 * signal

Pin 9600 bit/s max 9600 bit/s max 2x4800 bit/s max 2x4800 bit/s max.
64 kbit/s
P to MP P to P P to MP P to P
8 NC Output PM2 signal (+) NC Output PM1B signal (+) NC
4 NC Output PM2 signal (--) NC Output PM1B signal (--) NC
1 NC Input PM2 signal (+) NC Input PM1B signal (+) NC
6 NC Input PM2 signal (--) NC Input PM1B signal (--) NC
9 NC NC NC NC NC
5 NC NC NC NC NC
2 NC NC NC NC NC
7 NC NC NC NC NC
3 Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground
* In V28 mode, all the (--) signals are grounded.

The table below concerns the ESC. 5 female 25-way Sub-D connector on the extension IDU.
ESC 5 connector pin

Signal Signal Pin
In+ In-- Out+ Out--
DO NOT CONNECT 1, 4, 8, 14,
3 2 Reserved for Alcatel use
Reserved for Alcatel use 15, 20
ESC 5: Clock 6, 7, 9, 16,

10 22 12 24 0 volt 17, 18, 19,
21
ESC 5: Data 11 23 13 25 Not connected 2, 3, 5
In+ and Out+ are the live input (received signal) and output (transmitted signal) pins and In-- and Out--
are the ground pins for the same signals.

A.6.3 -- Alarms and TS/TC
The alarm and remote control relays are de--energized in the absence of an alarm.
The remote indication loops (TS) between electrical ground and TS input, can be configured as normally open
or normally closed (in the absence of an alarm), depending on the positioning of the soldered links (swaps)
on the MCU board, as indicated in section 7.10.
A.6.3.1 - ESC3 / ALARM I/O connector on the Light IDU versions

Female 37--way connector
N/C contact N/O contact Common contact

Signal TS signals
Pin Pin Pin
Urgent alarm (SA) 14 15 32 TS1 input 7
Non urgent alarm (NSA) 33 34 16 TS2 input 26
Alarm Attended state 17 18 35 TS3 input 8
Housekeeping remote control 36 37 19 TS4 input 27
Unprotected +5 V 11 TS5 input 9
Ground 12 -- 30 TS6 input 28
TS7 input 10
R
Reserved
d for
f ALCATEL 3 -- 6 -- 22 -- 25
TS8 input 29
A.6.3.2 - ALARMS I/O connector on the main IDU

Concerns a female 25--pin Sub-D connector.
N/C N/O Common

TS signals
Signal contact contact contact
Pin Pin Pin Pin Pin

Urgent alarm (SA) 1 2 14 TS1 input 7 TS5 input 9
Non urgent alarm (NSA) 15 16 3 TS2 input 20 TS6 input 22
Alarm Attended state 4 5 17 TS3 input 8 TS7 input 10
Housekeeping remote control 18 19 6 TS4 input 21 TS8 input 23
0V 25 Reserved for ALCATEL 11 -- 12 -- 13 -- 24

A.6.4 -- IDU F connector
Use of the F connnector requires the F connector adapter cable between the PC cable and the IDU female
9--pin sub--D port.

A.6.4.1 -- 9--Pin sub--D connector wiring
The table below concerns the female 9-pin sub--D connector used for supervisory PC connection.
Pin ASSIGNMENT Pin ASSIGNMENT
1 Data Carrier Detect 6 Data Set Ready

2 Receive data - level V28 7 Request to send
3 Transmit data - level V28
4 Data Terminal Ready 8 Clear to send
5 GND 9 Not connected
A.6.4.2 -- F Interface adapter cable wiring
PIN ASSIGNMENT
P1 P2
1
2 2
3 3
4 7
5 5
6 8
7 4
8 1
Male plug Female plug

Appendix 7 -- Alarm synthesis indicator
The following troubleshooting table pertains to the alarm and status synthesis given in all the screens.
Alarm Synthesis indication
Mnemonic Alarm / Status Description Maintenance
Synthesis of alarms that needs immediate
CRI Critical alarm
troubleshooting (typical: NE isolation).
Synthesis of alarms that needs immediate
MAJ Major (Urgent) alarm
troublshooting.
Synthesis of alarms for which a deferred intervent can
MIN Minor (Not urgent) alarm
be decided.
Synthesis of alarms due to failure of other NE in the
WNG Warning alarm
network.
Synthesis of alarms not associated with the previous
IND Indeterminate alarm
severities. Not operative.
External Point Check the relevant station alarm associated with the
EXT
(Housekeeping alarm) input housekeeping indication.
EQP Equipment alarm Synthesis of alarms of the Equipment domain.
TRS Transmission alarm Synthesis of alarms of the Transmission domain.
GREEN LED: Indicates that the Craft Terminal has the
OS permission to manage the NE (granted).
Local Access state
CYAN LED: Indicates that the Craft Terminal has not
the OS permission to manage the NE (denied).
GREEN LED: Identifies the Enable operational state
of the connection between NE and Craft Terminal ( SDH
service link up ).
COM NE reachable/unreachable
RED LED: Identified the Disable operational state of
the connection between NE and Craft Terminal ( service
link down ).
GREEN LED: NE is under supervision.
SUP Supervision state BROWN LED: NE is not under supervision.
Used in the OS.
Alignment status of the SH MIB respect to the
ALI Alignment
equipment MIB.
GREEN LED: No OS is currently managing the NE.
OS OS Management CYAN LED: Indicates that the NE is currently under
supervision by an OS.
GREEN LED: Normal operating condition.
AC Abnormal Condition CYAN LED: Detection of an ABNORMAL operative
condition. Type: switch forcing.
GREEN LED: Normal operating condition.
NTP NTP server state CYAN LED: Indicates that the NTP server provided with
the craft terminal is not working properly.

The following table summarizes the information obtained in the alarm view starting from the left column.
Alarm information, general description
TITLE DESCRIPTION
Severity severity associated with the alarm and assigned in the Alarm Profile
Event time time the alarm was generated
Entity entity involved in the alarm

Probable Cause probable cause of the alarm
Managed Object Class class of the alarm
The information supplied helps the operator during the troubleshooting operations.
Table on page supplies general information on the alarm meanings and on the respective maintenance actions
to be taken based on the information given in the applications.
The maintenance action must take into account the board where the alarm is detected.
The Housekeeping alarms are referred to the input external point relevant to the Housekeeping signals. They
are available to the customer by connecting them to a dedicated subrack connector.

Appendix 8 -- Alarm Details
General issues of the alarm meanings and their respective maintenance actions
ALARM MEANING MAINTENANCE ACTION
AIS detection on the tributary in Tx Check the 2 Mbit connected

AIS
side or Rx side equipment
Replace the ODU; if the alarm is still

Cable LOS Problem on the cable or on the ODU
active replace the cable.
Demodulator failure affecting the

Dem fail Replace the ODU
demodulated signal
Loss of the incoming signal at the Check the link (propagation

Dem LOS
demodulator input problem)
Check the link (propagation

Early Warning Early Warning at Rx side
problem)
Excessive errors. Check the link

High BER Excessive BER
(propagation problem)
Frequency setting incompatible with Change the frequency or change the

Incompatible Frequency
the ODU P/N ODU
Incompatible PTX Output power out of the limits Replace the ODU
Check the correct connection of the

cable between the IDU and the
Link Identifier Mismatch Mismatch on the link identifier relevant ODU. If the connection is
correct, check the link (propagation
problem)
Loss Of Signal LOS at the Tx tributary input Check the line

Low BER Low BER at the Rx side
problem)
Internal modulator failure affecting

Mod fail Replace the ODU
the modulated signal
Investigate by using the loopback

Mod LOS No signal at the modulator input
facilities with the CT.
Check that the NMS is configured

with the correct mode and that the
peer is correctly configured and in
PPP Fail PPP link failure
service. In case of V.11 NMS, check
that the cable is connected and
working properly.
Provisioning data is refused by Information is compliant with

Provisioning Mismatch
equipment equipment characteristics

ALARM MEANING MAINTENANCE ACTION
Remote Inventory can not be Minor alarm. Check the concerned

Remote Inventory Failure
recovered from a board or unit board/unit
Replaceable Unit Problem Problem on a replaceable unit Replace the unit
Replaceable Unit Type Mismatch between the installed unit Change the unit configuration or
Mismatch and the sw configured unit change the unit
Replaceable Unit Missing No unit in a configured slot Install the unit

Rx Fail (Radio alarm) No RF received signal
problem)
Performance threshold has been

Threshold Cross Errors on the link
crossed
Performance alarm: Too many

Unavailable Time Errors on the link
unavailable seconds
Tx Fail (Radio alarm) Transmitter failure Replace the ODU
Unconfigured Equipment
Unit present in an unconfigured slot Configure the unit
Present
Housekeeping Active input housekeeping Check the housekeeping

Appendix 9 -- List of models and commercial items
A.9.1 -- Hardware
Outdoor equipment 94xxUX flat Model number

ODU Mnemonic & Remote Inventory
4QAM/16QAM RTPC numbers
Outdoor unit 9413 fs=266MHz 1--1 3CC13688AAxx

3DB05524AAAA
3DB06633AAAA
3DB05526AAAA
3DB05525AAAA
Outdoor unit 9415 fs=644MHz 1--1 3DB06334AAAA 3CC13709AAxx
Outdoor unit 9415 fs=728MHz 1 3CC13712AAxx
3DB05527AAAA
3DB05227AAAA
3DB05228AAAA
3DB05530AAAA

Outdoor equipment 94xxUX flat Model number
ODU Mnemonic & Remote Inventory
4QAM/16QAM RTPC numbers
Outdoor unit 9418 fs=1092.5MHz 1--1 3CC14472AAxx

3DB05229AAAA
3DB05532AAAA
3DB05531AAAA
3DB05533AAAA
3DB05534AAAA
3DB05225AAAA
WR62 10dB HSB Coupler (UX flat only) 3EJ04472AAAA 3CC13472AAxx
Remote
Outdoor equipment 94xxUX Mnemonic Model number Inventory
numbers
Outdoor unit 13 GHz 4QAM without RTPC 9413UXR201 3CC08879AAxx 3CC08879xxxx
Outdoor unit 13 GHz 4QAM with RTPC 9413UXR202 3CC12690AAxx 3CC11737xxxx
Outdoor unit 13 GHz 16QAM 9413UXR203 3CC12683AAxx 3CC11736xxxx
Outdoor unit 15 GHz standard power 9415UXR201 3CC08880AAxx 3CC08880xxxx
Outdoor unit 15 GHz high power 9415UXR202 3CC08978AAxx 3CC08978xxxx

Remote
Outdoor equipment 94xxUX Mnemonic Model number Inventory
numbers
Outdoor unit 15 GHz 4QAM with RTPC 9415UXR203 3CC12979AAxx 3CC12978xxxx
Outdoor unit 18 GHz standard power 9418UXR201 3CC08883AAxx 3CC08883xxxx
Outdoor unit 18 GHz high power 9418UXR202 3CC08979AAxx 3CC08979xxxx
or
3CC12756xxxx
HSB Coupler 13 GHz 9413UXR111 3CC07985AAxx 3CC07985AAxx
HSB Coupler 23/25 GHz 942xUXR111 3CC07987AAxx 3CC07987AAxx
HSB Coupler 38 GHz 943xUXR111 3CC08000AAxx 3CC08000AAxx

A.9.2 -- Indoor equipment and software
Indoor equipment Mnemonic Model number Comments
Light Indoor unit -- standalone 19 120

3EJ03625AGAA 3CC09426ACxx
Ohms
Light Indoor unit -- standalone 19 75
3EJ03625AHAA 3CC09426ACxx
Ohms
Main Indoor Unit 4x2 Mbit/s 3EJ03619ADAA 3CC08973Axxx
Main Indoor Unit 34+2 Mbit/s 3EJ03626ADAA 3CC08920Axxx
Extension Indoor Unit 1+0 9400UXB211 3CC08897Axxx
Extension Indoor Unit 1+1 basic 9400UXB221 3CC08898Axxx
Extension Indoor Unit 1+1 mux prot. 9400UXB231 3CC08976Axxx
4x2 Mbit/s
Extension Indoor Unit 1+1 mux prot. 8x2 9400UXB232 3CC08975AAxx
Mbit/s
Extension Indoor Unit 1+1 mux prot. 16x2 9400UXB233 3CC08974AAxx
Mbit/s
Extension Indoor Unit 1+1 mux prot. 34+2 9400UXB234 3CC08908AAxx
Mbit/s
Access Indoor Unit 34+2 Mbit/s 9400UXB144 3CC08977AAxx
Software Feature Key Unit 9400XXB007 3CC07619ABxx
Main IDU Connector Kit 3CC08048ABxx
3CC14311AAxx Craft Terminal
LUX 50 Craft Kit 3EJ03500AAAA 946LUX50
CD--ROM
3CC12903AHAA Multilingual Alcatel
9400 LX&UX
CD--ROM
Handbook
3CC14134AAxx Cable Adapter
CT--IDU LUX50
Cable Adapter CT--IDU LUX50 3EJ03500ABAA 3CC14134AAxx
Craft Terminal 946LUX 50 SW CD 3EJ03500ACAA 3CC14311AAxx
LXUX Documentation CD--ROM 9400UXD103 3CC12903AHAA

A.9.3 -- Commercial items
This table maps the various items in the installation manual to the commercial references by which they are sold.
The composition of each item is given by way of indication; the definitive list is generated according to the
equipment configuration.
OUTDOOR PARTS
Installations Mnemonic Model number Comments

Outdoor adjustable pole mounting 1+0 (integrated 9400UXI102 3CC10752AAxx
antenna)
Outdoor adjustable pole mounting 1+1 (integrated 9400UXI101 3CC06071AAxx

antenna)
Wind strengthening 9400UXI103 3CC11453AAxx Optional

Outdoor fix pole mounting (non integrated antenna) 9413UXI102 1AB146090003 Adapter nose
13 GHz 1AB128510002 Support
9413UXI103 3CC05751ACxx Flextwist 13 GHz 60 cm
9415UXI103 3CC05750ACxx Flextwist 15 GHz 60 cm
9418UXI103 3CC05749ACxx Flextwist 18GHz 60 cm
Outdoor fix pole mounting (non integrated antenna) 942xUXI102 1AB146090004 Adapter nose (23/25 GHz)
23 / 25 GHz 1AB128510002 Support
9423UXI103 3CC05749ACxx Flextwist 23 /25GHz 60 cm
Integrated antenna 13 GHz 0.6m 9413UXI002 3CC06215AAAB
Integrated antenna 15 GHz 0.3m 9415UXI001 3CC10952AAxx
Integrated antenna 18 GHz 0.3m 9418UXI001 3CC10953AAxx
Fix attenuator 13/15/18 GHz 9413UXR120 3CC08543AAxx 3 dB
3CC08543ABxx 6 dB
3CC08543ACxx 10 dB
H polarization kit for HSB coupler, 13 GHz 9413UXR112 3CC07725AAxx

H polarization kit for HSB coupler, 23 & 25 GHz 942xUXR112 3CC11264AAxx
Pipe SUPOUTD001 3CC04658AExx
Self supported mast SUPMAST001 3CC05148AAxx

INDOOR PARTS

Fan replacement kit 9400UXZ200 3CC11761AAxx Contains 2 fans (12 V)
Fan replacement kit 9400UXZ201 3CC12847AAxx Contains 2 fans (5 V)
19 supporting rack 9400XXI300 1AD039050001
Indoor wall mounting 3U 9400UXI301 3CC09614AAxx Includes a set of connectors

3CC07966AAxx and supplies, an alternative to
3CC07957AAxx the 19 support rack
Indoor wall mounting 9U 9400UXI302 1AD029510001 Alternative to the 19 support

rack
Indoor desktop mounting kit (standalone solution) 9400UXI303 3CC08295AAxx Includes a set of connectors
and supplies, an alternative to
the 19 support rack
19 DC distributor board (6 accesses) 9400XXC511 1AD053060001 48 V

3CC08211AAxx
3CC08165AAxx
19 DC distributor board (6 accesses) 9400XXC511 1AD053060001 24 V

3CC08209AAxx
3CC08212AAxx
Wall mounting DC distributor board (6 accesses) 9400XXC512 77096248 48 V

3CC08165AAxx
3CC08211AAxx
Wall mounting DC distributor board (6 accesses) 9400XXC512 77096248 24 V

3CC08209AAxx
3CC08212AAxx
Consumable set 9400UXT002 3CC06503AAxx
Service kit for 9400UX ODU 9400UXT102 3CC07972AAxx Telephone headset cable
1AF00375ABxx
Light service kit for 9400UX ODU 9400UXT112 3CC07972AAxx Cable
Light service kit for 9400UX flat ODU 3EJ04113AAAA 3CC13477AAxx Rx power monitoring cable
Station tool kit 9400UXT103 3CC08409AAxx One for each station
Telephone handset 9400XXB000 3CC07946AAxx
Cable tray Indoor Cablofil 6 m INFRA00003 3CC07580AAxx
Cable tray Indoor PVC 4 m INFRA00004 3CC06511AAxx
Cable tray Outdoor CES 12 m INFRA00005 3CC06512AAxx
Cable tray Outdoor CAPRI 12 m INFRA00006 3CC06759AAxx
Battery M4T28--BR12--SH1
1AB084760003
The following table maps the various items in the installation manual to the commercial references by which they
are sold. The composition of each item is given by way of indication; the definitive list is generated according
to the equipment configuration.

CABLING

Additional cable for 1+1 configuration 9400UXC130 3CC07157ABxx note : the cable
3CC07160ABxx is attached to
the commercial reference of
the extension IDU
Back to back cables 9400UXC333 3CC08729AAxx Telephone service channel

9400UXC332 3CC07711AAxx Supervision
Indoor/Outdoor cable (length < 300 meters) 9400UXI202 1AC001100022 Per 50 m
Indoor/Outdoor cable connector set (2 pieces) 9400UXI203 1AB095530021
Indoor/Outdoor cable grounding kit 9400UXI204 1AB128500002
Power supply
pp y connection kit 9400XXC501 3CC08165AAxx 48 V (per 20m)
3CC08209AAxx 24 V (per 20m)
Grounding connection kit (IDU + ODU) 9400XXC502 3CC08166AAxx Per 20 m
120 Ohms cable 16 pairs 9400XXI504 3CC08809AAxx Per 15 m
One terminal block 10 pairs 9400XXI505 3CC07921AAxx

3CC05527AAxx
75 Ohms connection kit (2 tributaries) 9400XXI506 3CC07917AAxx Per 15 m
Alarm cable 1 pair 9400XXI508 3CC08811AAxx Per 15 m
Alarm cable 15 pairs 9400XXI509 3CC08817AAxx Per 15 m
Distributor panel 4 x 2 Mbit/s 9400XXI404 3CC08061AAxx and 75 / 1.6/5.6. Use adapters if

3CC07885AAxx or BNC ports are requested
3CC07885ADxx
9400XXI404 3CC08061ABxx and 75 / BNC

+ 1 x 9400XXI405 3CC07759AAxx or
3CC07759ADxx
Distributor panel 8 x 2 Mbit/s 9400XXI408 3CC08061AAxx and 75 / 1,6/5,6

3CC07885ABxx or
3CC07885AExx

+ 2 x 9400XXI405 3CC07759ABxx or
3CC07759AExx
9400XXI408 3CC07810AAxx 120 EMC

3CC07658AAxx
9400XXI408 3CC08062AAxx 120 non EMC

3CC07658AAxx
Distributor panel 16 x 2 Mbit/s 9400XXI416 3CC08061AAxx and 75 / 1.6/5.6

2x3CC07885ABxx or
2x3CC07885AExx

+ 4 x 9400XXI405 2x3CC07759ABxx or
2x3CC07759AExx
9400XXI416 3CC07810AAxx 120 EMC

2x3CC07658AAxx
9400XXI416 3CC08062AAxx 120 non EMC

2x3CC07658AAxx
BNC adapter 9400XXI405 3CC08249AAxx To be ordered if the 34 Mbit/s

tributary is used with BNC
connector
F interface cable adapter 3EJ03500ABAA 3CC14134AAxx Adapter CT--IDU LUX50

Appendix 10 -- Software and documentation list
A.10.1 -- Software
CD--ROM -- Craft Terminal Minimum

CD--ROM
Item Change
(including IDU 360 Embedded SW) identification
Status (ICS)
Craft Terminal 946LUX 50 3CC14311AAAA 03
Embedded software -- IDU (360) Minimum

Software
Item Change
identification
Status (ICS)
CLASSIC IDU (MCU) 3CC14057AAAA 02
Embedded software -- IDU (302) Minimum

Software
Item Change
identification
Status (ICS)
CLASSIC IDU (MCU) 3CC08538AAxx 06
LIGHT IDU (MCU) 3CC08755AAxx 04
EXTENSION IDU (SCU) 3CC08540AAxx 07
Embedded software -- ODU Minimum

Software
Item Change
identification
Status (ICS)
ODU 94xxUXR201 to 94xxUXR203 3CC06452AJxx 04
ODU Flat 3CC13007AAxx 01
A.10.2 -- Documentation
Documentation CD--ROM Minimum

Commercial CD--ROM
Item Change
Code identification
Status (ICS)
Alcatel 9400UX 9400UXD103 3CC12903AHAA 01

Appendix 11 -- LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
MNEMONIC DEFINITION
AC Abnormal condition
ACO Alarm cut-off
ADC Analog/Digital Converter
AGC Automatic Gain Control
AIS Alarm Indication Signal
ATPC Automatic Transmission Power Control
BBE Number of errored blocks that are not part of an SES
BER Bit Error Rate
BTS Base Transceiver Station
CIA_NUM Digital Cable Interface Adapter

CT Craft Terminal
DCE Data Circuit Terminating Equipment
DTE Data Terminal Equipment
DTMF Dual-Tone Multi Frequency
ECT Equipment Craft Terminal
EMC ElectroMagnetic Compatibility
EPS Equipment Protection Switching
ES Errored seconds
ESC Engineering Service Channel
ESD ElectroStatic Discharge
ESR Early Switching Request
ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute
FD Frequency Diversity
FEC Forward Error Correction
FTP File Transfer Protocol
HDB3 High Density Binary 3 code (3rd order)
HDLC High-level Data Link Communication
HSB Hot StandBy
IDU InDoor Unit
IF Intermediate Frequency
I2C Inter Integrated Circuit
ITU International Telecommunication Union
JRE Java Runtime Environment
LAU Line Access Unit

LED Light Emitting Diode
LIU Line Interface Unit
LO Local Oscillator
MCU_NUM Multiplexing and Control Unit with digital cable interface
MDU Modulation/Demodulation Unit
NE Network Element
NMC Network Management Center

NMS Network Management System
NSA No Service Affecting
NTP Network Time Protocol
OCT Office Craft Terminal
ODU OutDoor Unit

OS Operation System
OSPF Open Shortest Path First
PCM Pulse Code Modulation
PRBS Pseudo--Random Binary Sequence
PSU Power Supply Unit
RF Radio Frequency
RTPC Remote Transmit Power Control
RX Receiver
SA Service Affecting
SCU_NUM Service Channel Unit with digital cable interface
SD Space Diversity
SES Severely Errored Seconds
SI Unavailable seconds
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol resulting from TCP/IP
architecture used on Ethernet type networks
SWP Software Package
TMN Telecom Management Network
TX Transmitter
UAS Unavailable seconds
UF Manufacturing unit
UX Flat ODU 9400 UX with a Flat outdoor unit
VCXO Voltage Controlled Crystal Oscillator

INDEX
A Configuration, 22, 23
1+0, 30
1+1, 34
Alarm & Remote control, wiring, 107
capacity, 28
Alarms, description, 42 changing, 271
hardware, 28
Antenna
indoor unit, 292
coarse alignement, 82
multiplexer/demultiplexer protection, 36
polarization, 77
remote indication loops, 309
Assembling, N type coaxial connectors, 340 service channels, 295
service channels 3, 308
software, 113
B Configuration with non---integrated antenna,
installing, 94
Between a terminals units, wiring, 108 Consumables, set, 337
Between terminals of a station, wiring, 111 Controls, indications and connectors, IDU, 45
Bit rate Access version, 49
changing by software, 284 Classic version, 45
changing via LAU/LIU boards, 285 Extension version, 48
C D
Delivery, equipment, 63
Capacity, configuration, 28
Description
Changing alarms, 42
1+1 coupler polarisation, 319 equipment, 21
bit rate by software, 284 IDU/ODU cable, 32
bit rate via LAU/LIU boards, 285 loopback, 42
configuration, 271 service channels, 38
fans, 325 telesignalling and remote controls, 42
frequency, 273
fuse, 327
IDU, 266
MCU board battery, 323 E
NE physical address, 288
ODU, 269 Human exposure, Electromagnetic fields, 329
power level, 317 End, commissioning, 263
redundancy configurations, 312
SIMM memories, 322 Engineering service channel, wiring, 106
software key, 288 Equipment
tributaries, 274 commissioning, 255
tributary impedance, 283 checking, 260, 261, 262, 263
delivery, 63
Coarse alignment, antenna, 82
description, 21
Commissioning features, 24, 27
end, 263 grounding, 100
equipment, 255 installing, 70
checking, 260, 261, 262, 263 labels, 64
order, 255 maintenance, 265
station A management, 44
(phase 1), 256 operation, 265
(phase 2), 261 servicing, 265
station B, 259 wiring, 99

F equipment, 265
preventive, 265
Fans, changing, 325 Management, equipment, 44
Features, equipment, 24, 27 Manual
structure, 13
Frequency, changing, 273
using, 13
Fuse, changing, 327
MCU board battery, changing, 323
Model, list, 355
G
Grounding, equipment, 100 N
NE physical address, changing, 288
I
IDU
O
changing, 266 ODU
controls, indications and connectors, 45 changing, 269
Access version, 49 installing, 75
Classic version, 45
Extension version, 48 ODU 9400UX flat ODU, 87
opening, 291 installing, 97
IDU/ODU, wiring, 102 ODU 94xxUXR201, 94xxUXR202, 94xxUXR203,

installing, 97
IDU/ODU cable, description, 32
Installing, 87
Indoor unit, configuration, 292 configuration with non---integrated antenna, 94
Installation ODU, 75
information, 334 ODU 9400UX flat ODU, 97
ODU 94xxUXR201, 94xxUXR202, 94xxUXR203,
tools, 70
97
Installing pole mounting
equipment, 70 9400UXI101, 85
laborack, 72 9400UXI102, 77
Light IDU 19 version, 71 on the pipe, 82, 88
software, 114 Opening, IDU, 291
wall mounting, 72
Operation, 30
Item, list, 355 equipment, 265
software, 113
L Order, commissioning, 255
Labels, equipment, 64
Laborack, installing, 72
P
Light IDU 19 version, installing, 71 Pin out, user ports, 342
Pointing the antenna
List
pole mounting 1+0, 9400UXI102, 260
items, 355
pole mounting 1+1, 9400UXI101, 259
models, 355
Polarization, antenna, 77
Loopback, description, 42
Pole mounting
9400UXI101, installing, 85
M 9400UXI102, installing, 77
on the pipe, 82, 88
Maintenance Pole mounting 1+0 (9400UXI101), pointing the
corrective, 265, 266 antenna, 259

Pole mounting 1+0 (9400UXI102), pointing the Telesignalling and remote controls, description, 42
antenna, 260
Tools, installation, 70
Tributaries
S changing, 274
wiring, 104
Safety, instructions, 14
Service channel, telephone, 294 Tributary impedance, changing, 283
Service channels, description, 38

Service kit, 338
Servicing, equipment, 265 U
Software Upgrading, software, 289
configuration, 113
installing, 114
operation, 113
Software key, changing, 288 W
Station A, commissioning
(phase 1), 256 Wall mounting, installing, 72
(phase 2), 261
Wiring
Station B, commissioning, 259 alarm & remote control, 107
Symbols, 14, 15 between a terminals units, 108
between terminals of a station, 111
engineering service channel, 106
T equipment, 99
IDU/ODU, 102
Technical characteristics, 51 tributaries, 104

FIN DU DOCUMENT

ALCATEL 9400 UX Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ALCATEL 9400 UX Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ALCATEL

Short Title Alcatel 9400UX LUX50 2.1

2/374 Issue 01 -- December 2005 3CC14295AGAA TQ BJA 01

3CC14295AGAA TQ BJA 01 Issue 01 -- December 2005 3/374

4/374 Issue 01 -- December 2005 3CC14295AGAA TQ BJA 01

a Team tuned to your needs for your entire satisfaction

Congratulations on having bought your equipment from Alcatel.

3CC14295AGAA TQ BJA 01 Issue 01 -- December 2005 5/374

6/374 Issue 01 -- December 2005 3CC14295AGAA TQ BJA 01

2 -- Description of the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

3CC14295AGAA TQ BJA 01 Issue 01 -- December 2005 7/374

4 -- Configuration and operation software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

8/374 Issue 01 -- December 2005 3CC14295AGAA TQ BJA 01

3CC14295AGAA TQ BJA 01 Issue 01 -- December 2005 9/374

6 -- Operation, servicing and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

7 -- Changing configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

10/374 Issue 01 -- December 2005 3CC14295AGAA TQ BJA 01

Appendix 1 -- Human exposure to electromagnetic fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Appendix 2 -- Installation information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Appendix 3 -- Set of consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

3CC14295AGAA TQ BJA 01 Issue 01 -- December 2005 11/374

Appendix 5 -- Assembling N type coaxial connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

Appendix 6 -- Pin out of user ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

Appendix 7 -- Alarm synthesis indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

Appendix 8 -- Alarm Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Appendix 9 -- List of models and commercial items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

Appendix 10 -- Software and documentation list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

Appendix 11 -- List of abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

12/374 Issue 01 -- December 2005 3CC14295AGAA TQ BJA 01

1.2 -- Using the manual

3CC14295AGAA TQ BJA 01 Issue 01 -- December 2005 13/374

! Prompts the user to refer to the manual.

Dangerous electrical voltages

Presence of heat-radiating mechanical parts

14/374 Issue 01 -- December 2005 3CC14295AGAA TQ BJA 01

Terminal for connecting the protective ground in power supply wiring

Other ground terminal

1.3.2.3 -- Other symbols

Indicates compliance with European standards

1.3.3 - Symbols used in the document

-- This symbol, introducing the description of a procedure, indicates that it will

-- This symbol, introducing the description of a procedure, indicates that it cannot

3CC14295AGAA TQ BJA 01 Issue 01 -- December 2005 15/374

16/374 Issue 01 -- December 2005 3CC14295AGAA TQ BJA 01

18/374 Issue 01 -- December 2005 3CC14295AGAA TQ BJA 01

3CC14295AGAA TQ BJA 01 Issue 01 -- December 2005 19/374

20/374 Issue 01 -- December 2005 3CC14295AGAA TQ BJA 01

2.1.1 -- Simplified description

Alcatel 9400 UX -- 2x2 to 16x2 Mbit/s or 34 Mbit/s + 2Mbit/s

Designation Band Frequency Duplex difference

9418 UX 18 17,7--19,7 EN 301 128 ERC 12--03 1010, 1008, 340,

3CC14295AGAA TQ BJA 01 Issue 01 -- December 2005 21/374

9425 UX 25 24.5--26.52 EN 300 431 ERC 13--02 annex B 1008

9438 UX 38 37--39.5 EN 300 197 ERC 12--01 1260

(*) Please consult factory if other Tx/Rx separations are requested.

22/374 Issue 01 -- December 2005 3CC14295AGAA TQ BJA 01

Figure 1 - Alcatel 9400 UX 1+0 configuration

2.1.2.2 -- Protected configuration

The (1+1) configurations include automatic errorless Rx switching.

SD : Space Diversity, FD: frequency diversity

3CC14295AGAA TQ BJA 01 Issue 01 -- December 2005 23/374

IDU CONFIGURATION APPLICATIONS

2.1.3 -- ALCATEL 9400 UX features